|
|
|
accept(1m) -- allow/prevent LP destination queuing requests
|
|
The accept command permits the lp command (see lp(1)) to accept printing requests for each named LP printer or printer class destination queue. The reject command causes the lp command to reject subsequent printing requests for each named destination queue. Requests already queued will continue to be processed for printing by the lpsched scheduler (see lpsched(1M)). Use the lpstat command (see lps... |
|
acct(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
|
acctcms(1m) -- command summary from per-process accounting records
|
|
acctcms reads one or more files, normally in the form described in acct(4). It adds all records for processes that executed identically-named commands, sorts them, and writes them to the standard output, normally using an internal summary format. |
|
acctcom(1m) -- search and print process accounting files
|
|
The acctcom command reads file, standard input, or /var/adm/pacct, in the form described in acct(4) and writes selected records to standard output. Each record represents the execution of one process. The output has the following column titles: |
|
acctcon(1m) -- connect-time accounting
|
|
The acctcon1 command converts a sequence of login/logoff records read from its standard input to a sequence of records, one per login session. Its input should normally be redirected from /var/adm/wtmp or /var/adm/wtmps. Its output is ASCII, giving device, user ID, login name, prime connect time (seconds), non-prime connect time (seconds), session starting time (numeric), and starting date and tim... |
|
acctcon1(1m) -- connect-time accounting
|
|
The acctcon1 command converts a sequence of login/logoff records read from its standard input to a sequence of records, one per login session. Its input should normally be redirected from /var/adm/wtmp or /var/adm/wtmps. Its output is ASCII, giving device, user ID, login name, prime connect time (seconds), non-prime connect time (seconds), session starting time (numeric), and starting date and tim... |
|
acctcon2(1m) -- connect-time accounting
|
|
The acctcon1 command converts a sequence of login/logoff records read from its standard input to a sequence of records, one per login session. Its input should normally be redirected from /var/adm/wtmp or /var/adm/wtmps. Its output is ASCII, giving device, user ID, login name, prime connect time (seconds), non-prime connect time (seconds), session starting time (numeric), and starting date and tim... |
|
acctdisk(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
acctdusg(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
acctmerg(1m) -- merge or add total accounting files
|
|
acctmerg reads its standard input and up to nine additional files, all in the tacct format (see acct(4)) or an ASCII version thereof. It merges these inputs by adding records whose keys (normally user ID and name) are identical, and expects the inputs to be sorted on those keys. |
|
accton(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
acctprc(1m) -- process accounting
|
|
acctprc1 reads input in the form described by acct(4), adds login names corresponding to user IDs, then writes for each process an ASCII line giving user ID, login name, prime CPU time (tics), non-prime CPU time (tics), and mean memory size (in memory segment units). If ctmp is given, it is expected to contain a list of login sessions in the form described in acctcon(1M), sorted by user ID and log... |
|
acctprc1(1m) -- process accounting
|
|
acctprc1 reads input in the form described by acct(4), adds login names corresponding to user IDs, then writes for each process an ASCII line giving user ID, login name, prime CPU time (tics), non-prime CPU time (tics), and mean memory size (in memory segment units). If ctmp is given, it is expected to contain a list of login sessions in the form described in acctcon(1M), sorted by user ID and log... |
|
acctprc2(1m) -- process accounting
|
|
acctprc1 reads input in the form described by acct(4), adds login names corresponding to user IDs, then writes for each process an ASCII line giving user ID, login name, prime CPU time (tics), non-prime CPU time (tics), and mean memory size (in memory segment units). If ctmp is given, it is expected to contain a list of login sessions in the form described in acctcon(1M), sorted by user ID and log... |
|
acctsh(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
acctwtmp(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
acl_edit(1m) -- Edits or lists an object's ACLs
|
|
The acl_edit command is a client program that, when invoked, binds to the specified object's ACL Manager (which is implemented in the object's server), and allows the user to manipulate the object's ACL through the standard DCE ACL interface. This interface is the sec_acl_...() interface documented in the OSF DCE Application Development Reference. The acl_edit command automatically binds to the... |
|
adb(1) -- absolute debugger
|
|
The adb command executes a general-purpose debugging program that is sensitive to the underlying architecture of the processor and operating system on which it is run It can be used to examine files and provide a controlled environment for executing HP-UX programs. adb inspects exactly one object file, referred to as the current object file, and one memory file, referred to as the current memory f... |
|
add_directory(1m) -- (including application-defined attributes) of a directory
|
|
The add directory command adds a value to a modifiable, set-valued attribute (including application-defined attributes) of a directory. If the attribute does not exist, this command creates it. Usually, this task is performed through the client application. See the DCE Administration Guide for more information about attributes. |
|
add_object(1m) -- (including application-defined attributes) of an object entry
|
|
The add object command adds a value to a modifiable, set-valued attribute (including application-defined attributes) of an object entry. If the attribute does not exist, this command creates it. Usually, this task is performed through the client application. See the DCE Administration Guide for more information about attributes. |
|
adjust(1) -- simple text formatter
|
|
The adjust command is a simple text formatter for filling, centering, left and right justifying, or only right justifying text paragraphs, and is designed for interactive use. It reads the concatenation of input files (or standard input if none are given) and produces on standard output a formatted version of its input, with each paragraph formatted separately. If - is given as an input filename, ... |
|
admin(1) -- create and administer SCCS files
|
|
The admin command is used to create new SCCS files and change the parameters of existing ones. Arguments to admin, which may appear in any order, ( unless -- is specified as an argument, in which case all arguments after -- are treated as files ) consist of option arguments, beginning with -, and named files (note that SCCS file names must begin with the characters s.). If a named file does not ex... |
|
advertise(1m) -- Configures the system as a global server by adding the server's entry to the cell profile
|
|
The advertise command causes DTS to forward the name and attributes of the server to CDS by binding the server's protocol tower to the CDS object and adding an entry for the server in the cell profile. Once the server's entry is in the cell profile, it is configured as a global server, and servers outside of the LAN can access it. |
|
alias(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
AM60Srvr(1m) -- disk array server daemon
|
|
AM60Srvr is the server portion of the Array Manager 60 management software. It monitors the operation and performance of the disk array, and services external requests from clients executing disk array commands. AM60Srvr monitors disk array performance and status, maintains disk array logs, and allows clients to examine and change disk array configuration. AM60Srvr must be running to allow managem... |
|
amcfg(1m) -- manages LUN (logical drive) configuration on the disk array
|
|
amcfg manages the LUN configuration on the disk array identified by ArrayID. This involves creating, deleting, replacing, and assigning ownership of all LUNS on the disk array. WARNING: Deleting a LUN will destroy all the data on the LUN. Backup all vital data before deleting a LUN. The ArrayID used to address the disk array can be the disk array serial number or name, if one has been assigned to ... |
|
amdload(1m) -- downloads new firmware to the disk array controllers, the disk system BCC controllers, and disks
|
|
amdload copies new firmware code to the disk array controllers, the disk system BCC controllers, or the disks in the disk array identified by ArrayID. The new code is stored in the file identified by codefile. The ArrayID used to address the disk array can be the disk array serial number or name, if one has been assigned to the disk array. |
|
amdsp(1m) -- display the status and operating configuration of the disk array
|
|
amdsp displays status and configuration information for the disk array identified by ArrayID. Logical configuration, physical configuration, and current status can all be displayed using amdsp. A list of all the disk arrays recognized by the host can also be displayed. The ArrayID used to address the disk array can be the disk array serial number or name, if one has been assigned to the disk array... |
|
amfmt(1m) -- disk format, not supported
|
|
The amfmt command is a data destructive command and is not supported. If an attempt is made to execute the amfmt command, data may be destroyed. |
|
amlog(1m) -- displays host-based controller log entries for a disk array
|
|
amlog displays the contents of the disk array controller logs maintained by the host. These logs contain information useful for diagnosing and troubleshooting the disk array. The host maintains multiple log files containing entries for each disk array. The ArrayID used to address the disk array must be the disk array ID. An alias name cannot be used because alias names are not recorded in the log. |
|
ammgr(1m) -- manages the operating characteristics of the disk array
|
|
ammgr manages the operating characteristics of the disk array by providing access to the settings used to control disk array operation. In most cases, these settings control the operation of the entire disk array; consequently, every LUN on the disk array will be affected by any changes made using this command. The exception is a parity scan, which impacts only the specified LUN. The ArrayID used ... |
|
amutil(1m) -- controls various disk array management functions
|
|
amutil controls a variety of management operations on the disk array identified by ArrayID. Locating hardware components and managing the rebuild process are done using amutil. The ArrayID used to address the disk array can be the disk array serial number or name, if one has been assigned to the disk array. |
|
answer(1) -- phone message transcription system
|
|
The answer interactive program helps you to transcribe telephone (and other) messages into electronic mail. The program uses your personal elm alias database and the system elm alias database, allowing you to use aliases to address the messages. |
|
ar(1) -- create and maintain portable archives and libraries
|
|
The ar command maintains groups of files combined into a single archive file. Its main use is to create and update library files as used by the link editor (see ld(1)). It can be used, however, for any similar purpose. The magic string and file headers used by ar consist of printable ASCII characters. If an archive is composed of printable files, the entire archive is printable. Individual files a... |
|
arp(1m) -- address resolution display and control
|
|
The arp command displays and modifies the Internet-to-Ethernet and Internet-to-Fibre Channel address translation tables used by the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). |
|
as(1) -- assembler for Itanium-based systems
|
|
as assembles the named source file file, or the standard input if file is not specified. The output of the assembler is an ELF relocatable object file that must be processed by ld before it can be executed. Assembler output is stored in file outfile. If the -o outfile option is not specified, the assembler constructs a default name. If no source file is specified, outfile will be a.out; otherwise ... |
|
asa(1) -- interpret ASA carriage control characters
|
|
asa interprets the output of FORTRAN programs that utilize ASA carriage control characters. It processes either the files whose names are given as arguments, or the standard input if - is specified or if no file names are given. The first character of each line is assumed to be a control character. The following control characters are interpreted as indicated: (blank) Output a single new-line char... |
|
Asecure(1m) -- control access to Audio on a workstation
|
|
On Series 700 workstations, audio is secured so that only the user on the local workstation can access audio. You use the asecure command to modify audio security. This command does not apply to X stations; on an X station, access to audio is unrestricted. To modify audio security, become root on the local workstation where you want make a change. Then, use asecure as follows: /opt/audio/bin/asecu... |
|
asecure(1m) -- control access to Audio on a workstation
|
|
On Series 700 workstations, audio is secured so that only the user on the local workstation can access audio. You use the asecure command to modify audio security. This command does not apply to X stations; on an X station, access to audio is unrestricted. To modify audio security, become root on the local workstation where you want make a change. Then, use asecure as follows: /opt/audio/bin/asecu... |
|
Aserver(1m) -- start the audio server
|
|
The Aserver command starts the HP-UX Audio server, which can run on a system with audio hardware. See Audio(5) for information about which systems have audio hardware. The -f option forces the starting of the Audio server; this option is only needed if the Aserver has problems starting. |
|
aserver(1m) -- start the audio server
|
|
The Aserver command starts the HP-UX Audio server, which can run on a system with audio hardware. See Audio(5) for information about which systems have audio hardware. The -f option forces the starting of the Audio server; this option is only needed if the Aserver has problems starting. |
|
as_ia(1) -- assembler for Itanium-based systems
|
|
as assembles the named source file file, or the standard input if file is not specified. The output of the assembler is an ELF relocatable object file that must be processed by ld before it can be executed. Assembler output is stored in file outfile. If the -o outfile option is not specified, the assembler constructs a default name. If no source file is specified, outfile will be a.out; otherwise ... |
|
as_pa(1) -- assembler for PA-RISC systems
|
|
The as command assembles source text from files or standard input and produces a relocatable object file suitable for the link editor, ld (see ld(1)). Source text is read from standard input only if no file argument is given. Standard input cannot be a device file, such as a terminal. The option and file arguments can be intermingled on the command line. Every specified option applies to every spe... |
|
at(1) -- execute batched commands immediately or at a later time
|
|
The at and batch commands schedule jobs for execution by the cron daemon (see cron(1M)). at schedules a job for execution at a specified time. at can also list (-l) or remove (-r) existing scheduled at and batch jobs. batch schedules a job for execution immediately, or as soon as system load levels permit. You can enter commands into a job in one of the following ways: Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 ... |
|
attributes(1) -- describe an audio file
|
|
This command provides information about an audio file, including file format, data format, sampling rate, number of channels, data length and header length. |
|
audevent(1m) -- change or display event or system call audit status
|
|
audevent changes or displays the auditing status of the given events or system calls. The event is used to specify names associated with certain self-auditing commands; syscall is used to select related system calls. If neither -P, -p, -F, nor -f is specified, the current status of the selected events or system calls is displayed. If the -E option is supplied, it is redundant to specify events wit... |
|
audisp(1m) -- display the audit information as requested by the parameters
|
|
audisp analyzes and displays the audit information contained in the specified audit_filename audit files. The audit files are merged into a single audit trail in time order. Although the entire audit trail is analyzed, audisp allows you to limit the information displayed, by specifying options. This command is restricted to privileged users. Any unspecified option is interpreted as an unrestricted... |
|
auditd(1m) -- Starts the DCE Audit Daemon.
|
|
The auditd command starts the Audit daemon. The Audit daemon must be run on the host before the audit clients. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 auditd(1m) Open Software Foundation auditd(1m) The Audit daemon can only service audit clients that are on the host where it is running. Thus, an Audit daemon must be installed and run on every host in the cell that has audi... |
|
audomon(1m) -- audit overflow monitor daemon
|
|
audomon monitors the capacity of the current audit file and the file system on which the audit file is located, and prints out warning messages when either is approaching full. It also checks the audit file and the file system against 2 switch points: FileSpaceSwitch (FSS) and AuditFileSwitch (AFS) and if either is reached, audit recording automatically switches to the backup audit file if it is a... |
|
audsys(1m) -- start or halt the auditing system and set or display audit file information
|
|
audsys allows the user to start or halt the auditing system, to specify the auditing system "current" and "next" audit files (and their switch sizes), or to display auditing system status information. This command is restricted to super-users. The "current" audit file is the file to which the auditing system writes audit records. When the "current" file grows to either its Audit File Switc... |
|
audusr(1m) -- select users to audit
|
|
audusr is used to specify users to be audited or excluded from auditing. If no arguments are specified, audusr displays the audit setting of every user. audusr is restricted to super-users. |
|
auth.adm(1m) -- activate, deactivate, or query about HP-UX Integrated Login
|
|
The auth.adm command makes it easy to activate, deactivate or query about HP-UX Integrated Login. During activation, auth.adm sets up a machine to obtain integrated login behavior using any of the following commands: login, rlogin, telnet, dtlogin, su, passwd, and ftpd. auth.adm saves the Integrated Login configuration, specified by -l, -b and -a arguments, in the file /etc/auth.conf. This configu... |
|
authck(1m) -- check internal consistency of Authentication database
|
|
authck checks both the overall structure and internal field consistency of all components of the Authentication database. It reports all problems it finds. Only users who have the superuser capability can run this command. When pwck is used with the -s option, authck is run with the -p option automatically. |
|
automount(1m) -- install automatic mount points
|
|
The automount command installs autofs mount points and associates an automount map with each mount point. The autofs filesystem monitors attempts to access directories within it and notifies the automountd daemon (see automountd(1M)). The daemon uses the map to locate a filesystem, which it then mounts at the point of reference within the autofs filesystem. You can assign a map to an autofs mount ... |
|
automountd(1m) -- autofs mount/unmount daemon
|
|
automountd is an RPC server that answers file system mount and unmount requests from the autofs filesystem. It uses local files or name service maps to locate filesystems to be mounted. These maps are described with the automount command (see automount(1M)). The automountd daemon is automatically invoked if the AUTOFS variable is set to 1 in /etc/rc.config.d/nfsconf. |
|
autopush(1m) -- manage system database of automatically pushed STREAMS modules
|
|
autopush manages the system database that is used for automatic configuration of STREAMS devices. The command is used in three different ways as dictated by the -f, -g, and -r command-line options described below. |
|
auto_parms(1m) -- initial system configuration plus DHCP support command
|
|
The auto_parms command is a system initialization command that handles first-boot configuration, that is, the setting of unique system "initial identity parameters", and ongoing management of DHCP lease(s). The auto_parms command is invoked at boot time by the /sbin/rc command. Initially it loads a list of available ethernet interfaces and requests a DHCP lease on each interface. It stops when a... |
|
awk(1) -- pattern-directed scanning and processing language
|
|
awk scans each input file for lines that match any of a set of patterns specified literally in program or in one or more files specified as -f progfile. With each pattern there can be an associated action that is to be performed when a line in a file matches the pattern. Each line is matched against the pattern portion of every pattern-action statement, and the associated action is performed for e... |
|
backup(1m) -- backup or archive file system
|
|
The backup command uses find(1) and cpio(1) to save a cpio archive of all files that have been modified since the modification time of /var/adm/archivedate on the default tape drive (/dev/update.src). backup should be invoked periodically to ensure adequate file backup. The -A option suppresses warning messages regarding optional access control list entries. backup(1M) does not backup optional acc... |
|
banner(1) -- make posters in large letters
|
|
banner prints its arguments (each up to 10 characters long) in large letters on the standard output. Each argument is printed on a separate line. Note that multiple-word arguments must be enclosed in quotes in order to be printed on the same line. |
|
basename(1) -- extract portions of path names
|
|
basename deletes any prefix ending in / and the suffix (if present in string) from string, and prints the result on the standard output. If string consists entirely of slash characters, string is set to a single slash character. If there are any trailing slash characters in string, they are removed. If the suffix operand is present but not identical to the characters remaining in string, but it is... |
|
batch(1) -- execute batched commands immediately or at a later time
|
|
The at and batch commands schedule jobs for execution by the cron daemon (see cron(1M)). at schedules a job for execution at a specified time. at can also list (-l) or remove (-r) existing scheduled at and batch jobs. batch schedules a job for execution immediately, or as soon as system load levels permit. You can enter commands into a job in one of the following ways: Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 ... |
|
bc(1) -- arbitrary-precision arithmetic language
|
|
bc is an interactive processor for a language that resembles C but provides unlimited-precision arithmetic. It takes input from any files given, then reads the standard input. Options: bc recognizes the following command-line options: -c Compile only. bc is actually a preprocessor for dc which bc invokes automatically (see dc(1)). Specifying -c prevents invoking dc, and sends the dc input to stand... |
|
bdf(1m) -- report number of free disk blocks (Berkeley version)
|
|
The bdf command displays the amount of free disk space available either on the specified filesystem (/dev/dsk/c0d0s0, for example) or on the file system in which the specified file (such as $HOME), is contained. If no file system is specified, the free space on all of the normally mounted file systems is printed. The reported numbers are in kilobytes. |
|
bdftopcf(1) -- convert X font from Bitmap Distribution Format to Portable Compiled Format
|
|
Bdftopcf is a font compiler for the X server and font server. Fonts in Portable Compiled Format can be read by any architecture, although the file is structured to allow one particular architecture to read them directly without reformatting. This allows fast reading on the appropriate machine, but the files are still portable (but read more slowly) on other machines. |
|
bdiff(1) -- diff for large files
|
|
bdiff compares two files and produces output identical to what would be produced by diff (see diff(1)), specifying changes that must be made to make the files identical. bdiff is designed for handling files that are too large for diff, but it can be used on files of any length. bdiff processes files as follows: + Ignore lines common to the beginning of both files. + Split the remainder of each fil... |
|
bg(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
big5-cwin(1) -- Big5 UDF file format converter
|
|
big5-cwin is used to convert a HP 9000 Big5 code UDF file to PC CWindows UDF file |
|
big5-et(1) -- big5 UDF file format converter
|
|
big5-et is used to convert a hp9000 big5 UDF file to PC ET UDF file |
|
big5udf(1) -- HP 9000 Big5 code UDF utilities
|
|
CMEX <---> HP Big5 code UDF format converting tools description =============================================================== Hewlett Packard Taiwan, Solution Development Operation 1. Purpose : If user uses HP9000 system as the server, and uses a PC running ETen Chinese system, also connects through CTERM with the server. Owing to the PC's UDF file format is different from the server. So, there... |
|
big5udfdown(1) -- UDF download utility for big5 code
|
|
big5udfdown is used to download big5 UDF file to peripheral devices |
|
big5udfgen(1) -- HP 9000 Big5 code user defined font generating utility
|
|
_____________________________ | | | | | HP 9000 Big5 Code | | User Defined Font Generator | | | |_____________________________| User Defined Font Generating System User can execute the UDF generator on a HP9000 terminal. $ big5udfgen < return > The following messages will show on the screen : ******************************************************** * (c) HP-UX Big5 User Defined Font Generator Util... |
|
biod(1m) -- NFS daemons
|
|
nfsd starts the NFS server daemons that handle client file system requests (see nfs(7)). num_nfsd is the suggested number of file system request daemons that will start. One daemon will be started to support the kernel threads servicing TCP requests, and multiple additional daemons will be started to service UDP requests. At system boot time, num_nfsd is defined by the NUM_NFSD variable in the /et... |
|
boot(1m) -- bootstrap process
|
|
Itanium-based System Hardware The Itanium-based system's bootstrap process involves the execution of four software components: + CMOS + option ROM + EFI + Boot Manager + hpux.efi After the processor is reset, firmware initializes and tests processors and platform. During initialization, the firmware lets a user interrupt and configure CMOS and option ROMs. It then transfers control to EFI, the Ex... |
|
bootpd(1m) -- Internet Boot Protocol server
|
|
The bootpd daemon implements three functions: a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server as defined in RFC1541, an Internet Boot Protocol (BOOTP) server as defined in RFC951 and RFC1395, and a DHCP/BOOTP relay agent as defined in RFC1542. It also contains some of the useful fields as defined in RFC2132. bootpd is run through inetd (see inetd(1M)). It is run by /etc/inetd when the followin... |
|
bootpquery(1m) -- send BOOTREQUEST to BOOTP server
|
|
bootpquery is a diagnostic function used to check the configuration of the Internet Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) server, bootpd(1M). This function can only be run by the superuser, since it uses reserved ports. bootpquery constructs a boot request with the supplied parameters to send to the BOOTP server, and prints the contents of the BOOTP server reply (as shown in EXAMPLES, below). Note that bootp... |
|
bs(1) -- a compiler/interpreter for modest-sized programs
|
|
bs is a remote descendant of BASIC and SNOBOL4 with some C language added. bs is designed for programming tasks where program development time is as important as the resulting speed of execution. Formalities of data declaration and file/process manipulation are minimized. Line-at-a-time debugging, the trace and dump statements, and useful run-time error messages all simplify program testing. Furth... |
|
cachefsstat(1m) -- Cache File System statistics
|
|
The cachefsstat command displays statistical information about the cache filesystem mounted on path. The statistical information includes cache hits and misses, consistency checking, and modification operations. If path is not specified, all mounted cache filesystems are used. cachefsstat can also be used to reinitialize this information (see -z option). The statistical information has the followi... |
|
cal(1) -- print calendar
|
|
cal prints a calendar for the specified year. If a month is also specified, a calendar just for that month is printed. If neither is specified, a calendar for the present month is printed. year can be between 1 and 9999. month is a decimal number between 1 and 12. The calendar produced is a Gregorian calendar. |
|
calendar(1) -- reminder service
|
|
calendar consults the file calendar in the current directory and prints out lines containing today's or tomorrow's date anywhere in the line. On weekends, ``tomorrow'' extends through Monday. When a - command-line argument is present, calendar searches for the file calendar in each user's home directory, and sends any positive results to the user by mail (see mail(1)). Normally this is done d... |
|
cancel(1) -- print/alter/cancel requests on an LP destination
|
|
The lp command queues files for printing. The lpalt command changes information in a queued request. The cancel command deletes a queued request. lp Command The lp command arranges for the named files, file ..., and associated information (collectively called a request) to be queued for output to a destination in the LP (line printer) subsystem. The process is called printing, regardless of the ac... |
|
captoinfo(1m) -- convert a termcap description into a terminfo description
|
|
captoinfo looks in filenames for termcap(3X) descriptions. For each one found, an equivalent terminfo(4) description is written to standard output along with any comments found. The short two letter name at the beginning of the list of names in a termcap entry, a holdover from Version 6 UNIX, is removed. Any description that is expressed relative to another description (as specified in the termcap... |
|
cat(1) -- concatenate, copy, and print files
|
|
cat reads each file in sequence and writes it on the standard output. Thus: cat file prints file on the default standard output device; cat file1 file2 > file3 concatenates file1 and file2, and places the result in file3. If - is appears as a file argument, cat uses standard input. To combine standard input and other files, use a combination of - and file arguments. |
|
catman(1m) -- create the cat files for the manual
|
|
The catman command creates the formatted versions of the online manual from nroff(1)-compatible source files. Each manual entry in the man*.Z and man* directories is examined, and those whose formatted versions are missing or out-of-date are recreated. catman formats the most recent of the entries, compresses it, and puts it into the appropriate cat*.Z directory. If any changes are made, catman re... |
|
ccat(1) -- compact and uncompact files, and cat them
|
|
compact compresses the named files using an adaptive Huffman code. If no file names are given, standard input is compacted and sent to the standard output. compact operates as an on-line algorithm. Each time a byte is read, it is encoded immediately according to the current prefix code. This code is an optimal Huffman code for the set of frequencies seen so far. It is unnecessary to attach a decod... |
|
ccdc-et(1) -- ccdc UDF file format converter
|
|
ccdc-et is used to convert a hp9000 ccdc UDF file to PC ET UDF file |
|
ccdcudf(1) -- HP 9000 CCDC code UDF utilities
|
|
CMEX <---> HP CCDC code UDF format converting tools description =============================================================== Hewlett Packard Taiwan, Solution Development Operation 1. Purpose : If user uses HP9000 system as the server, and uses a PC running ETen Chinese system, also connects through CTERM with the server. Owing to the PC's UDF file format is different from the server. So, there... |
|
ccdcudfdown(1) -- UDF download utility for ccdc code
|
|
ccdcudfdown is used to download ccdc UDF file to peripheral devices |
|
ccdcudfgen(1) -- HP 9000 CCDC code user defined font generating utility
|
|
_____________________________ | | | | | HP 9000 CCDC Code | | User Defined Font Generator | | | |_____________________________| User Defined Font Generating System User can execute the UDF generator on a HP9000 terminal. $ ccdcudfgen < return > The following messages will show on the screen : ******************************************************** * (c) HP-UX CCDC User Defined Font Generator Util... |
|
cc_bundled(1) -- bundled C compiler
|
|
This manpage describes the Bundled C compiler. cc invokes the HP-UX bundled C compiler. C source code is compiled directly to object code. The command uses the ctcom (Itanium(R)-based systems) or ccom (PARISC, Precision Architecture) compiler for preprocessing, syntax and type checking, as well as for code generation. cc accepts several types of arguments as files: .c Suffix Arguments whose names ... |
|
cc_bundled_ia(1) -- bundled C compiler
|
|
This manpage describes the Bundled C compiler. cc invokes the HP-UX bundled C compiler. C source code is compiled directly to object code. The command uses the ctcom (Itanium(R)-based systems) or ccom (PARISC, Precision Architecture) compiler for preprocessing, syntax and type checking, as well as for code generation. cc accepts several types of arguments as files: .c Suffix Arguments whose names ... |
|
cc_bundled_pa(1) -- bundled C compiler
|
|
This manpage describes the Bundled C compiler. See cc(1), online only, for a description of the ANSI-compliant HP-UX manual page. This cc accepts several types of arguments as files: .c Suffix Arguments whose names end with .c are understood to be C source files. Each is compiled and the resulting object file is left in a file having the corresponding base name, .o instead of .c. However, if a sin... |
|
cd(1) -- change working directory
|
|
If directory is not specified, the value of shell parameter HOME is used as the new working directory. If directory specifies a complete path starting with /, ., or .., directory becomes the new working directory. If neither case applies, cd tries to find the designated directory relative to one of the paths specified by the CDPATH shell variable. CDPATH has the same syntax as, and similar semanti... |
|
cdc(1) -- change the delta commentary of an SCCS delta
|
|
The cdc command changes the delta commentary, for the SID specified by the -r option, of each named SCCS file. Delta commentary is defined to be the Modification Request (MR) and comment information normally specified via the delta(1) command (-m and -y options). If a directory is named, cdc behaves as if each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last c... |
|
cdsadv(1m) -- Starts the CDS client daemon
|
|
The cdsadv command starts the CDS client daemon. |
|
cdsbrowser(1m) -- Starts the CDS Browser utility on the local system
|
|
The cdsbrowser command starts the CDS Browser utility on the local system. This utility runs on workstations with windowing software based on the OSF/Motif graphical user interface. Using a mouse to manipulate pull-down menus, you can view the directory structure of a namespace, view child directories of a particular directory, view the object entries and soft links in a directory, and set a filte... |
|
cdsclerk(1m) -- Manages the interface between clients and the CDS server
|
|
The cdsclerk command manages the interface between clients and the CDS server. |
|
cdscp(1m) -- Starts the CDS control program
|
|
The Cell Directory Service (CDS) control program is a command line interface for managing the components of the Cell Directory Service and the contents of the namespace. You can use the control program commands from within the control program or from the system prompt. To use the control program commands from inside the control program, start the control program by using the cdscp command alone, w... |
|
cdsd(1m) -- Starts the CDS server
|
|
The cdsd command starts the CDS server. |
|
cds_intro(1m) -- Introduction to the CDS commands
|
|
The DCE Cell Directory Service provides the following management commands: o The cdsbrowser command starts the CDS Browser utility. This utility is based on the OSF/Motif graphical user interface. The Browser can display an overall directory structure as well as show the contents of directories. o The cdscp command starts the CDS control program. Use this command line interface to manage the CDS c... |
|
cfsadmin(1m) -- administer disk space used for caching file systems with
|
|
The cfsadmin command provides the following functions: + cache creation + deletion of cached file systems + listing of cache contents and statistics + resource parameter adjustment when the file system is unmounted. For each form of the command, with the exception of the -s form, you must specify a cache directory, that is, the directory under which the cache is actually stored. A path name in the... |
|
chacl(1) -- add, modify, delete, copy, or summarize access control lists (ACLs) of files
|
|
chacl extends the capabilities of chmod(1), by enabling the user to grant or restrict file access to additional specific users and/or groups. Traditional file access permissions, set when a file is created, grant or restrict access to the file's owner, group, and other users. These file access permissions (eg., rwxrw-r--) are mapped into three base access control list entries: one entry for the f... |
|
change(1m) -- Alters the epoch number and time on the local node
|
|
The change command sets the time and changes the epoch of the DTS server on which it is entered. Use this command to isolate a server from the rest of the servers in the network before changing the time. |
|
chargefee(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
chatr(1) -- change program's internal attributes
|
|
chatr allows you to change a program's internal attributes for 32-bit and 64-bit ELF files. There are two syntactic forms that can be used to invoke chatr. + Format 1 allows easy manipulation of ordinary files that have only a single text segment and a single data segment. + Format 2 allows explicit specification of the segments to be modified. Upon completion, chatr prints the file's old and ne... |
|
chatr_ia(1) -- change program's internal attributes
|
|
chatr allows you to change a program's internal attributes for 32-bit and 64-bit ELF files. There are two syntactic forms that can be used to invoke chatr. + Format 1 allows easy manipulation of ordinary files that have only a single text segment and a single data segment. + Format 2 allows explicit specification of the segments to be modified. Upon completion, chatr prints the file's old and ne... |
|
chatr_pa(1) -- change program's internal attributes
|
|
chatr allows you to change a program's internal attributes for 32-bit mode SOM and 64-bit mode ELF files. Upon completion, chatr prints the file's old and new values to standard output unless -s is specified. The +pd and +pi options only provide a hint for the virtual memory page size. The actual page sizes may vary. Under certain conditions, page size hints of L may result in better performance... |
|
checknr(1) -- check nroff/troff files
|
|
checknr searches a list of nroff or troff input files for certain kinds of errors involving mismatched opening and closing delimiters and unknown commands. If no files are specified, checknr searches the standard input. checknr looks for the following: + Font changes using \fx ... \fP. + Size changes using \sx ... \s0. + Macros that come in open ... close forms, such as the .TS and .TE macros,... |
|
chfn(1) -- change user information; used by finger
|
|
The chfn command changes the user information that is stored in the repository for the current logged-in user or for the user specified by login-name (see passwd(1)). The information is organized as four comma-separated subfields within the reserved (5th) field of the password file entry. It consists of the user's full name, location code, office phone number, and home phone number, in that order... |
|
chgrp(1) -- change file owner or group
|
|
The chown command changes the owner ID of each specified file to owner and optionally the group ID of each specified file to group. The chgrp command changes the group ID of each specified file to group. owner can be either a decimal user ID or a login name found in the /etc/passwd file. group can be either a decimal group ID or a group name found in the /etc/group file. In order to change the own... |
|
chkey(1) -- change user's secure RPC key pair
|
|
chkey is used to change a user's secure RPC public key and secret key pair. chkey prompts for the old secure-rpc password and verifies that it is correct by decrypting the secret key. If the user has not already keylogged in, chkey registers the secret key with the local keyserv(1M) daemon. If the secure-rpc password does not match the login password, chkey prompts for the login password. chkey u... |
|
chmod(1) -- change file mode access permissions
|
|
The chmod command changes the permissions of one or more files according to the value of symbolic_mode_list or numeric_mode. You can display the current permissions for a file with the ls -l command (see ls(1)). |
|
chnlspath(1m) -- configure message catalog path
|
|
chnlspath is used to modify the contents of the configuration file /etc/default/nlspath. chnlspath recognizes the following options and command-line arguments: |
|
chown(1) -- change file owner or group
|
|
The chown command changes the owner ID of each specified file to owner and optionally the group ID of each specified file to group. The chgrp command changes the group ID of each specified file to group. owner can be either a decimal user ID or a login name found in the /etc/passwd file. group can be either a decimal group ID or a group name found in the /etc/group file. In order to change the own... |
|
chroot(1m) -- change root directory for a command
|
|
The chroot command executes command relative to the newroot. The meaning of any initial slashes (/) in path names is changed for command and any of its children to newroot. Furthermore, the initial working directory is newroot. Note that command suffixes that affect input or output for the chroot command use the original root, not the new root. For example, the command: chroot newroot command > x ... |
|
chsh(1) -- change default login shell
|
|
The chsh command changes the login-shell for a user's login name in the repository (see passwd(1)). The DCE repository (-r dce) is only available if Integrated Login has been configured, see auth.adm(1M). If Integrated Login has been configured, other considerations apply. A user with appropriate DCE privileges is capable of modifying a user's shell; this is not dependent upon superuser privileg... |
|
ch_rc(1m) -- change system configuration file
|
|
ch_rc manages the addition, modification, removal, and retrieval of information stored in files having the format of those in the /etc/rc.config.d directory. Parameter names are treated as strings. Thus, X[0] has no special meaning to ch_rc in relation to other parameters named X[1] or X. |
|
ci(1) -- check in RCS revisions
|
|
ci stores new revisions into RCS files. Each file name ending in ,v is treated as an RCS file; all others are assumed to be working files. ci deposits the contents of each working file into the corresponding RCS file (see rcsintro(5)). If the RCS file does not exist, ci creates it and deposits the contents of the working file as the initial revision. The default number is "1.1". The access list ... |
|
ckconfig(1) -- verify the path names of all the FTP configuration files.
|
|
The ckconfig utility is used to verify the path names of the FTP configuration files, /etc/ftpd/ftpusers, /etc/ftpd/ftpaccess, /etc/ftpd/ftpconversions, /etc/ftpd/ftpgroups, /etc/ftpd/ftphosts, /var/adm/syslog/xferlog, and /etc/ftpd/pids/*. This utility checks to see that all the FTP configuration files are in the path specified. If it is not able to find the configuration files in the path, it wi... |
|
ckpacct(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
cksum(1) -- print file checksum and sizes
|
|
The cksum command calculates and prints to standard output a checksum for each named file, the number of octets in the file and the filename. cksum uses a portable algorithm based on a 32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check. This algorithm finds a broader spectrum of errors than the 16-bit algorithms used by sum (see sum(1)). The CRC is the sum of the following expressions, where x is each byte of the fil... |
|
cleanup(1m) -- HP-UX patch cleanup utility
|
|
The cleanup command provides functions useful when dealing with HP-UX patches on HP-UX. The cleanup command logs all information to /var/adm/cleanup.log. |
|
clear(1) -- clear terminal screen
|
|
clear clears the terminal screen if it is possible to do so. It reads the TERM environment variable for the terminal type, then reads the appropriate terminfo database to determine how to clear the screen. |
|
clear_cached_server(1m) -- Removes knowledge of a server that you had specifically defined from the local clerk's cache
|
|
The clear cached server command removes knowledge of a server from the local clerk's cache. You can only clear servers that you have specifically created with the define cached server command. |
|
clear_clearinghouse(1m) -- Removes knowledge of the specified clearinghouse from the server's memory
|
|
The clear clearinghouse command removes knowledge of the specified clearinghouse from the server's memory. The clearinghouse files are not deleted. This ensures that the clearinghouse is not automatically enabled on server restarts. If you issue a list clearinghouse command, the clearinghouse will be listed. Before you can delete a cleared clearinghouse, you must use the create clearinghouse comm... |
|
clear_locks(1m) -- clear locks held on behalf of an NFS client
|
|
The clear_locks command removes all file, record, and share locks created by the hostname and held on the current host, regardless of which process created or owns the locks. This command can be run only by the super-user. This command should only be used to repair the rare case of a client crashing and failing to clear held locks. Clearing locks held by an active client may cause applications to ... |
|
closewtmp(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
clri(1m) -- clear inode
|
|
The clri command clears the inode i-number by filling it with zeros. special must be a special file name referring to a device containing a file system. For proper results, special should not be mounted (see WARNINGS below). After clri is executed, all blocks in the affected file show up as "missing" in an fsck of special (see fsck(1M)). This command should only be used in emergencies. Read and ... |
|
clri_hfs(1m) -- clear inode
|
|
The clri command clears the inode i-number by filling it with zeros. special must be a special file name referring to a device containing a file system. For proper results, special should not be mounted (see WARNINGS below). After clri is executed, all blocks in the affected file show up as "missing" in an fsck of special (see fsck(1M)). This command should only be used in emergencies. Read and ... |
|
clrsvc(1m) -- clear x25 switched virtual circuit
|
|
The uucp commands, including clrsvc, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. clrsvc clears any virtual circuit that might be established on the specified line. pad-type indicates to clrsvc what opx25 script to run from /usr/lbin/uucp/X25. |
|
cmp(1) -- compare two files
|
|
cmp compares two files (if file1 or file2 is -, the standard input is used). Under default options, cmp makes no comment if the files are the same; if they differ, it announces the byte and line number at which the difference occurred. If one file is an initial subsequence of the other, that fact is noted. skip1 and skip2 are initial byte offsets into file1 and file2, respectively; and maybe octal... |
|
co(1) -- check out RCS revisions
|
|
co retrieves revisions from RCS files. Each file name ending in ,v is taken to be an RCS file. All other files are assumed to be working files. co retrieves a revision from each RCS file and stores it in the corresponding working file (see also rcsintro(5)). Revisions of an RCS file can be checked out locked or unlocked. Locking a revision prevents overlapping updates. A revision checked out for r... |
|
coder(1) -- HP EUC-CNS code reference utility
|
|
coder is a EUC-CNS code reference utility, this utility has three functions, below is the description of them : 1. Dump all characters in certain EUC-CNS plane to a file. 2. Display character with EUC-CNS code. 3. Display EUC-CNS code with character. |
|
col(1) -- filter reverse line-feeds and backspaces
|
|
col reads from the standard input and writes onto the standard output. It performs the line overlays implied by reverse line feeds (ASCII code ESC-7), and by forward and reverse half-line feeds (ESC-9 and ESC-8). col is particularly useful for filtering multi-column output made with the nroff .rt command, and output resulting from use of the tbl preprocessor (see nroff(1) and tbl(1)). If the -b op... |
|
comb(1) -- combine SCCS deltas
|
|
The comb command generates a shell procedure (see sh(1)) which, when run, reconstructs the given SCCS files. The reconstructed files are usually smaller than the original files. Arguments can be specified in any order, but all options apply to all named SCCS files. If a directory is named, comb behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files ... |
|
comm(1) -- select or reject lines common to two sorted files
|
|
comm reads file1 and file2, which should be ordered in increasing collating sequence (see sort(1) and Environment Variables below), and produces a three-column output: Column 1: Lines that appear only in file1, Column 2: Lines that appear only in file2, Column 3: Lines that appear in both files. If - is used for file1 or file2, the standard input is used. Options 1, 2, or 3 suppress printing of th... |
|
command(1) -- execute a simple command
|
|
command enables the shell to treat the arguments as a simple command, suppressing the shell function lookup. If command_name is not the name of the function, the effect of command is the same as omitting command. |
|
compact(1) -- compact and uncompact files, and cat them
|
|
compact compresses the named files using an adaptive Huffman code. If no file names are given, standard input is compacted and sent to the standard output. compact operates as an on-line algorithm. Each time a byte is read, it is encoded immediately according to the current prefix code. This code is an optimal Huffman code for the set of frequencies seen so far. It is unnecessary to attach a decod... |
|
compress(1) -- compress and expand data
|
|
The following commands compress and uncompress files and directory subtrees as indicated: compress Reduce the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. If reduction is possible, each file is replaced by a new file of the same name with the suffix .Z added to indicate that it is a compressed file. Original ownership, modes, access, and modification times are preserved. If no file is... |
|
compressdir(1) -- compress and expand data
|
|
The following commands compress and uncompress files and directory subtrees as indicated: compress Reduce the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. If reduction is possible, each file is replaced by a new file of the same name with the suffix .Z added to indicate that it is a compressed file. Original ownership, modes, access, and modification times are preserved. If no file is... |
|
convert(1) -- convert an audio file
|
|
This command converts audio files from one supported file format, data format, sampling rate, and number of channels to another. The unconverted file is retained as a source file. -sfmt format -dfmt format are the file formats for the source and destination files. Each format can be one of these: au Sun file format snd NeXT file format wav Microsoft RIFF Waveform file format u MuLaw format al ALaw... |
|
convertfs(1m) -- convert an HFS file system to allow long file names
|
|
The convertfs command converts an existing HFS file system supporting the default maximum file name length of 14 characters into one that supports file names up to 255 characters long. Once an HFS file system is converted to long file names, it cannot be restored to its original state, since the longer file names require a directory representation that is incompatible with the default HFS director... |
|
convertfs_hfs(1m) -- convert an HFS file system to allow long file names
|
|
The convertfs command converts an existing HFS file system supporting the default maximum file name length of 14 characters into one that supports file names up to 255 characters long. Once an HFS file system is converted to long file names, it cannot be restored to its original state, since the longer file names require a directory representation that is incompatible with the default HFS director... |
|
convert_awk(1m) -- converts old sendmail.cf files to new format
|
|
convert_awk is an awk program that will convert pre-HP-UX 10.20 sendmail.cf files into the format required by sendmail 8.7 and up. To run it, use: awk -f convert_awk < old.cf > new.cf Note that the new sendmail.cf files offer a wealth of new options and features. You should STRONGLY consider making a new sendmail.cf file from the distribution version or from the m4 macros, which are provided in /u... |
|
cp(1) -- copy files and directory subtrees
|
|
cp copies: + file1 to new or existing new_file, + file1 to existing dest_directory, + file1, file2, ... to existing dest_directory, + directory subtree directory1, to new or existing dest_directory. or + multiple directory subtrees directory1, directory2, ... to new or existing dest_directory. cp fails if file1 and new_file are the same (be cautious when using shell metacharacters). When destinati... |
|
cpio(1) -- copy file archives in and out; duplicate directory trees
|
|
The cpio command saves and restores archives of files on magnetic tape, other devices, or a regular file, and copies files from one directory to another while replicating the directory tree structure. When cpio completes processing the files, it reports the number of blocks written. cpio -o (copy out, export) Read standard input to obtain a list of path names, and copy those files to standard outp... |
|
cplxmodify(1m) -- modify an attribute of a system complex
|
|
The cplxmodify command modifies attributes of the complex of a partitionable system. The command is the equivalent, at the complex level, of the parmodify command, which modifies attributes of an nPartition. The complex to be modified defaults to the local complex, the one on which the command is run. A remote complex can be identified by specifying either the -u or -g option in combination with t... |
|
cpp(1) -- the C language preprocessor
|
|
cpp is the C language preprocessor which is invoked as the first pass of any C compilation using the cc command (see cc(1)). Its purpose is to process #include and conditional compilation instructions and macros. Thus the output of cpp is designed to be in a form acceptable as input to the next pass of the C compiler. As the C language evolves, cpp and the rest of the C compilation package will be... |
|
cpset(1m) -- install object files in binary directories
|
|
The cpset command installs the specified object file in the given directory. The mode, owner, and group, of the destination file can be specified on the command line. If this data is omitted, two results are possible: + If you have administrative permissions (that is, your numerical ID is less than 100), the following defaults are provided: mode 0555 owner bin group bin + If you do not have admini... |
|
crashconf(1m) -- configure system crash dumps
|
|
crashconf displays and/or changes the current system crash dump configuration. The crash dump configuration consists of: + The crash dump device list. This list identifies all devices that can be used to store a crash dump. + The included class list. This list identifies all system memory classes that must be included in any crash dump. + The excluded class list. This list identifies all system me... |
|
crashutil(1m) -- manipulate crash dump data
|
|
crashutil copies and preserves crash dump data, and performs format conversions on it. Common uses of crashutil include: + Copying portions of a dump that still reside on a raw dump device into a crash dump directory. + Converting between different formats of crash dumps. + Copying crash dumps from one directory, or medium, to another. crashutil will write to its destination the crash dump it read... |
|
create(1m) -- Creates the DCE DTS entity on the specified node
|
|
The create command creates a time server or time clerk entity on the system where the command is entered. After the DTS entity is created, it is still in a non-functioning state. To put it into operation, you must invoke dtscp enable, which causes an immediate synchronization to take place. For more information, see the enable reference page in this chapter. |
|
create_child(1m) -- Creates a child pointer at the master replica of the parent directory
|
|
The create child command creates a child pointer at the master replica of the parent directory. When CDS looks up a name in the namespace, it uses child pointers to locate directory replicas. Use the set cdscp preferred clearinghouse command before issuing this command to ensure that the request is directed to the master replica. |
|
create_clearinghouse(1m) -- Creates a clearinghouse on the local server system or makes an existing clearinghouse available
|
|
The create clearinghouse command creates a clearinghouse on the local server system or makes an existing clearinghouse available. The server start-up command usually creates a new clearinghouse when you configure a new CDS server. Occasionally, you may need to create a second clearinghouse on a particular server; for example, if you are temporarily relocating a clearinghouse on a different server.... |
|
create_directory(1m) -- Creates a directory
|
|
The create directory command creates a directory with the name that you specify. If you do not specify a clearinghouse, CDS creates the master replica of the directory in the same clearinghouse as the new directory's parent directory. |
|
create_link(1m) -- Creates a soft link and optionally specifies an expiration time and an extension time
|
|
The create link command creates a soft link. If you specify the CDS_LinkTimeout attribute, you must specify an expiration time and an extension time. If you omit the CDS_LinkTimeout attribute, the soft link is permanent and must be explicitly deleted. |
|
create_object(1m) -- Creates an object entry
|
|
The create object command creates an object entry. This task is usually done through a client application. |
|
create_replica(1m) -- Creates a replica of an existing directory in the specified clearinghouse
|
|
The create replica command creates a replica of an existing directory in the specified clearinghouse. |
|
create_sysfile(1m) -- create a kernel system file
|
|
The create_sysfile command creates a kernel configuration description file (system file) which can be used as input to the commands kconfig(1M) or mk_kernel(1M). The system file that is generated is of type version 1 (see system(4)) and is built according to the drivers required by the current system hardware. This command is intended for use during the install process when the system does not hav... |
|
cron(1m) -- timed-job execution daemon
|
|
cron executes commands at specified dates and times. Regularly scheduled commands can be specified according to instructions placed in crontab files. Users can submit their own crontab files with a crontab command (see crontab(1)). Users can submit commands that are to be executed only once with an at or batch command. Since cron never exits, it should be executed only once. This is best done by r... |
|
crontab(1) -- user job file scheduler
|
|
The crontab command manages a crontab file for the user. You can use a crontab file to schedule jobs that are executed automatically by cron (see cron(1M)) on a regular basis. The command has four forms: crontab [file] Create or replace your crontab file by copying the specified file, or standard input if file is omitted or - is specified as file , into the crontab directory, /var/spool/cron/cront... |
|
crypt(1) -- encode/decode files
|
|
crypt reads from the standard input and writes on the standard output. password is a key that selects a particular transformation. If no password is given, crypt demands a key from the terminal and turns off printing while the key is being typed in. crypt encrypts and decrypts with the same key: crypt key cypher cypher crypt key |
|
csh(1) -- a shell (command interpreter) with C-like syntax
|
|
csh is a command language interpreter that incorporates a command history buffer, C-like syntax, and job control facilities. |
|
cslip(1) -- PPP daemon
|
|
pppd is a daemon process used in UNIX systems to manage connections to other hosts using PPP (Point to Point Protocol) or SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol). It uses the UNIX host's native serial ports. It communicates with the UNIX kernel's own TCP/IP implementation via the HP IP tunnel driver. The functionality supplied by this daemon supersedes that provided by ppl(1) in HP-UX prior to Rele... |
|
csplit(1) -- context split
|
|
csplit reads file, separates it into n+1 sections as defined by the arguments arg1 ... argn, and places the results in separate files. The maximum number of arguments (arg1 through argn) allowed is 99 unless the -n number option is used to allow for more output file names. If the -f prefix option is specified, the resulting filenames are prefix00 through 00 through prefixNN where NN is the two-dig... |
|
csrc(1m) -- Builds a DCE character and code set registry on a host
|
|
The Code Set Registry Compiler csrc creates a character and code set registry file from the information supplied in a character and code set registry source file. A code set registry source file is composed of a series of code set records. Each record describes, in human-readable form, the mapping between an OSF-registered or (optionally) a user-defined unique code set value and the character stri... |
|
cstm(1m) -- Support Tools Manager
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) provides three interfaces that allow a user access to an underlying toolset, consisting of information modules, firmware update tools, verifiers, diagnostics, exercisers, expert tools, and utilities: XSTM - the graphical interface (for X11-based graphics terminals) MSTM - the menu-based interface (for non-X11-based, non-graphics terminals) CSTM - the command line in... |
|
ct(1) -- spawn getty to a remote terminal (call terminal)
|
|
ct dials telno, the telephone number of a modem that is attached to a terminal, and spawns a getty(1M) process to that terminal. ct tries each line listed in file /etc/uucp/Devices until it finds an available line with appropriate attributes or runs out of entries. If no lines are free, ct asks whether it should wait for a line, and if so, how many minutes it should wait before giving up. ct searc... |
|
ctags(1) -- create a tags file
|
|
ctags makes a tags file for ex(1) (or vi(1)) from the specified C, Pascal and FORTRAN sources. A tags file gives the locations of specified objects (for C, functions, macros with argments, and typedefs; Pascal, procedures, programs and functions; FORTRAN, subroutines, programs and functions) in a group of files. Each line of the tags file contains the object name, the file in which it is defined, ... |
|
cu(1) -- call another (UNIX) system; terminal emulator
|
|
cu calls up another system, which is usually a UNIX operating system, but can be a terminal or a non-UNIX operating system. cu manages all interaction between systems, including possible transfers of ASCII files. |
|
cut(1) -- cut out (extract) selected fields of each line of a file
|
|
cut cuts out (extracts) columns from a table or fields from each line in a file; in data base parlance, it implements the projection of a relation. Fields as specified by list can be fixed length (defined in terms of character or byte position in a line when using the -c or -b option), or the length can vary from line to line and be marked with a field delimiter character such as the tab character... |
|
cwin-big5(1) -- big5 UDF file format converter
|
|
cwin-big5 is used to convert a PC CWindows UDF file to HP 9000 Big5 code UDF file |
|
date(1) -- display or set the date and time
|
|
The date command displays or sets the current HP-UX system clock date and time. Since the HP-UX system operates in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), date automatically converts to and from local standard or daylight/summer time, based on your TZ environment variable. See Environment Variables in EXTERNAL INFLUENCES below. |
|
dc(1) -- desk calculator
|
|
dc is an arbitrary precision arithmetic package. Ordinarily it operates on decimal integers, but one may specify an input base, output base, and a number of fractional digits to be maintained. (See bc(1), a preprocessor for dc that provides infix notation and a C-like syntax that implements functions. bc also provides reasonable control structures for programs.) The overall structure of dc is a st... |
|
dcecp(1m) -- Administrative interface for DCE management tasks
|
|
The DCE control program, dcecp, is the primary DCE administration interface, providing local and remote access to routine DCE administrative functions from any DCE Version 1.1 and later platform. The DCE control program is built on a portable command language called the tool command language (Tcl). Tcl allows the use of variables, if statements, list processing functions, loop functions and many o... |
|
dcecp_account(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages an account in the DCE Security Service
|
|
The account object represents registry accounts. Although an account is associated with one principal, one group, and one organization, it is identified by the principal's primary name. Alias names are differentiated for principals, so one principal can have multiple accounts under different alias names. When this command executes, it attempts to bind to the registry server identified in the _s(s... |
|
dcecp_acl(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages DCE access control lists
|
|
The acl object represents an access control list (ACL), which may exist on any object such as a server, name service entry, container (directory), or file. ACLs consist of ACL entries. ACL entries are visible only as members of ACLs. There is no object that represents ACL entries, only the acl object representing an entire ACL. Most of the acl operations deal directly with the ACL. See DATA STRUCT... |
|
dcecp_attrlist(1m) -- A dcecp task object that manipulates attribute lists
|
|
The attrlist task object represents an attribute list as returned or accepted by many dcecp commands. Use this object to check or manipulate attribute lists so that they can be used by other commands, most commonly in scripts. |
|
dcecp_aud(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages the audit daemon on a DCE host
|
|
The aud object represents the audit daemon (called auditd in the reference implementation) on a host. The daemon creates audit trails on a single host. Using this command, you can enable or disable a Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 aud(1m) Open Software Foundation aud(1m) daemon, change how the daemon acts when the file system storage for its audit trail is full, a... |
|
dcecp_audevents(1m) -- A dcecp object that lists audit events on a DCE host
|
|
The audevents object represents the event classes that are recognized by an audit daemon on a host. Each event class is defined in an event class configuration file, and the filename is the symbolic name of the event class. This command operates only on the audit daemon on the local host. |
|
dcecp_audfilter(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages the event filters on a DCE host
|
|
The audfilter object represents audit event filters, which consist of a list of guides. Audit event filters are kept by the audit daemon and used to determine whether an auditable event should be logged. An audit filter name consists of a filter type and possibly a key (dependent on the type). This command operates on the audit daemon named by the _s(aud) convenience variable. If the variable is n... |
|
dcecp_audtrail(1m) -- A dcecp object that converts the audit trail into a readable format
|
|
The audtrail object represents an audit trail file. This command currently supports only one operation, which converts the audit trail into a human readable format. |
|
dcecp_cds(1m) -- A dcecp object that represents a Cell Directory Service server
|
|
The cds object allows some low-level control over a CDS server in the local cell. Using it, you can disable a running server, which causes it to shut down gracefully. This command will also display a limited set of the attribute and counter information currently known to the specified server. |
|
dcecp_cdsalias(1m) -- A dcecp object that lets you manipulate cell names in CDS
|
|
The cdsalias object represents cell names as known by the Cell Directory Service (CDS). This object lets you manipulate alias and preferred names of DCE cells. Each cell has one preferred name. Cells may also have alias names. This object affects only the CDS component. The security server and each host must also be informed of any new cell aliases. This object can also be used to define a hierarc... |
|
dcecp_cdscache(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a local CDS cache
|
|
The cdscache object represents the Cell Directory Service (CDS) cache on the local node. The CDS cache contains information about servers and clearinghouses known to the local machine, and also contains user data about CDS entries that have been read. The create and delete operations apply only to the server information. The show and dump operations can display additional information. |
|
dcecp_cdsclient(1m) -- A dcecp object that represents a Cell Directory Service client
|
|
The cdsclient object allows some low-level control over a CDS client in the local cell. Use it to disable a running client by shutting it down gracefully and to display a limited set of the attribute and counter information that is currently known to the client. |
|
dcecp_cell(1m) -- A dcecp task object that operates on a DCE cell
|
|
The cell task object represents a single DCE cell as a whole, including all machines, services, resources, principals, and so on. The optional cell_name argument is a single cell name (not a list of cell names). If omitted, the local cell (/.:) is the default. |
|
dcecp_cellalias(1m) -- A dcecp task object that manages cell name aliases
|
|
The cellalias task object allows you to create and display alternative names for cells, known as cell aliases. You can create multiple aliases for a single cell, but only one per cellalias command. When you create an alias, cellalias does the following: Creates a new principal to represent the cell alias in the registry. Performs a registry verify operation to ensure that all security replicas in ... |
|
dcecp_clearinghouse(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a clearinghouse in CDS
|
|
Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 clearinghouse(1m) Open Software Foundation clearinghouse(1m) The clearinghouse object represents Cell Directory Service (CDS) clearinghouses. Clearinghouses are databases located on CDS server machines that store data (directories, objects, and links) in CDS. The server machines hold files that contain the actual clearinghouse data. ... |
|
dcecp_clock(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages the clock on a local or remote host
|
|
The clock object represents the clock on a system and the time that it tells. This object has commands to display and set the time. The time setting functionality is provided by DTS, unless you specify either the -dced or -inetd option. The optional argument to the clock command is the name of a DCE Version 1.1 dtsd running on some machine. Without an argument, the _s(dts) convenience variable is ... |
|
dcecp_directory(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a CDS directory
|
|
The directory object represents Cell Directory Service (CDS) directories. CDS directories are containers for other objects, links, and other directories (as well as clearinghouses). Any of these items that reside in a directory are called children of that directory. Directories also contain attributes that may be viewed or modified. This object also represents CDS replicas. Replicas are read-only ... |
|
dcecp_dts(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a dtsd process
|
|
The dts object represents the dtsd (DTS daemon) process running on a host. The DTS process does not maintain stored data as some other objects do. Consequently, the dts object represents the information in and about a process rather than stored data. These commands all affect the local dtsd entity by default. Use the dts_server argument to operate on a remote DCE dtsd. This argument is a single se... |
|
dcecp_endpoint(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages endpoint information in local RPC endpoint maps
|
|
The endpoint object operates on remote procedure call (RPC) endpoint mappings on the local host. Endpoints contain an interface identifier and one or more string bindings; optionally, they contain object Universal Unique Identifiers (UUIDs) and an annotation. Endpoint mappings are stored in the endpoint map maintained by the DCE daemon (dced) for DCE Version 1.1 hosts. DCE Version 1.0 uses the RPC... |
|
dcecp_group(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a group in the DCE Security Service
|
|
The group object represents registry groups. Unless otherwise noted, all of the operations of this object take the names of the groups to act on as the argument. They must be group names, not the names of the database objects that contain registry information about groups (that is, the names must not begin with /.:/sec/group/). When this command executes, it attempts to bind to the registry server... |
|
dcecp_host(1m) -- A dcecp task object that manages host information in a DCE cell
|
|
The host task object represents DCE processes running on a machine in (or to be added to) a DCE cell. The host task object allows administrators to configure and start DCE on machines easily. The host task object can configure and start the core DCE services on a server or a client machine. The services include the DCE daemon (dced), the Cell Directory Service (CDS) daemons (cdsd and cdsadv), the ... |
|
dcecp_hostdata(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a DCE host's cell affiliation information
|
|
The hostdata object represents a hostdata entry stored by dced on a host that represents some data, usually a file. The data in the hostdata object is represented by the hostdata/data attribute of the hostdata entry. Remote manipulation of data in the hostdata object is accomplished by the hostdata command. The names of these hostdata objects are in the DCE namespace and are controlled by dced. Us... |
|
dcecp_hostvar(1m) -- A dcecp task object that manages the security binary compatibility attributes
|
|
The hostvar object allows you to easily set the security binary compatibility attributes for the current host and to display the local host's cellname, hostname, and security binary compatibility attributes that are stored by the dced in the hostdata/dce_cf.db object. The cell's security server uses these compatibility attributes to determine the mode and state in which the local machine is oper... |
|
dcecp_keytab(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages server passwords on DCE hosts
|
|
The keytab object represents key tables (usually files) that store server keys (and key version numbers) on hosts. These key tables are manipulated remotely by using dced. The keys are considered members of the key table container. The keytab names are in the form /.../cell_cell_name/hosts/hostname/config/keytab/name A key table has a set of keys. Each key contains a principal name, type, version,... |
|
dcecp_link(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a soft link in CDS
|
|
The link object represents a Cell Directory Service (CDS) soft link. A soft link in CDS contains an attribute that has a name that is the same as the name of the object the soft link points to. The soft link contains several built-in attributes, but users are free to add their own attributes. Softlinks can point to objects, directories, and other soft links. |
|
dcecp_log(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages serviceability routing and debug routing
|
|
The log object represents the current state of message routing for a given server. It supports routing for both serviceability and debug messages. Debug routing may be removed from production environment servers while still being used by application servers. The log command works on both local and remote servers. You can identify the target server by supplying either the server's entry in the nam... |
|
dcecp_name(1m) -- A dcecp object that compares and expands DCE names
|
|
The name object resolves, compares, and parses DCE names and string bindings. |
|
dcecp_object(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages an object in CDS
|
|
An object object represents an entity in CDS that has a name and attributes. An object identifies a resource such as a host system, a printer, an application, or a file. Attributes consist of a type and one or more values. Every object is the child of a CDS directory. |
|
dcecp_organization(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages an organization in the DCE Security Service
|
|
The organization object represents registry organizations. Unless otherwise noted, all organization operations take the names of the organizations to act on as an argument. When this command executes, it attempts to bind to the registry server identified in the _s(sec) variable. If that server cannot process the request or if the _s(sec) variable is not set, the command binds to either an availabl... |
|
dcecp_principal(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a principal in the DCE Security Service
|
|
The principal object represents registry principals. Unless otherwise noted, all of the operations of this object take the names of principals to act on as an argument. These must be principal names, not the names of the database objects that contain registry information about principals (that is, the names must not begin with /.:/sec/principal). When this command executes, it attempts to bind to ... |
|
dcecp_registry(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages a registry in the DCE Security Service
|
|
The registry object represents a DCE Security Service registry. The registry is a replicated database: each instance of a registry server, secd, maintains a working copy of the database in virtual memory and on disk. One server, called the master replica, accepts updates and handles the subsequent propagation of changes to all other replicas. All other replicas are slave replicas, which accept onl... |
|
dcecp_rpcentry(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages an RPC entry in CDS
|
|
The rpcentry object represents a remote procedure call (RPC) server entry in the cell name service. Use the rpcentry commands to create, modify, display, and delete name service entries. |
|
dcecp_rpcgroup(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages an RPC group entry in CDS
|
|
The rpcgroup object represents a remote procedure call (RPC) group entry in the Cell Directory Service (CDS). Each RPC group is named in the DCE namespace; therefore, each operation takes as an argument a list of names of group entries to manipulate. An RPC group is a container that contains only the names of RPC server entries or the names of other RPC groups; it contains no other data. |
|
dcecp_rpcprofile(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages an RPC profile entry in CDS
|
|
The rpcprofile object represents a remote procedure call (RPC) profile entry in the Cell Directory Service (CDS). Each operation described below, except help and operations, takes as an argument a list of one or more names of RPC profiles to be operate on. An RPC profile consists of members (also known as elements in other DCE documentation). A member can be either RPC server entries, RPC groups, ... |
|
dcecp_secval(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages the security validation service on a host
|
|
The secval object represents the security validation service running on a host, as part of the dced server. This service is responsible Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 secval(1m) Open Software Foundation secval(1m) for maintaining the security credentials of the host machine. Access to the commands is based on the access control list (ACL) of the security validatio... |
|
dcecp_server(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages DCE application servers
|
|
The server object refers to servers residing on a host. This object can affect both the running daemons and the configuration information used by dced to start that daemon. The distinction is usually obvious by the definition of the operation or by the name given as an Hewlett-Packard Company - 2 - OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.9 server(1m) Open Software Foundation server(1m) argument. When this is not the... |
|
dcecp_user(1m) -- A dcecp task object that manipulates user information in a DCE cell
|
|
The user task object represents all of the data associated with a DCE user. This consists only of registry information in the current implementation. The user task object allows administrators to easily create principals and accounts, delete principals and accounts, and Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 user(1m) Open Software Foundation user(1m) view principal and ac... |
|
dcecp_utc(1m) -- A dcecp object that manipulates UTC timestamps
|
|
The utc object lets you add, compare, and convert timestamps in DTS and ISO formats. |
|
dcecp_uuid(1m) -- A dcecp object that generates and compares UUIDs
|
|
The uuid object generates and compares Universal Unique Identifiers (UUIDs). UUIDs uniquely identify DCE entities such as principals, RPC entries, Cell Directory Service (CDS) replicas, and so on. |
|
dcecp_xattrschema(1m) -- A dcecp object that manages schema information for ERAs
|
|
The xattrschema object represents the schema information for an extended registry attribute (ERA). This command manipulates the schema type that defines ERAs. Schema types are identified by name. Other dcecp commands manipulate individual instances of ERAs. ERA instances are an attribute of a given schema type that has been attached to an object and assigned a value. You can attach ERAs to princip... |
|
dced(1m) -- DCE Host daemon
|
|
The DCE Host daemon is a process that provides services for the local host, and is also the server used by remote applications to access these host services. The daemon can be invoked either as dced or as rpcd. When invoked as dced, it provides by default all of the services described below, and it requires that the local host be configured into a DCE cell. When invoked as rpcd, it provides only t... |
|
dceping(1m) -- test the ability to contact DCE services from a local DCE client.
|
|
dceping verifies that a local DCE client can communicate with DCE and other services. It uses the RPC management interface to determine if the DCE service is listening. The core DCE services that dceping checks include secd, cdsd, gdad, rpcd, cdsadv, dtsd, and sec_clientd. You can ping other DCE and non-DCE services by naming them in the file, /opt/dcelocal/hpadmin/etc/nondcesvc. If you want to de... |
|
dce_config(1m) -- Configures and starts up DCE
|
|
The dce_config shell command invokes a menu-driven interface that configures and starts up DCE. The dce_config command displays a hierarchy of menus and invokes individual configuration routines according to users' menu selections. The configuration menu consists of initial cell configuration, additional server configuration, and DCE client configuration. The security server and the first CDS ser... |
|
dce_intro(1m) -- Introduction to the general DCE administration tools
|
|
This section describes publicly accessible DCE administration commands that are general to DCE rather than specific to a particular component. These commands are as follows: csrc The csrc utility is the code set registry compiler, which builds a DCE character and code set registry on a host from a source file supplied by a cell administrator. Administrators run the csrc utility when they are build... |
|
dce_login(1m) -- Validates a principal's identity and obtains the principal's network credentials
|
|
The dce_login command is supplied for use in DCE configuration. It validates a principal's identity and obtains the principal's network credentials. If the -c option is supplied, the command also certifies the principal's identity, and, if the principal is able to be certified, creates an entry for the principal in the machine's local registry. If the principal is not able to be certified, the... |
|
dce_version(1m) -- print version information for HP DCE/9000 components
|
|
By default, dce_version prints the version of DCE that is currently installed. It can also print the what strings for one or more groups of ``interesting'' DCE files, list the available group names and descriptions, or search any specified file for DCE what strings. More than one action can be specified in a single invocation of dce_version. Filenames to be searched for DCE what strings should b... |
|
dcopy(1m) -- copy HFS file system with compaction.
|
|
The dcopy command copies an existing HFS file system (source_fs) to a new HFS file system (destination_fs), appropriately sized to hold the reorganized results. For best results, the source file system should be a raw device, and the destination file system should be a block device. Always run dcopy on unmounted file systems. (In the case of the root file system, copy it to a new minidisk.) If no ... |
|
dcopy_hfs(1m) -- copy HFS file system with compaction.
|
|
The dcopy command copies an existing HFS file system (source_fs) to a new HFS file system (destination_fs), appropriately sized to hold the reorganized results. For best results, the source file system should be a raw device, and the destination file system should be a block device. Always run dcopy on unmounted file systems. (In the case of the root file system, copy it to a new minidisk.) If no ... |
|
dd(1) -- convert, reblock, translate, and copy a (tape) file
|
|
dd copies the specified input file to the specified output file with possible conversions. The standard input and output are used by default. Input and output block size can be specified to take advantage of raw physical I/O. Upon completion, dd reports the number of whole and partial input and output records. |
|
define_cached_server(1m) -- Creates knowledge of a server in the local clerk's cache
|
|
The define cached server command creates knowledge of a server in the local clerk's cache. This command is typically used to manually provide configuration information to a clerk that cannot automatically configure itself. This is required, for instance, to give the clerk addressing information about a server across a WAN. Once the clerk knows about one server, it can find other servers through r... |
|
delete(1m) -- Deletes the DCE DTS entity
|
|
The delete command deletes the DCE DTS entity from the system where the command is entered. When delete is executed, the DTS daemon process completes execution. To restart the DTS daemon, use the dce_config shell command. |
|
delete_child(1m) -- Deletes a child pointer from the namespace
|
|
The delete child command deletes a child pointer from the namespace. |
|
delete_clearinghouse(1m) -- Deletes the specified clearinghouse from the local server system
|
|
The delete clearinghouse command deletes a clearinghouse from the local server system. CDS does not permit you to delete a cleared clearinghouse. Before you can delete a cleared clearinghouse, you must recreate it using the create clearinghouse command. The delete clearinghouse command automatically deletes all read-only replicas from a clearinghouse. CDS does not permit you to delete a clearingho... |
|
delete_directory(1m) -- Deletes a directory
|
|
The delete directory command deletes a directory. The directory cannot contain any object entries, soft links, or child pointers. The master replica must be the only remaining replica in the cell. Use the delete replica command if you need to remove read-only replicas. |
|
delete_link(1m) -- Deletes a soft link
|
|
The delete link command deletes a soft link. |
|
delete_object(1m) -- Deletes an object entry
|
|
The delete object command deletes an object entry. This task is usually done through the client application, except under certain circumstances (for example, if the application is obsolete or no longer has access to the namespace). |
|
delete_replica(1m) -- Deletes a read-only replica of a directory from a clearinghouse
|
|
The delete replica command deletes a read-only replica of a directory from a clearinghouse. Use the delete directory command to delete the master replica of the directory. |
|
delta(1) -- make a delta (change) to an SCCS file
|
|
The delta command is used to permanently introduce into the named SCCS file changes that were made to the file retrieved by get (called the g-file, or generated file). See get(1). delta makes a delta to each named SCCS file. If a directory is named, delta behaves as though each file in the directory was specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component of the path name does not... |
|
deroff(1) -- remove nroff, tbl, and neqn constructs
|
|
deroff reads each file in sequence and removes all nroff requests, macro calls, backslash constructs, neqn constructs (between .EQ and .EN lines, and between delimiters - see neqn(1)), and tbl descriptions (see tbl(1)), replacing them with white space (blanks and blank lines), and writes the remainder of the file on the standard output. deroff follows chains of included files (.so and .nx nroff/tr... |
|
devnm(1m) -- device name
|
|
For each name specified, the devnm command identifies the special file associated with the mounted file system where the named file or directory resides. |
|
df(1m) -- report number of free file system disk blocks
|
|
The df command displays the number of free 512-byte blocks and free inodes available for file systems by examining the counts kept in the superblock or superblocks. If a special or a directory is not specified, the free space on all mounted file systems is displayed. If the arguments to df are path names, df reports on the file systems containing the named files. If the argument to df is a special... |
|
df_cdfs(1m) -- report number of free CDFS, HFS, or NFS file system disk blocks
|
|
The df command displays the number of free 512-byte blocks and free inodes available for file systems by examining the counts kept in the superblock or superblocks. If a special or a directory is not specified, the free space on all mounted file systems is displayed. If the arguments to df are path names, df reports on the file systems containing the named files. If the argument to df is a special... |
|
df_hfs(1m) -- report number of free CDFS, HFS, or NFS file system disk blocks
|
|
The df command displays the number of free 512-byte blocks and free inodes available for file systems by examining the counts kept in the superblock or superblocks. If a special or a directory is not specified, the free space on all mounted file systems is displayed. If the arguments to df are path names, df reports on the file systems containing the named files. If the argument to df is a special... |
|
df_nfs(1m) -- report number of free CDFS, HFS, or NFS file system disk blocks
|
|
The df command displays the number of free 512-byte blocks and free inodes available for file systems by examining the counts kept in the superblock or superblocks. If a special or a directory is not specified, the free space on all mounted file systems is displayed. If the arguments to df are path names, df reports on the file systems containing the named files. If the argument to df is a special... |
|
df_vxfs(1m) -- report number of free disk blocks on a VxFS file system
|
|
df prints the number of free blocks and free inodes in VxFS file systems or directories based on the counts kept in the super-blocks. VxFS dynamically allocates inodes from a pool of free blocks. The number of free inodes and blocks reported by df is an estimate based on the number of free 8K or larger extents and the current ratio of allocated inodes to allocated blocks. (Extents smaller than 8K ... |
|
dgcfgbackup(1m) -- create or update VxVM volume group configuration backup file
|
|
The dgcfgbackup command saves the VxVM configuration for a disk group in a default or alternate configuration backup file (see the description of the-f option). By default, dgcfgbackup is run automatically each time that a VxVM command changes the VxVM configuration. In this case, it always uses the default configuration backup file. An existing default configuration backup file is renamed with an... |
|
dgcfgdaemon(1m) -- start the VxVM configuration backup daemon
|
|
The dgcfgdaemon script starts the VxVM configuration backup daemon. dgcfgdaemon monitors changes to the VxVM configuration, and saves this configuration each time that a VxVM configuration change occurs. dgcfgdaemon is is started from the vxvm-startup startup script. |
|
dgcfgrestor(1m) -- display or restore VxVM disk group configuration from backup file
|
|
The dgcfgrestore command may be used to restore configuration data to the only disk in a single-disk disk group, or to a disk in a multidisk disk group in which all other disks do not have a configuration data copy. dgcfgrestore is designed not to work if the disk being restored belongs to a multi-disk disk group and at least one of the other disks in the group is online and contains configuration... |
|
dhcpclient(1m) -- Client for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server
|
|
dhcpclient is used to obtain the configuration parameters from the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server (bootpd(1M)) to configure the host. Currently, dhcpclient supports 10bt (10BaseT) and 100bt (100BaseT) Ethernet networks only. It does not support FDDI and Token-Ring networks. dhcpclient is invoked by the auto_parms script (see auto_parms(1M)) at boot up. The /etc/rc.config.d/netco... |
|
dhcpdb2conf(1m) -- convert DHCP client database to config file parameters
|
|
The dhcpdb2conf command translates a client system's DHCP database parameters (from dhcpclient(1M)) into a set of standard configuration file parameters. This is an essential step for configuring a DHCP client system, and is invoked by auto_parms(1M) upon every reboot when DHCP is active. A DHCP client database can contain settings for such items as: hostname, IP address, and default gateway (a s... |
|
dhcptools(1m) -- command line tool for DHCP elements of bootpd
|
|
dhcptools is a command line tool that provides access to DHCP-related options for the bootpd server. The options provide control for dumping internal data structures, generating a hosts file, previewing client address assignment, reclaiming unused addresses, tracing packets, and validating configuration files. |
|
dhcpv6clientd(1m) -- DHCPv6 client daemon
|
|
dhcpv6clientd obtains the configuration parameters from the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCPv6) server to configure the host. See dhcpv6d(1M). |
|
dhcpv6client_ui(1) -- DHCPv6 client interface for requesting configuration parameters from the DHCPv6 server.
|
|
dhcpv6client_ui is the interface through which a user contacts the client daemon to obtain IP addresses and other configuration parameters from the server. The default configuration parameters are specified as command line options when the DHCPv6 client daemon is invoked. When dhcpv6client_ui requests for IP addresses or other configuration parameters, the client daemon obtains them from the serve... |
|
dhcpv6d(1m) -- Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server daemon for IPv6
|
|
The dhcpv6d server daemon is the IPv6 version of the bootpd daemon. This version supports the following features: + Dynamic renumbering + Relay preconfiguration with server addresses, or use of multicast addresses + Multiple IP addresses for an interface The dhcpv6d daemon is run as a stand-alone daemon and not spawned by inetd. |
|
dhcpv6db2conf(1m) -- DHCPv6 client database converter
|
|
dhcpv6db2conf provides a means of translating the DHCPv6 client database, /etc/dhcpv6client.data, into a set of standard configuration file variables. The client database consists of a series of records. Each record represents a unique lan interface and a list of attributes, which correspond to that interface. The attributes are configuration parameters like: host's IP address, NTP server address... |
|
diaglogd(1m) -- Support Tools Manager logging daemon
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) uses a logging daemon ( diaglogd ) to read diagnostic events from the kernel via diag2 (diagnostic pseudo driver) and logs them in the system log files. diaglogd is launched automatically at boot by the STM daemon diagmond. The STM User Interface, xstm , mstm , or cstm , Daemon commands can also be used to launch the daemon as well as shut it down and view the daemo... |
|
diagmond(1m) -- Support Tools Manager daemon
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) provides three interfaces that allow a user access to an underlying toolset, consisting of information modules, firmware update tools, verifiers, diagnostics, exercisers, expert tools, and utilities. STM uses a monitor ( diagmond ) to manage launching and controlling tools as well as remote file system accesses. Diagmond keeps track of the system hardware configurat... |
|
diff(1) -- differential file and directory comparator
|
|
Comparing Directories If both arguments are directories, diff sorts the contents of the directories by name, then runs the regular file diff algorithm (described below) on text files that have the same name in each directory but are different. Binary files that differ, common subdirectories, and files that appear in only one directory are listed. When comparing directories, the following options a... |
|
diff3(1) -- 3-way differential file comparison
|
|
diff3 compares three versions of a file, and prints disagreeing ranges of text flagged with these codes: ==== all three files differ ====1 file1 is different ====2 file2 is different ====3 file3 is different The type of change required to convert a given range of a given file to some other is indicated in one of these ways: f:n1a Text is to be appended after line number :n1a Text is to be appended... |
|
diffmk(1) -- mark changes between two different versions of a file
|
|
diffmk compares the previous version of a file with the current version and creates a file that includes nroff/troff ``change mark'' commands. prevfile is the name of the previous version of the file and currfile is the name of the current version of the file. diffmk generates markfile which contains all the lines of the currfile plus inserted formatter ``change mark'' (.mc) requests. When mar... |
|
dig(1m) -- domain information groper
|
|
dig (domain information groper) is a flexible tool for interrogating Domain Name System (DNS) servers. It performs DNS lookups and displays the answers that are returned from the name server(s) that were queried. Most DNS administrators use dig to troubleshoot DNS problems because of its flexibility, ease of use, and clarity of output. The dig command has two modes: simple command-line mode for si... |
|
dircmp(1) -- directory comparison
|
|
dircmp examines dir1 and dir2 and generates various tabulated information about the contents of the directories. Sorted listings of files that are unique to each directory are generated for all the options. If no option is entered, a sorted list is output indicating whether the filenames common to both directories have the same contents. -d Compare the contents of files with the same name in both ... |
|
dirname(1) -- extract portions of path names
|
|
basename deletes any prefix ending in / and the suffix (if present in string) from string, and prints the result on the standard output. If string consists entirely of slash characters, string is set to a single slash character. If there are any trailing slash characters in string, they are removed. If the suffix operand is present but not identical to the characters remaining in string, but it is... |
|
disable(1m) -- Stops the DCE DTS entity on the local node
|
|
The disable command turns off the DCE DTS entity on the system where the command is entered. When the command is executed, the status attribute state is set to off. |
|
disable(1) -- enable/disable LP printers
|
|
The enable command activates the named printers, enabling them to print requests taken by lp. Use lpstat to find the status of printers (see lp(1) and lpstat(1)). disable deactivates the named printers, disabling them from printing requests taken by lp. By default, any requests that are currently printing on the designated printers are reprinted in their entirety either on the same printer or on a... |
|
disable_clerk(1m) -- Stops the clerk on the local system
|
|
The disable clerk command stops the clerk on the local system, causing all active communication with any server to be aborted and all client calls in progress to fail. The clerk cache is copied to disk. |
|
disable_server(1m) -- Stops the server on the local system
|
|
The disable server command stops the server on the local system. The server is disabled after all transactions in progress are completed. |
|
diskinfo(1m) -- describe characteristics of a disk device
|
|
The diskinfo command determines whether the character special file named by character_devicefile is associated with a SCSI or floppy disk drive. If so, diskinfo summarizes the disk's characteristics. The diskinfo command displays information about the following characteristics of disk drives: Vendor name Manufacturer of the drive (SCSI only) Product ID Product identification number or ASCII name ... |
|
disksecn(1m) -- calculate default disk section sizes
|
|
disksecn is used to calculate the disk section sizes based on the Berkeley disk partitioning method. disksecn recognizes the following options: -p Produce tables suitable for inclusion in the device driver. -d Produce tables suitable for generating the disk description file /etc/disktab. -b block_size When generating the above tables, use a sector size of block_size bytes, where block_size can be ... |
|
diskusg(1m) -- generate disk accounting data by user ID
|
|
diskusg generates intermediate disk accounting information from data in files, or the standard input if omitted. diskusg outputs lines on the standard output, one per user, in the following format: uid login #blocks where: uid User's numerical user ID, login User's login name, and #blocks Total number of disk blocks allocated to this user. diskusg normally reads only the inodes of file systems f... |
|
divpage(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
dmesg(1m) -- collect system diagnostic messages to form error log
|
|
dmesg looks in a system buffer for recently printed diagnostic messages and prints them on the standard output. The messages are those printed by the system when unusual events occur (such as when system tables overflow or the system crashes). If the - argument is specified, dmesg computes (incrementally) the new messages since the last time it was run and places these on the standard output. This... |
|
dmpxlt(1) -- dump iconv translation tables to a readable format
|
|
dmpxlt dumps the compiled version of the iconv codeset conversion tables into an ASCII-readable format that can be modified and used as input to genxlt(1) to regenerate the table for iconv(1). |
|
dnssec-keygen(1) -- key generation tool for DNSSEC
|
|
dnssec-keygen generates keys for Secure DNS (DNSSEC) as defined in RFC2535. It also generates keys for use in Transaction Signatures (TSIG) which is defined in RFC2845. |
|
dnssec-makekeyset(1) -- used to produce a set of DNSSEC keys
|
|
dnssec-makekeyset generates a key set from one or more keys created by dnssec-keygen. It creates a file containing KEY and SIG records for some zone which can then be signed by the zone's parent if the parent zone is DNSSEC-aware. keyfile should be a key identification string as reported by dnssec- keygen; such as, Knnnn.+nnnn.+aaa+iiiii, where nnnn is the name of the key, aaa is the encryption a... |
|
dnssec-signkey(1) -- DNSSEC keyset signing tool
|
|
dnssec-signkey is used to sign a key set for a child zone. Typically this would be provided by a .keyset file generated by the dnssec- makekeyset utility. This provides a mechanism for a DNSSEC-aware zone to sign the keys of any DNSSEC-aware child zones. The child zone's key set gets signed with the zone keys for its parent zone. keyset will be the pathname of the child zone's .keyset file. Each... |
|
dnssec-signzone(1) -- DNSSEC zone signing tool
|
|
dnssec-signzone is used to sign a zone. Any .signedkey files for the zone to be signed should be present in the current directory, along with the keys that will be used to sign the zone. |
|
dodisk(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
domainname(1) -- set or display name of Network Information Service domain
|
|
Network Information Service (NIS) uses domain names to refer collectively to a group of hosts. Without an argument, domainname displays the name of the NIS domain. Only superuser can set the domain name by providing name_of_domain. The domain name is usually set in the configuration file /etc/rc.config.d/namesvrs, by setting the NIS_DOMAIN variable. |
|
dos2ux(1) -- convert ASCII file format
|
|
dos2ux and ux2dos read each specified file in sequence and write it to standard output, converting to HP-UX format or to DOS format, respectively. Each file can be either DOS format or HP-UX format for either command. A DOS file name is recognized by the presence of an embedded colon (:) delimiter; see dosif(4) for DOS file naming conventions. If no input file is given or if the argument - is enco... |
|
doschmod(1) -- change attributes of a DOS file
|
|
The doschmod command is targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. doschmod is the DOS counterpart of chmod (see chmod(1)). |
|
doscp(1) -- copy to or from DOS files
|
|
The doscp command is targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. doscp is the DOS counterpart of cp (see cp(1)). doscp copies a DOS file to a DOS or HP-UX file, an HP-UX file to an HP-UX or DOS file, or HP-UX or DOS files to an HP-UX or DOS directory. The last name in the argument list is the destination file or directory. A DOS file name is recognized by the presence of an embedded c... |
|
dosdf(1) -- report number of free disk clusters
|
|
The dosdf command is targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. dosdf is the DOS counterpart of the df command (see df(1)). It prints the cluster size in bytes and the number of free clusters on the specified DOS volume. |
|
dosll(1) -- list contents of DOS directories
|
|
The dosls and dosll commands are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. dosls is the DOS counterpart of ls (see ls(1)). For each directory named, dosls lists the contents of that directory. For each file named, dosls repeats its name and any other information requested. If invoked by the name dosll, the -l (ell) option is implied. |
|
dosls(1) -- list contents of DOS directories
|
|
The dosls and dosll commands are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. dosls is the DOS counterpart of ls (see ls(1)). For each directory named, dosls lists the contents of that directory. For each file named, dosls repeats its name and any other information requested. If invoked by the name dosll, the -l (ell) option is implied. |
|
dosmkdir(1) -- make a DOS directory
|
|
The dosmkdir command is targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. dosmkdir is the DOS counterpart of the mkdir command (see mkdir(1)). It creates specified directories. The standard entries, . for the directory itself and .. for its parent, are made automatically. There is one option: -m In this case you may have a directory name same as DOS volume label. -u Disable argument case co... |
|
dosrm(1) -- remove DOS files or directories
|
|
The dosrm and dosrmdir commands are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. dosrm and dosrmdir are DOS counterparts of rm and rmdir (see rm(1) and rmdir(1), respectively). dosrm removes the entries for one or more files from a directory. If a specified file is a directory, an error message is printed unless the optional argument -r is specified (see below). dosrmdir removes entrie... |
|
dosrmdir(1) -- remove DOS files or directories
|
|
The dosrm and dosrmdir commands are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. dosrm and dosrmdir are DOS counterparts of rm and rmdir (see rm(1) and rmdir(1), respectively). dosrm removes the entries for one or more files from a directory. If a specified file is a directory, an error message is printed unless the optional argument -r is specified (see below). dosrmdir removes entrie... |
|
dpp(1m) -- dedicated ports parser used by DDFA software
|
|
The Dedicated Ports Parser command (dpp) is part of the Data Communications and Terminal Controller (DTC) Device File Access (DDFA) software. It parses the Dedicated Ports file (dp) and spawns an Outbound Connection Daemon (ocd) for each valid entry in the dp file. dpp can be run from the shell or it can be included in a system initialization script to automatically run the DDFA software each time... |
|
dtscp(1m) -- DTS control program
|
|
This section describes the commands for the DCE Distributed Time Service (DTS) control program (dtscp). The DTS control program is a command-line interface that enables you to synchronize, adjust, and maintain the system clocks in a distributed network. For a detailed explanation of system clock synchronization and management, see the OSF DCE Administration Guide. The DTS control program commands ... |
|
dtsd(1m) -- Restarts the DTS daemon
|
|
The dtsd command invokes the DTS daemon (clerk or server process). This command is usually executed as part of the overall DCE startup script, rc.dce. You can enter the command manually under the following conditions: + If a DTS daemon fails to start automatically upon reboot + If you want to restart a daemon that you shut down to perform a backup or do diagnostic work Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 ... |
|
dtsdate(1m) -- Sets local clock from a remote dtsd server host
|
|
The dtsdate command sets the local clock of a system to be the same as the host remote_host, running a dtsd server. The purpose of dtsdate is to ensure that clock skew is minimized at initial cell configuration or at host instantiation, because it is difficult to start DCE and its components if the skew is too great. Clocks among all DCE components must be within five minutes of each other, to pre... |
|
dts_intro(1m) -- Introduction to the DCE DTS commands
|
|
The DCE Distributed Time Service (DTS) provides the following facilities: + The dtsd daemon + The DTS control program (dtscp) + The DTS local clock setting program (dtsdate) The DTS is implemented in the dtsd process. Both clerks and servers use the same daemon. The behavior of the dtsd daemon is determined by the dtscp command. The dtscp control program allows you to synchronize, adjust, and main... |
|
dts_update(1m) -- Gradually adjusts the clock on the local node to the specified time
|
|
The update command gradually adjusts the system clock to a new time, beginning at the time specified in the argument. The difference between the current clock value and the absolute time specified in the argument is used to adjust the clock. |
|
du(1) -- summarize disk usage
|
|
The du command gives the number of 512-byte blocks allocated for all files and (recursively) directories within each directory and file specified by the name operands. The block count includes the indirect blocks of the file. A file with two or more links is counted only once. If name is missing, the current working directory is used. By default, du generates an entry only for the name operands an... |
|
dump(1m) -- incremental file system dump, local or across network
|
|
The dump and rdump commands copy to magnetic tape all files in the filesystem that have been changed after a certain date. This information is derived from the files /var/adm/dumpdates and /etc/fstab. option specifies the date and other options about the dump. option consists of characters from the set 0123456789bdfnsuWw. The dump and rdump commands work only on file systems of type hfs. If the gi... |
|
dumpfs(1m) -- dump file system information
|
|
The dumpfs command prints the super block and cylinder group information for an HFS file system to the standard output. The file system may be specified by its root directory or the name of the device special file on which it resides. The information is very long and detailed. This command can be used to find file system information such as the file system block size or the minimum free space perc... |
|
dumpfs_hfs(1m) -- dump file system information
|
|
The dumpfs command prints the super block and cylinder group information for an HFS file system to the standard output. The file system may be specified by its root directory or the name of the device special file on which it resides. The information is very long and detailed. This command can be used to find file system information such as the file system block size or the minimum free space perc... |
|
dumpmsg(1) -- create message catalog file for modification
|
|
The findmsg command extracts messages from a C program source file and writes them to the standard output in a format suitable for input to gencat (see gencat(1)). The input file will be preprocessed using cpp (see cpp(1)) in order to select print specifiers and handle ifdef, ifndef... conditional cpp primitives. If multiple input files are specified and the -a option is not used, the files are pr... |
|
dump_clerk_cache(1m) -- Displays the contents of the clerk cache
|
|
The dump clerk cache command displays the contents of the clerk cache on the screen. Use this command when solving CDS problems. |
|
echo(1) -- echo (print) arguments
|
|
echo writes its arguments separated by blanks and terminated by a new-line on the standard output. It also understands C-like escape conventions; beware of conflicts with the shell's use of \: \a write an alert character \b backspace \c print line without appending a new-line \f form-feed \n new-line \r carriage return \t tab \v vertical tab \\ backslash \n the 8-bit character whose A... |
|
ed(1) -- line-oriented text editor
|
|
The ed command executes a line-oriented text editor. It is most commonly used in scripts and noninteractive editing applications because, even though it can be used interactively, other editors such as vi and ex are typically easier to use in an interactive environment. If file is specified, ed performs an e command (see below) on the named file; that is to say, the file is read into ed's buffer ... |
|
edit(1) -- extended line-oriented text editor
|
|
The ex program is the line-oriented personality of a text editor that also supports screen-oriented editing (see vi(1)). (XPG4 only.) Certain block-mode terminals do not have all the capabilities necessary to support the complete ex definition, such as the full-screen editing commands (visual mode or open mode). When these commands cannot be supported on such terminals, this condition shall neithe... |
|
edquota(1m) -- edit user disk quotas
|
|
The edquota command is the quota editor. One or more user names can be specified on the command line. For each username, a temporary file is created with a textual representation of the current disk quotas for that user, and an editor is invoked on the file. The quotas can then be modified, new quotas added, etc. Upon leaving the editor, edquota reads the temporary file and modifies the binary quo... |
|
efi_cp(1m) -- copy to or from EFI file
|
|
efi_cp copies files between HP-UX and EFI file systems. The EFI file system is based on the FAT file system and used by the Itanium-based system BIOS to locate an HP-UX bootloader. See efi(4). Without the -u option, efi_cp copies from an HP-UX file system to the EFI volume specified by devicefile; in this case, the destination should be relative to the root of the EFI volume specified by devicefil... |
|
efi_fsinit(1m) -- write an EFI file system header on a device file
|
|
efi_fsinit writes an EFI file system header on a device file. The EFI file system is based on the FAT file system and used by the Itanium(R)-based system BIOS to locate an HP-UX bootloader. See efi(4). Before any other EFI commands can be run, efi_fsinit must be run to initialize the file system on a device file. |
|
efi_ls(1m) -- list EFI file information or contents of an EFI directory
|
|
efi_ls lists file information or contents of an EFI directory. The EFI file system is based on the FAT file system and used by the Itanium(R)-based system BIOS to locate an HP-UX bootloader. See efi(4). efi_ls lists filenames, last modified dates, and file sizes. devicefile should be a device file for an EFI volume. Given a path, efi_ls determines whether the path is a file or a directory. For a f... |
|
efi_mkdir(1m) -- make an EFI directory
|
|
efi_mkdir makes an EFI directory. The EFI file system is based on the FAT file system and used by the Itanium(R)-based system BIOS to locate an HP-UX bootloader. See efi(4). efi_mkdir creates directory dirname in the EFI volume specified by devicefile. If dirname already exists, efi_mkdir exits with a diagnostic message, and the directory is not changed. If more than one subdirectory needs to be c... |
|
efi_rm(1m) -- remove an EFI file
|
|
efi_rm removes an EFI file. The EFI file system is based on the FAT file system and used by the Itanium(R)-based system BIOS to locate an HP-UX bootloader. See efi(4). devicefile should be the device file for the EFI volume. If file is a directory, efi_rm prints a diagnostic message and returns without removing the directory; use efi_rmdir(1M) to remove EFI directories. file should be relative to ... |
|
efi_rmdir(1m) -- remove an EFI directory
|
|
efi_rmdir removes an EFI directory The EFI file system is based on the FAT file system and used by the Itanium(R)-based system BIOS to locate an HP-UX bootloader. See efi(4). devicefile should be the device file for the EFI volume. If directory is not a directory or the directory is not empty, efi_rmdir prints a diagnostic message and returns without removing the file; use efi_rm(1M) to remove EFI... |
|
egrep(1) -- search a file for a pattern
|
|
The grep command searches the input text files (standard input default) for lines matching a pattern. Normally, each line found is copied to the standard output. grep supports the Basic Regular Expression syntax (see regexp(5)). The -E option (egrep) supports Extended Regular Expression (ERE) syntax (see regexp(5)). The -F option (fgrep) searches for fixed strings using the fast Boyer-Moore string... |
|
elfdump(1) -- dump information contained in object files.
|
|
elfdump takes one or more object files or libraries and dumps information about them. The following options are supported: -a Dumps archive headers from an archive library. -c Dumps the string table(s). -C (Modifier) Demangles C++ symbol names before printing them. This modifier is valid with -c, -r, -s, and -t. If specified with -H, this modifier is ignored. If specified with -n name, the symbol ... |
|
elm(1) -- process electronic mail through a screen-oriented interface
|
|
The elm program is a screen-oriented electronic mail processing system. It supports the industry-wide MIME standard for nontext mail, a special forms message and forms reply mechanism, and an easy-to-use alias system for individuals and groups. elm operates in three principal modes: + Interactive mode, running as an interactive mail interface program. (First syntax.) + Message mode, sending a sing... |
|
elmalias(1) -- display and verify elm user and system aliases
|
|
The elmalias command displays and verifies user and system elm aliases. The system database must have been created by the newalias command (see newalias(1)). The user database must have been created by either the newalias command or the elm mail system (see elm(1)). If the same alias is in both databases, the user version is used. Missing database files are silently ignored. Each database entry ca... |
|
enable(1m) -- Starts the DTS entity on the local node.
|
|
After the DTS entity is created with the dtscp create command, it is still in a non-functioning state. To put it into operation, you must invoke dtscp enable, which causes an immediate synchronization to take place. When the command is executed, the status attribute state is set to on. In addition, you may use the enable command to activate a DTS entity that has previously been deactivated with th... |
|
enable(1) -- enable/disable LP printers
|
|
The enable command activates the named printers, enabling them to print requests taken by lp. Use lpstat to find the status of printers (see lp(1) and lpstat(1)). disable deactivates the named printers, disabling them from printing requests taken by lp. By default, any requests that are currently printing on the designated printers are reprinted in their entirety either on the same printer or on a... |
|
env(1) -- set environment for command execution
|
|
env obtains the current environment, modifies it according to its arguments, then executes the command with the modified environment. Arguments of the form name=value are merged into the inherited environment before the command is executed. The =value are merged into the inherited environment before the command is executed. The value are merged into the inherited environment before the command is ... |
|
envd(1m) -- system physical environment daemon
|
|
The envd daemon provides a means for the system to respond to environmental conditions detected by hardware. Such responses are typically designed to maintain file system integrity and prevent data loss. The environmental conditions currently recognized by envd are over-temperature and chassis fan failure. envd logs messages and then executes actions when a supported environmental event is detecte... |
|
et-big5(1) -- big5 UDF file format converter
|
|
et-big5 is used to convert a PC ET UDF file to hp9000 UDF file |
|
et-ccdc(1) -- ccdc UDF file format converter
|
|
et-ccdc is used to convert a PC ET UDF file to hp9000 UDF file |
|
eucset(1) -- sets and gets code widths for ldterm
|
|
The eucset command sets or gets (reports) the encoding and display widths of the Extended UNIX Code (EUC), and UCS Transformation Format (UTF8), and GB18030 characters processed by the current input terminal. EUC is an encoding method for codesets composed of single or multiple bytes. It permits applications and the terminal hardware to use the 7-bit US ASCII code and up to three single byte or mu... |
|
ex(1) -- extended line-oriented text editor
|
|
The ex program is the line-oriented personality of a text editor that also supports screen-oriented editing (see vi(1)). (XPG4 only.) Certain block-mode terminals do not have all the capabilities necessary to support the complete ex definition, such as the full-screen editing commands (visual mode or open mode). When these commands cannot be supported on such terminals, this condition shall neithe... |
|
exit(1m) -- Causes dtscp to complete execution.
|
|
The exit command causes the DTS control program (dtscp) to complete execution and returns operation to the parent process. |
|
expand(1) -- expand tabs to spaces, and vice versa
|
|
expand processes the named files or the standard input and writes to the standard output with tabs changed into spaces. Backspace characters are preserved in the output, and the column count is decreased by one column for tab calculations. For proper tab calculation, if a multi-column character is to be "backspace'd", it should be followed by multiple backspace characters which equal to it's c... |
|
expand_alias(1) -- recursively expands the sendmail aliases
|
|
Expand_alias is a shell script that recursively expands the sendmail aliases. Through use of telnet host 25 and the expn command, each alias is recursively expanded into its destination(s). Indentation is used to show each level of recursion. Because of the recursive use of telnet, expand_alias is slow. If the local telnet cannot directly connect to a remote system, due to a firewall configuration... |
|
exportfs(1m) -- export and unexport directories to NFS clients
|
|
The exportfs command makes a local directory or file available to NFS clients for mounting over the network. Directories and files cannot be NFS-mounted unless they are first exported by exportfs. exportfs is normally invoked at boot time by the /sbin/init.d/nfs.server script, and uses information contained in the /etc/exports file to export the file or file system named by each dir, which must be... |
|
expr(1) -- evaluate arguments as an expression
|
|
expr takes arguments as an expression, evaluates, then writes the result on the standard output. Terms in the expression must be separated by blanks. Characters special to the shell must be escaped. Note that 0, rather than the null string, is returned to indicate a zero value. Strings containing blanks or other special characters should be quoted. Integer-valued arguments can be preceded by a una... |
|
extendfs(1m) -- extend a file system size (generic)
|
|
If the original file system image created on special does not make use of all of the available space, extendfs can be used to increase the capacity of a file system by updating the file system structure to include the extra space. The command-line parameter special specifies the device special file of either a logical volume or a disk partition. The special must be un-mounted before extendfs can b... |
|
extendfs_hfs(1m) -- extend HFS file system size
|
|
If the original HFS file system image created on special does not make use of all of the available space, the extendfs command can be used to increase the capacity of an HFS file system by updating the file system structure to include the extra space. The command-line parameter special specifies the character device special file of either a logical volume or a disk partition. The special must be u... |
|
extendfs_vxfs(1m) -- extend VxFS file system size
|
|
If the VxFS file system image created on special does not use all of the available space, extendfs increases the capacity of a VxFS file system by updating the file system structure to include the extra space. special specifies the device special file of either a logical volume or a disk partition. If special refers to a mounted file system, you must unmount special before running extendfs (see mo... |
|
factor(1) -- factor a number, generate large primes
|
|
If no arguments are provided on the command line, factor waits for a number to be typed in. If a positive number is typed, it factors the number and print its prime factors; each one is printed the proper number of times. It then waits for another number. factor exits if it encounters a zero or any non-numeric character. If an argument is provided on the command line, factor factors the number as ... |
|
false(1) -- return exit status zero or one respectively
|
|
The command true does nothing, and returns exit code zero. The command false does nothing, and returns exit code one. They are typically used to construct command procedures. |
|
fastbind(1) -- Prepare an incomplete executable for faster program startup
|
|
fastbind is a tool that can improve the start-up time of programs that use shared libraries (incomplete executables) by storing information about needed shared library symbols in the executable file. fastbind performs analysis on the symbols used to bind an executable and all of it's dependent shared libraries, and stores this information in the executable file. The next time the executable is ru... |
|
fastmail(1) -- quick batch mail interface
|
|
The fastmail command is a simple interface to the mail system that allows you to send a message without the overhead of an interactive mailer. It is particularly efficient in batch-processing mail to very large groups of people. All addresses should be full e-mail addresses, sendmail aliases in the /etc/mail/aliases file, or local login names. |
|
fbackup(1m) -- selectively back up files
|
|
fbackup combines features of dump and ftio to provide a flexible, high-speed file system backup mechanism (see dump(1M) and ftio(1)). fbackup selectively transfers files to an output device. For each file transferred, the file's contents and all the relevant information necessary to restore it to an equivalent state are copied to the output device. The output device can be a raw magnetic tape dri... |
|
fc(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
fcdlist(1m) --
|
|
|
|
fcmsutil(1m) -- Fibre Channel Mass Storage Utility Command for TACHYON TL A5158A, A6684A, A6685A, TACHYON XL2 A6795A, DUAL POR
|
|
The fcmsutil command is a diagnostic tool to be used for TACHYON TL A5158A, A6684A, A6685A, TACHYON XL2 A6795A, DUAL PORT A6826A and FC/GigE Combo A9782A/A9784A Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters. This command provides the ability to perform Fibre Channel Test and Echo functionality, read the card's registers, etc. This command requires the use of a device file to indicate the interface over which t... |
|
fddipciadmin(1m) -- show PCI FDDI interface status, and/or change FDDI attributes
|
|
fddipciadmin displays information about the status of the PCI FDDI interface. The fddipciadmin utility first shows summary information about the PCI FDDI interface. It then displays a menu that allows the user to refresh statistics and display other interface attributes. The menu also allows the T_Req time (Token Request Time) and T_Notify time (Negotiated Target Token Rotation Time) to be changed... |
|
fdetach(1m) -- detach a STREAMS-based file descriptor from a filename
|
|
The fdetach command detaches or disassociates a file descriptor for an open STREAMS device or pipe from its filename in the file system. The path argument is the path that was previously associated with the file descriptor by the fattach() function. Operations on path will subsequently affect the file system node, not the STREAMS device or pipe. The permissions and status of the node are returned ... |
|
ff(1m) -- list file names and statistics for a file system
|
|
The ff command reads the i-list and directories of each special file, assuming it to be a file system, saving i-node data for files that match the selection criteria. Output consists of the path name for each saved i-node, plus any other file information requested with the -o option. Output fields are positional. The output is produced in i-node order; fields are separated by tabs. The default lin... |
|
ff_hfs(1m) -- list file names and statistics for HFS file system
|
|
The ff command reads the i-list and directories of each special file special, assuming it to be an HFS file system, saving i-node data for files that match the selection criteria. Output consists of the path name for each saved i-node, plus any other file information requested using the print options below. Output fields are positional. The output is produced in i-node order; fields are separated ... |
|
ff_vxfs(1m) -- fast find: list file names and statistics for a VxFS file system
|
|
ff reads the inode list and directories of each special file, assuming it to be a VxFS file system, and prints inode data for files that match the selection criteria. Output consists of the pathname for each saved inode, plus any other file information requested using the print options below. Output fields are positional. The output is produced in inode order; fields are separated by tabs. The def... |
|
fg(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
fgrep(1) -- search a file for a pattern
|
|
The grep command searches the input text files (standard input default) for lines matching a pattern. Normally, each line found is copied to the standard output. grep supports the Basic Regular Expression syntax (see regexp(5)). The -E option (egrep) supports Extended Regular Expression (ERE) syntax (see regexp(5)). The -F option (fgrep) searches for fixed strings using the fast Boyer-Moore string... |
|
file(1) -- determine file type
|
|
file performs a series of tests on each file in an attempt to classify it. If file appears to be an ASCII file, file examines the first 512 bytes and tries to guess its language. If file is an executable a.out file, file prints the version stamp, provided it is greater than 0 (see the description of the -V option in ld(1)). file uses the file /etc/magic to identify files that have some sort of mag... |
|
find(1) -- find files
|
|
The find command recursively descends the directory hierarchy for each path name in pathname_list (that is, one or more path names) seeking files that match a Boolean expression written in the primaries given below. By default, find does not follow symbolic links. The Boolean expression is evaluated using short-circuit evaluation. This means that whenever the result of a Boolean operation (AND or ... |
|
findmsg(1) -- create message catalog file for modification
|
|
The findmsg command extracts messages from a C program source file and writes them to the standard output in a format suitable for input to gencat (see gencat(1)). The input file will be preprocessed using cpp (see cpp(1)) in order to select print specifiers and handle ifdef, ifndef... conditional cpp primitives. If multiple input files are specified and the -a option is not used, the files are pr... |
|
findstr(1) -- find strings for inclusion in message catalogs
|
|
findstr examines files of C source code for uncommented string constants which it places, along with the surrounding quotes, on the standard output, preceding each by the file name, start position, and length. This information is used by insertmsg (see insertmsg(1)). findstr does not output strings that are parameters of the catgets() routine (see catgets(3C)). |
|
finger(1) -- user information lookup program
|
|
By default, finger lists for each user_name on the system: + Login name, + Full given name, + Terminal write status (if write permission is denied), + Idle time, + Login time, + User's home directory and login shell, + Any plan the user has placed in file .plan in their home directory, + Project on which they are working from the file .project, also in the home directory, + office location and ph... |
|
fingerd(1m) -- remote user information server
|
|
fingerd is the server for the RFC 742 Name/Finger protocol. It provides a network interface to finger, which gives a status report of users currently logged in on the system or a detailed report about a specific user (see finger(1)). The Internet daemon executes fingerd when it receives a service request at the port listed in the services data base for ``finger'' using ``tcp'' protocol; see in... |
|
fixman(1m) -- fix manual pages for faster viewing with man(1)
|
|
The fixman command is a shell script that processes man pages in the cat* directories to unexpand spaces to tabs where possible, and to remove all character-backspace pairs (which usually exist to cause overstriking or underscoring for printer output). Removal of unnecessary character sequences improves the speed of man(1), and reduces disk space consumption. The fixman command should be run after... |
|
fmt(1) -- format text
|
|
The fmt command is a simple text formatter that fills and joins lines to produce output lines of (up to) the number of characters specified in the -w width option. The default width is 72. fmt concatenates the file arguments. If none are given, fmt formats text from the standard input. Blank lines are preserved in the output, as is the spacing between words. fmt does not fill lines beginning with ... |
|
fold(1) -- fold long lines for finite width output device
|
|
The fold command is a filter that folds the contents of the specified files, breaking the lines to have a maximum of width column positions (or bytes, if the -b option is specified). The fold command breaks lines by inserting a newline character so that each output line is the maximum width possible that does not exceed the specified number of column positions (or bytes). A line cannot be broken i... |
|
fontdl(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
forder(1) -- convert file data order
|
|
The text orientation (mode) of a file can be right-to-left (non-Latin) or left-to-right (Latin). This text orientation can affect the way data is arranged in the file. The data arrangements that result are called screen order and keyboard order. forder converts the order of characters in the file from screen order to keyboard order or vice versa. forder reads the concatenation of input files (or s... |
|
format(1m) -- format an HP SCSI disk array LUN
|
|
format formats one LUN of the HP SCSI disk array associated with device file, device_file. The format will usually be a soft or zeroing format, in which the controller writes zeroes to the data area and parity area, if any, of the LUN. NOTE: The above should always be true of a sub-LUN, but the controller might decide, based on certain conditions, to do a full format of a regular LUN, which consis... |
|
frecover(1m) -- selectively recover files
|
|
frecover reads media written by the fbackup command. Its actions are controlled by the selected function -r, -R, -x, -V, or -I. The function performed by frecover is specified by one of the following options: -r The backup media is read and the contents are loaded into the directories from which they were backed up. This option should only be used to recover a complete backup onto a clear director... |
|
from(1) -- who is my mail from?
|
|
from prints the mail header lines in your mailbox file to show who sent you mail. If user is specified, user's mailbox is examined instead of your own. If the -s option is given, only headers of mail from sender are printed. |
|
fruled(1) -- flash/turn off attention LEDs (cell, cabinet and I/O chassis attention LEDs)
|
|
The fruled command flashes/turns off attention LEDs of cells or I/O chassis in the local complex. The command can also be used to start flashing or stop flashing cabinet number LEDs. If either the -u option or the -g option is specified, the scope of the command will be the specified target complex. If a cell or I/O chassis attention LED is made to flash, the cabinet number LED of the cabinet that... |
|
frupower(1m) -- turn on/off or display current status of power for cells and I/O chassis
|
|
The frupower command turns power on or off, or displays the current status of power for cells and I/O chassis. The operations allowed by this command are subject to the following conditions: + An active cell cannot be powered off. An active cell is one that is assigned to a partition and that is being used by the partition. + The -i option can be used to display the power state of any I/O chassis,... |
|
fsadm(1m) -- a file system administration command
|
|
The fsadm command is designed to perform selected administration tasks on file systems. These tasks may differ between file system types. special is a device file containing an unmounted file system. However, if the file system is of the type that provides online administration capabilities the special could be a directory. directory must be the root of a mounted file system. Only a superuser can ... |
|
fsadm_hfs(1m) -- HFS file system administration command
|
|
The fsadm command is designed to perform selected administration tasks on HFS file systems. special is a device file containing an unmounted file system. Only a superuser can invoke fsadm. |
|
fsadm_vxfs(1m) -- resize or reorganize a VxFS file system
|
|
fsadm performs online administration functions on VxFS file systems, Storage Checkpoints, or individual files and directories. fsadm supports file-system resizing, extent reorganization, directory reorganization, and querying or changing the largefiles flag. fsadm operates on file systems mounted for read/write access, however, the -o option can also operate on a special device containing a clean,... |
|
fscat(1m) -- cat a VxFS file system
|
|
fscat provides an interface to a VxFS snapshot file system, similar to that provided by dd, invoked on the block or character special file of regular VxFS file systems. fscat works when executed on the special device of any VxFS file system. On most VxFS file systems, the block or character special file for the file system provides access to a raw image of the file system to back up the file syste... |
|
fscat_vxfs(1m) -- cat a VxFS file system
|
|
fscat provides an interface to a VxFS snapshot file system, similar to that provided by dd, invoked on the block or character special file of regular VxFS file systems. fscat works when executed on the special device of any VxFS file system. On most VxFS file systems, the block or character special file for the file system provides access to a raw image of the file system to back up the file syste... |
|
fsck(1m) -- file system consistency check and interactive repair
|
|
The fsck command audits and interactively repairs inconsistent conditions for HP-UX file systems on mass storage device files identified by special. If the file system is consistent, the number of files on that file system and the number of used and free blocks are reported. If the file system is inconsistent, fsck provides a mechanism to fix these inconsistencies, depending on which form of the f... |
|
fsck_cachefs(1m) -- check integrity of data cached with CacheFS
|
|
The CacheFS version of the fsck command checks the integrity of a cache directory. By default it corrects any CacheFS problems it finds. There is no interactive mode. The most likely invocation of fsck for CacheFS file systems is at boot time from an entry in the /etc/fstab file. |
|
fsck_hfs(1m) -- HFS file system consistency check and interactive repair
|
|
The fsck command audits and repairs inconsistent conditions for HFS file systems on mass storage device files identified by special. If the file system is consistent, the number of files on that file system and the number of used and free blocks are reported. If the file system is inconsistent, fsck provides a mechanism to fix these inconsistencies, depending on which form of the fsck command is u... |
|
fsck_vxfs(1m) -- check and repair a VxFS file system
|
|
fsck checks VxFS file systems for consistency. Because VxFS records pending file system updates in an intent log, fsck typically replays the intent log instead of doing a full structural file system check. You can use options (-o full or -y) to force a full structural file system check. special specifies one or more special character devices, for example, /dev/rdsk/c1t0d0. If multiple devices are ... |
|
fsclean(1m) -- determine the shutdown status of HFS file systems
|
|
The fsclean command determines the shutdown status of the HFS file system specified by special or, in the absence of special, the file systems listed in /etc/fstab of type hfs with the rw, default, or ro options set. All optional fields in /etc/fstab must be present for fsclean to be able to check each file system. fsclean reads the superblock to determine whether the file system's last shutdown ... |
|
fsclean_hfs(1m) -- determine the shutdown status of HFS file systems
|
|
The fsclean command determines the shutdown status of the HFS file system specified by special or, in the absence of special, the file systems listed in /etc/fstab of type hfs with the rw, default, or ro options set. All optional fields in /etc/fstab must be present for fsclean to be able to check each file system. fsclean reads the superblock to determine whether the file system's last shutdown ... |
|
fsdb(1m) -- file system debugger (generic)
|
|
The fsdb command can be used to patch up a damaged file system after a crash. It is intended for experienced users only. The file system type to be debugged is specified as FStype. Each file system type has a unique structure requiring different debugging capabilities. The manual entries for the file-system-specific fsdb should be consulted before attempting any debugging or modifications. |
|
fsdb_hfs(1m) -- HFS file system debugger
|
|
The fsdb command can be used to patch up a damaged file system after a crash. |
|
fsdb_vxfs(1m) -- VxFS file system debugger
|
|
fsdb can analyze VxFS file system problems or repair a damaged VxFS file system after a crash. A special device special specifies the file system to debug. The fsdb command is intended for experienced users only. fsdb can convert block and inumbers into their corresponding disk addresses. In addition, mnemonic offsets allow access to different parts of an inode. These greatly simplify the process ... |
|
fsirand(1m) -- install random inode generation numbers
|
|
fsirand installs random inode generation numbers on all the inodes on device special, and also installs a filesystem ID in the superblock. This process increases the security of filesystems exported by NFS. Use fsirand only on an unmounted filesystem that was checked with fsck (see fsck(1M)). The only exception is that it can be used on the root filesystem in single-user mode if the system is imme... |
|
fstobdf(1) -- generate BDF font from X font server
|
|
The fstobdf program reads a font from a font server and prints a BDF file on the standard output that may be used to recreate the font. This is useful in testing servers, debugging font metrics, and reproducing lost BDF files. |
|
fstyp(1m) -- determine file system type
|
|
The fstyp command allows the user to determine the file system type of a mounted or unmounted file system. special represents a device special file (for example: /dev/dsk/c1t6d0). The file system type is determined by reading the superblock of the supplied special file. If the superblock is read successfully, the command prints the file system type identifier on the standard output and exits with ... |
|
ftio(1) -- faster tape I/O
|
|
ftio is a tool designed specifically for copying files to tape drives. It performs faster than either cpio or tar in comparable situations (see cpio(1) and tar(1)). ftio uses multiple processes (to read/write the file system and to write/read the tape device), with large amounts of memory sharing between processes as well as a large block size for reading and writing to the tape. ftio is compatibl... |
|
ftp(1) -- file transfer program
|
|
ftp is a user interface to the File Transfer Protocol. ftp copies files over a network connection between the local ``client'' host and a remote ``server'' host. ftp runs on the client host. |
|
ftpcount(1) -- show current number of users for each class
|
|
The ftpcount command shows the current number of users (and the limit) for each class defined in the ftpaccess file. If the ftpaccess file does not exist, the ftpcount command will not display anything. However, if the ftpaccess file exists and it is of zero bytes, ftpcount will display an error message: ftpcount:no service classes defined, no usage count kept. The -V option causes the program to ... |
|
ftpd(1m) -- DARPA Internet File Transfer Protocol server
|
|
ftpd is the DARPA Internet File Transfer Protocol server. It expects to be run by the Internet daemon (see inetd(1M) and inetd.conf(4)). inetd runs ftpd when a service request is received at the port indicated in the ftp service specification in /etc/services (see services(4)). |
|
ftprestart(1) -- remove the shutdown message file created by ftpshut utility.
|
|
The ftprestart command removes all the shutdown message files from the real, anonymous, and virtual user accounts. The message files are created by the ftpshut utility in the path as specified by the `shutdown' directive in the /etc/ftpd/ftpaccess file (see ftpshut(1) for more details). This command is always used after the ftpshut command is executed. Note: For guest user accounts, the message f... |
|
ftpshut(1) -- create shutdown message file to shut down the ftp servers at a given time
|
|
The ftpshut command provides an automated shutdown procedure that a superuser can use to notify ftp users when the ftp server is shutting down. This command will create a shutdown message file in the path specified by the 'shutdown' directive in the /etc/ftpd/ftpaccess file in the real, anonymous and virtual user accounts. For guest accounts the system administrator must copy the message file cr... |
|
ftpwho(1) -- show current process information for each ftp user.
|
|
The ftpwho command shows the current process information for each user logged into the ftp server. If the ftpaccess file does not exist, this command will not display anything. However, if the ftpaccess file exists and it is of zero bytes then this command will display an error message: ftpwho: no service classes defined, no usage count kept. The -V option causes the program to display copyright a... |
|
fuser(1m) -- list processes using a file or file structure
|
|
The fuser command lists the process IDs of processes that have each specified file open. For block special devices, all processes using any file on that device are listed. The process ID may be followed by a letter, identifying how the file is being used, as follows: c file is current directory of the process. r file is the root directory of the process, as set up by the chroot command (see chroot... |
|
fwtmp(1m) -- manipulate connect accounting records
|
|
fwtmp fwtmp reads from the standard input and writes to the standard output, converting binary records of the type found in wtmps to formatted ASCII records. The ASCII version is useful to enable editing, via ed(1), bad records or for general purpose maintenance of the file. The argument -ic is used to denote that input is in ASCII form, and output is to be written in binary form. The arguments i ... |
|
gated(1m) -- gateway routing daemon
|
|
gated is a routing daemon that handles multiple routing protocols and replaces routed, egpup, and any routing daemon that speaks the HELLO routing protocol. gated currently handles the RIP, BGP, EGP, HELLO, and OSPF routing protocols. The gated process can be configured to perform all routing protocols or any subset of them (see WARNINGS below). |
|
gdc(1m) -- operational user interface for gated
|
|
gdc provides a user-oriented interface for the operation of the gated(1M) routing daemon. It provides support for starting and stopping the daemon, for the delivery of signals to manipulate the daemon when it is operating, for the maintenance and syntax checking of configuration files, and for the production and removal of state dumps and core dumps. gdc can reliably determine gated's running sta... |
|
gencat(1) -- generate a formatted message catalog file
|
|
Message catalogs allow a program to process input and produce output according to local customs and languages. For details, see Native Language Support Users Guide. The gencat command merges each message source msgfile into a formatted message catalog catfile that can be accessed by catgets() (see catgets(3C)). If catfile does not exist, it is created. If catfile exists, its messages are included ... |
|
genxlt(1) -- generate iconv translation tables
|
|
genxlt generates a compiled, non-readable binary version of the iconv table that is suitable for use by iconv(1) and iconv(3C). If input_filename or output_filename is not supplied, standard input and/or standard output will be used. Since the output of genxlt is a binary, non-readable file, if the -f option is not used, the redirection symbol > maybe used to redirect the standard output to a file... |
|
geocustoms(1m) -- configure system language on multi-language systems
|
|
The geocustoms command manages default selection and retention/removal of multiple languages installed on "ignited" (Instant Ignition) systems. The geocustoms command is executed at first-boot (see auto_parms(1M)) on ignited systems with multiple languages available. In subsequent sessions, invoking the command /usr/sbin/geocustoms starts geocustoms. When invoked with no options, geocustoms runs... |
|
get(1) -- get a version of an SCCS file
|
|
The get command generates an ASCII text file from each named SCCS file according to the specifications given by its option arguments, which begin with -. The arguments can be specified in any order, but all option arguments apply to all named SCCS files. If a directory is named, get behaves as if each file in the directory was specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component o... |
|
getaccess(1) -- list access rights to file(s)
|
|
getaccess lists for the specified files the effective access rights of the caller (that is, for their effective user ID, effective group ID, and supplementary groups list). By default, the command prints a symbolic representation of the user's access rights to the named file: r or - for read/no read, w or - for write/no write, and x or - for execute/no execute (for directories, search/no search),... |
|
getacl(1) -- list access control lists (ACLs) for files (JFS File Systems only)
|
|
For each argument that is a regular file, special file, or named pipe, getacl displays the owner, group, and the Access Control List (ACL). For each directory argument, getacl displays the owner, group, and the ACL and/or the default ACL. Only directories contain default ACLs. With the -a option specified, the filename, owner, group, and the ACL of the file will be displayed. With the -d option sp... |
|
getcellname(1m) -- Gets the primary name of the cell
|
|
The getcellname command prints the primary name of a cell to standard output. By default, this command returns the name of the local cell. Use the host argument to return the name of a cell on a remote host. If the command fails, it prints an error message to standard error. |
|
getconf(1) -- get system configuration values
|
|
The getconf command provides an interface to the confstr(3C), pathconf(2), and sysconf(2) library routines and system calls. The system_var argument specifies the configuration value desired in confstr(), pathconf(), or sysconf(). Use the first synopsis form, for inquiries involving confstr(), or sysconf() (in the first table below). Use the second synopsis form, for inquiries involving pathconf()... |
|
getext(1m) -- get VxFS extent attributes
|
|
getext displays extent attribute information associated with a set of files. |
|
getip(1m) -- Gets a host's IP address
|
|
The getip command prints the IP address of the machine indicated in the host argument. A machine may have more than one IP address associated with it; if so, getip prints one of the addresses. If the command fails, it returns a status of 1. |
|
getmemwindow(1m) -- extracts window ids of user processes from /etc/services.window
|
|
getmemwindow is the command used to extract window ids of user processes from the /etc/services.window file. User applications are encouraged to place a unique string defining an application and its associated window id in the /etc/services.window file and then extract that window id using the getmemwindow command. This allows for changing the application window id in one central location, rather ... |
|
getopt(1) -- parse command options
|
|
getopt is used to break up options in command lines for easy parsing by shell procedures and to check for legal options. optstring is a string of recognized option letters (see getopt(3C)). If a letter is followed by a colon, the option is expected to have an argument which may or may not be separated from it by white space. The positional parameters ($1 $2 ...) of the shell are reset so that each... |
|
getopts(1) -- parse utility (command) options
|
|
getopts is used to retrieve options and option-arguments from a list of parameters. Each time it is invoked, getopts places the value of the next option in the shell variable specified by the name operand and the index of the next argument to be processed in the shell variable OPTIND. Whenever the shell is invoked, OPTIND is initialized to 1. When the option requires an option-argument, getopts pl... |
|
getprivgrp(1) -- get special attributes for group
|
|
getprivgrp lists the access privileges of privileged groups set by setprivgrp (see setprivgrp(1M)). If group_name is supplied, access privileges are listed for that group only. If the caller is not a member of group_name, no information is displayed. If -g is used, getprivgrp lists access privileges that have been granted to all groups. Otherwise, access privileges are listed for all privileged gr... |
|
getprpw(1m) -- display protected password database
|
|
getprpw displays the user's protected password database settings. This command is available only to the superuser in a trusted system. Normally it is only used via SAM, see sam(1M). The database contains information for both local and NIS+ users. However, some NIS+ information is kept on the master. Since a user may be both local and NIS+, getprpw uses the nsswitch.conf(4) default if neither -l n... |
|
getty(1m) -- set terminal type, modes, speed, and line discipline
|
|
getty is a program that is invoked by init(1M). It is the second process in the series, (init-getty-login-shell) that ultimately connects a user with the HP-UX system. Initially, if /etc/issue exists, getty prints its contents to the user's terminal, followed by the login message field for the entry it is using from /etc/gettydefs. getty reads the user's login name and invokes the login(1) comma... |
|
getx25(1m) -- get x25 line
|
|
The uucp commands, including getx25, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. getx25 is functionally very similar to getty (see getty(1M)) but is used only for incoming lines that are connected to an X.25 PAD. It performs special functions such as setting up an initial PAD configuration. It also logs the number of the caller in /var/uucp/.Log/LOGX25. The third parameter is the ... |
|
gprof(1) -- display call graph profile data
|
|
The gprof command produces an execution profile of C++, C and FORTRAN programs. The effect of called routines is incorporated into the profile of each caller. Profile data is taken from the call graph profile file (gmon.out default) that is created by programs compiled with the -G option of aCC, cc, and f90. The -G option also links in versions of the library routines that are compiled for profili... |
|
grep(1) -- search a file for a pattern
|
|
The grep command searches the input text files (standard input default) for lines matching a pattern. Normally, each line found is copied to the standard output. grep supports the Basic Regular Expression syntax (see regexp(5)). The -E option (egrep) supports Extended Regular Expression (ERE) syntax (see regexp(5)). The -F option (fgrep) searches for fixed strings using the fast Boyer-Moore string... |
|
grget(1) -- get password and group information
|
|
pwget and grget locate and display information from /etc/passwd and /etc/group. The standard output of pwget contains lines of colon-separated password information whose format is the same as that used in the /etc/passwd file (see passwd(4)). The standard output of grget contains lines of colon-separated group information whose format is the same as that used in the /etc/group file (see group(4)).... |
|
groupadd(1m) -- add a new group to the system
|
|
The groupadd command creates a new group on the system by adding the appropriate entry to the /etc/group file. The groupadd command expects the group argument, which is the name of the new group. The name consists of a string of printable characters that may not include a colon (:) or newline (\n). |
|
groupdel(1m) -- delete a group from the system
|
|
The groupdel command deletes a group from the system by removing the appropriate entry from the /etc/group file. The groupdel command must be used with the group argument. group is the name of the group to be deleted, consisting of a string of printable characters. |
|
groupmod(1m) -- modify a group on the system
|
|
The groupmod command modifies a group on the system by altering the appropriate entry in the /etc/group file. The groupmod command must be used with the group argument, which is the name of the group to be modified. |
|
groups(1) -- show group memberships
|
|
groups shows the groups to which the caller or the optionally specified user belong. If invoked with no arguments, groups prints the current access list returned by getgroups() (see getgroups(2)). Each user belongs to a group specified in the password file /etc/passwd and possibly to other groups as specified in the files /etc/group and /etc/logingroup. A user is granted the permissions of those g... |
|
grpck(1m) -- password/group file checkers
|
|
pwck scans fields in the password and shadow files and reports any inconsistencies to standard error. The checks include validation of the number of fields, login name, user ID, group ID, and whether the login directory and optional program exist. In addition, if the root entry shows a program, it can only be one of: /sbin/sh, /usr/bin/csh, /usr/bin/ksh, or /usr/bin/sh. The criteria for validation... |
|
hashcheck(1) -- find spelling errors
|
|
The spell command collects words from the named files and looks them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes, and/or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no files are named, words are collected from the standard input. The spell command ignores most troff, tbl, and eqn constructio... |
|
hashmake(1) -- find spelling errors
|
|
The spell command collects words from the named files and looks them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes, and/or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no files are named, words are collected from the standard input. The spell command ignores most troff, tbl, and eqn constructio... |
|
head(1) -- give first few lines
|
|
head prints on standard output the first count lines of each of the specified files, or of the standard input. If count is omitted it defaults to 10. If multiple files are specified, head outputs before each file a line of this form: ==> file <== |
|
help(1m) -- Displays help information about dtscp commands.
|
|
The help command displays information about dtscp commands. |
|
host(1) -- DNS lookup utility
|
|
host is a simple utility for performing DNS lookups. It is normally used to convert names to IP addresses and vice versa. When no arguments or options are given, host prints a short summary of its command line arguments and options. |
|
hostname(1) -- set or display name of current host system
|
|
The hostname command displays the name of the current host, as given in the gethostname() system call (see gethostname(2)). Users who have appropriate privileges can set the hostname by giving the argument name_of_host; this is usually done in the startup script /sbin/init.d/hostname. The name_of_host argument is restricted to MAXHOSTNAMELEN characters as defined in . The system might... |
|
hosts_to_na(1m) -- translate host table to name server file format
|
|
hosts_to_named translates the host table, /etc/hosts, into files that are usable by the name server named(1M). The format of these files is defined in RFC 1035. The files are created in the current directory. Once the host table is translated, the name server files can be maintained directly, or the translation can be repeated after each change to the host table. If a line in the host table contai... |
|
hotplugd(1m) -- PCI I/O hotplug (attention button) events daemon
|
|
The hotplugd daemon handles PCI I/O hotplug (also known as attention button, AB, or doorbell) events that are generated by pressing the attention button corresponding to a PCI I/O slot. Only one attention button event is processed by the system at any point in time. If more than one attention button is pressed, the events are put in a queue within the kernel. This daemon invokes /usr/bin/olrad to ... |
|
hp(1) -- handle special functions of HP2640 and HP2621-series terminals
|
|
hp supports special functions of the Hewlett-Packard HP 2640 and HP 2621 series of terminals, with the primary purpose of producing accurate representations of most nroff output. A typical use is: nroff -h files ... | hp Regardless of the hardware options on a given terminal, hp tries to do sensible things with underlining and reverse line-feeds. If the terminal has the ``display enhancements'' ... |
|
hp-mc680x0(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp-pa(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp9000s200(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp9000s300(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp9000s400(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp9000s500(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp9000s700(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hp9000s800(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
hpterm(1) -- X window system Hewlett-Packard terminal emulator.
|
|
The hpterm program is a terminal emulator for the X Window system. It provides a Term0 compatible terminal for programs that can't use the window system directly. It also emulates many of the block mode features of HP terminals. Refer to the WARNINGS section below for additional information about running block mode applications. |
|
hpux(1m) -- HP-UX bootstrap
|
|
hpux is the HP-UX specific secondary system loader (SSL) utility for bootstrap (see isl(1M) for the initial system loader). It supports the operations summarized below, as shown in the SYNOPSIS and detailed later in this DESCRIPTION. boot Loads an object file from an HP-UX file system or raw device and transfers control to the loaded image. (Note, the boot operation is position dependent). ll List... |
|
hpux.efi(1m) -- HP-UX bootstrap for Itanium-based systems
|
|
hpux.efi is the HP-UX-specific operating system loader utility for bootstrap. It is a native efi(4) application that can be run on the Itanium-based platform. hpux.efi supports the following options: -V Display the release and version numbers of the hpux utility. -tm Boot the system in tunable maintenance mode, also known as "failsafe boot" mode. This option will disregard the tunable settings a... |
|
hyphen(1) -- find hyphenated words
|
|
hyphen finds all the hyphenated words ending lines in files and prints them on the standard output. If no arguments are given, the standard input is used; thus, hyphen can be used as a filter. |
|
icodd(1m) -- instant Capacity on Demand (iCOD) daemon
|
|
icodd is installed and started as part of the iCOD software on all potential iCOD systems, and re-spawns itself if killed. Note that other iCOD commands fail if this daemon is not running because the operations this daemon performs are vital in keeping the complex wide view of the iCOD state current. The following entry is added to /etc/inittab (at the bottom) in order to have icodd start and re-s... |
|
icod_modify(1m) -- Activate and deactivate processors. Specify system
|
|
Use icod_modify to activate or deactivate processors, specify system contact or iCOD "from" e-mail address, apply codewords, change the system identifier, and change iCOD configuration information. icod_modify does not allow the activation of unlicensed iCOD components. Additional components are licensed after HP receives payment of an enablement fee (for the component) and the application of a ... |
|
icod_notify(1m) -- Test e-mail connectivity to HP for instant Capacity on
|
|
When specifying reply_address, icod_notify sends an asset report via e-mail to HP, root, and the specified e-mail address. Confirmation e-mail is sent from HP to the specified reply e-mail address indicating that HP received the asset report e-mail. For detailed information on e-mail configuration and requirements, see the iCOD User's Guide located at /usr/share/doc/icodUserGuide.pdf. |
|
icod_stat(1m) -- Display instant Capacity on Demand (iCOD) status and system information.
|
|
The icod_stat command displays the status and system information on an iCOD system. For further information see the iCOD User's Guide located at /usr/share/doc/icodUserGuide.pdf. If no options are specified icod_stat displays: Software version: This field displays the version of the iCOD client software. System ID: This field displays the user-specified system identifier that the iCOD system uses... |
|
iconv(1) -- code set conversion
|
|
iconv converts the encoding of characters in the input files from the fromcode code set to the tocode code set, and writes the results on standard output. If no input files are given, iconv reads from standard input. If - appears as an input file name, iconv reads standard input at that point. -- can be used to delimit the end of options (see getopt(3C)). |
|
id(1) -- print user and group IDs and names
|
|
The id command writes a message to standard output, giving the user and group IDs and names for the process. If the effective and real IDs are different, both are printed. If the process has supplementary group affiliations (see groups(1)), the supplementary group affiliations are also written. If the user operand is specified, the user and group IDs of the selected user are written. In this case,... |
|
ident(1) -- identify files in RCS
|
|
ident searches the named files for all occurrences of the pattern $keyword:...keyword:...:...$, where keyword is one of the following: Author Log Date Revision Header Source Locker State These patterns are normally inserted automatically by the RCS co command, but can also be inserted manually (see co(1)). ident works on text files as well as object files. For example, if the C program in file f.c... |
|
identd(1m) -- TCP/IP IDENT protocol server
|
|
identd is a server which implements the TCP/IP proposed standard IDENT user identification protocol as specified in the RFC 1413 document. identd operates by looking up specific TCP/IP connections and returning the user name of the process owning the connection. |
|
idisk(1m) -- create partitions for Itanium(R)-based system's disks
|
|
idisk creates operating system partitions on a disk that is to be used for Itanium-based systems. It reads in the partition information from a data file that may be specified in the command string or redirected from stdin. By default, idisk operates in read-only mode and displays the partition information that is currently on the disk. To write new partition information on the disk the user must s... |
|
idlookup(1) -- identify the user of a particular TCP connection
|
|
idlookup can be used to identify the user at the remote end of a TCP connection, assuming the host at the other end is running an Identification Server. host-or-ip-number is the name of the host at the other end of the connection, or its IP address. local-port and foreign-port are the port numbers, or service names of the ports at the two ends of the connection. |
|
ied(1) -- input editor and command history for interactive programs
|
|
ied is a utility command that is intended to act as an interface between the user and an interactive program such as bc, bs, or a shell, providing most of the line editing and history functionality found in the Korn shell. ied interprets the utility name as the command to be executed, and passes arguments as the arguments to the utility. Subsequent input to utility then has access to editing and h... |
|
ifconfig(1m) -- configure network interface parameters
|
|
The first form of the ifconfig command assigns an address to a network interface and/or configures network interface parameters. ifconfig must be used at boot time to define the network address of each interface present on a machine. It can also be used at other times to redefine an interface's address or other operating parameters. If the address_family is not specified, the address family defau... |
|
ilogind(1m) -- Interface for libpam_dce.sl and libnss_dce.sl with DCE
|
|
ilogind is an interface daemon for libpma_dce.sl (see pam_dce(5)),and libnss_dce.sl with DCE (/opt/dce/sbin/ilogind). ilogind starts up when integrated login is activated using the auth.adm utility. See auth.adm(5). For the services in /etc/pam.conf file that have libpam_dce.sl as the module to provide any of the authentication, account, management, session and password services libpam_dce.sl send... |
|
inetd(1m) -- Internet services daemon
|
|
The inetd daemon is the Internet superserver, which invokes Internet server processes as needed. It must be running before other hosts can connect to the local host through ftp, rcp, remsh, rlogin, and telnet. The inetd daemon also supports services based on the Remote Procedure Call (RPC) protocol (NFS), such as rwalld and rusersd. If RPC servers are started by inetd, the portmap server (see port... |
|
inetsvcs_sec(1m) -- enable/disable secure internet services
|
|
/usr/sbin/inetsvcs_sec is used to enable or disable secure internet services (SIS) by updating inetsvcs.conf(4) with the appropriate entry. SIS provide network authentication when used in conjunction with HP DCE security services, the HP Praesidium/Security Server, or other software products that provide a Kerberos V5 Network Authentication Services environment. |
|
infocmp(1m) -- compare or print out terminfo descriptions
|
|
infocmp can be used to compare a binary terminfo entry with other terminfo entries, rewrite a terminfo description to take advantage of the use= terminfo field, or print out a terminfo description from the binary file (term) in a variety of formats. In all cases, the boolean fields will be printed first, followed by the numeric fields, followed by the string fields. |
|
init(1m) -- process control initialization
|
|
The init daemon and command is a general process spawner. Its primary role is to create processes from a script stored in the file /etc/inittab (see inittab(4)). This file usually has init spawn a getty on each line where users can log in. It also controls autonomous processes required by any particular system. At boot time, init is started as a system daemon. While the system is running, a user-s... |
|
insertmsg(1) -- use findstr(1) output to insert calls to catgets(3C)
|
|
insertmsg examines the file stringlist, which is assumed to be the output of findstr after subsequent editing to remove any strings that do not need to be localized (see findstr(1)). If the -h option is specified, insertmsg places the following lines at the beginning of each file named in stringlist: #ifndef NLS #define catgets(i,sn,mn,s) (s) #else NLS #define NL_SETN number #include ... |
|
insf(1m) -- install special (device) files
|
|
The insf command installs special files in the devices directory, normally /dev. If required, insf creates any subdirectories that are defined for the resulting special file. If no options are specified, special files are created for all new devices in the system. New devices are those devices for which no special files have been previously created. A subset of the new devices can be selected with... |
|
install(1m) -- install commands
|
|
install is a command most commonly used in ``makefiles'' (see make(1)) to install a file (updated target file) in a specific place within a file system. Each file is installed by copying it into the appropriate directory, thereby retaining the mode and owner of the original command. The program prints messages telling the user exactly what files it is replacing or creating and where they are goi... |
|
intctl(1m) -- manage the interrupt configuration of the system
|
|
A processor receives an interrupt when either the processor's interrupt pin is asserted (for line based interrupts) or if a processor detects an interrupt message bus transaction on the system bus (for transaction based interrupts). Interrupts from the interface cards can be line or transaction based. Interrupts are routed to different processors during boot time. The intctl command is a tool tha... |
|
intro(1m) -- introduction to system maintenance commands and application programs
|
|
This section describes commands that are used chiefly for system maintenance and administration purposes. The commands in this section should be used in conjunction with other sections of this manual, as well as the HP-UX System Administration manuals for your system. |
|
intro(1) -- introduction to command utilities and application programs
|
|
This section describes commands accessible by users, as opposed to system calls in Section (2) or library routines in Section (3), which are accessible by user programs. |
|
inv(1) -- make unprintable and non-ASCII characters in a file visible or invisible
|
|
vis reads characters from each file in sequence and writes them to the standard output, converting those that are not printable or not ASCII into a visible form. inv performs the inverse function, reading printable characters from each file, returning them to non-printable or non-ASCII form, if appropriate, then writing them to standard output; Non-printable ASCII characters are represented using ... |
|
ioinit(1m) -- test and maintain consistency between the kernel I/O data structures and /etc/ioconfig
|
|
The ioinit command is invoked by the init process when the system is booted, based on the ioin entry in /etc/inittab: ioin::sysinit:/sbin/ioinitrc > /dev/console 2>&1 where ioinitrc is a script to invoke ioinit with the -i and -r options. Given the -i option, ioinit checks consistency between the kernel I/O data structures (initialized with /stand/ioconfig, which is accessible for NFS-diskless sup... |
|
ioscan(1m) -- scan I/O system
|
|
ioscan scans system hardware, usable I/O system devices, or kernel I/O system data structures as appropriate, and lists the results. For each hardware module on the system, ioscan displays by default the hardware path to the hardware module, the class of the hardware module, and a brief description. By default, ioscan scans the system and lists all reportable hardware found. The types of hardware ... |
|
iostat(1) -- report I/O statistics
|
|
iostat iteratively reports I/O statistics for each active disk on the system. Disk data is arranged in a four-column format: Column Heading Interpretation device Device name bps Kilobytes transferred per second sps Number of seeks per second msps Milliseconds per average seek If two or more disks are present, data is presented on successive lines for each disk. To compute this information, seeks, ... |
|
ipcrm(1) -- remove a message queue, semaphore set, or shared memory identifier
|
|
The ipcrm command removes one or more specified message queue, semaphore set, or shared memory identifiers. |
|
ipcs(1) -- report status of interprocess communication facilities
|
|
ipcs displays certain information about active interprocess communication facilities. With no options, ipcs displays information in short format for the message queues, shared memory segments, and semaphores that are currently active in the system. |
|
isl(1m) -- initial system loader
|
|
isl implements the operating system independent portion of the bootstrap process. It is loaded and executed after self-test and initialization have completed successfully. The processor contains special purpose memory for maintaining critical configuration related parameters (e.g. Primary Boot, Alternate Boot, and Console Paths). Two forms of memory are supported: Stable Storage and Non-Volatile M... |
|
itemap(1m) -- load an ITE (Internal Terminal Emulator) keyboard mapping.
|
|
The itemap command loads a keyboard mapping into the ITE (the graphics console driver), or displays ITE keyboard mappings. itemap is run by /etc/bcheckrc automatically. It is not usually explicitly invoked by the user. |
|
jobs(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
join(1) -- relational database operator
|
|
join forms, on the standard output, a join of the two relations specified by the lines of file1 and file2. If file1 or file2 is -, the standard input is used. file1 and file2 must be sorted in increasing collating sequence (see Environment Variables below) on the fields on which they are to be joined; normally the first in each line. The output contains one line for each pair of lines in file1 and... |
|
kcalarm(1m) -- add, delete, or list kernel tunable alarms, as well as turn kernel tunable monitoring on and off.
|
|
kcalarm is used to manage kernel tunable alarms and monitors; alarms and monitors are implemented in the kcmond(1M) daemon. Users can create, modify, delete, and list kernel tunable alarms. Alarms send a notification though various notification targets when a kernel tunable crosses a specified percentage threshold of its current setting. Monitoring is the process of collecting historical tunable d... |
|
kclog(1m) -- manage kernel configuration log file
|
|
kclog is the administrative command for the HP-UX kernel configuration log file. The log file is automatically maintained by all of the kernel configuration commands (kconfig(1M), kcmodule(1M), and kctune(1M)). Any change to any kernel configuration gets logged to this log file, which is located at /var/adm/kc.log. Note that this file is a plain text file which can be viewed and manipulated using ... |
|
kcmodule(1m) -- manage kernel modules and subsystems
|
|
kcmodule is the administrative command for HP-UX kernel modules. It gives information about kernel modules and their usage, and makes changes to their usage. This command can work with any saved kernel configuration, or with the currently running kernel configuration, depending on the use of the -c flag (see below). By default, changes to the currently running kernel configuration are applied imme... |
|
kcmond(1m) -- EMS Kernel Tunable Monitor daemon
|
|
The kcmond daemon monitors the consumption of kernel resources. It is an Event Monitoring Services (EMS - see ems(5)) monitor. The data collected by kcusage can be displayed by kcusage(1M). kcmond includes a resource dictionary file (/etc/opt/resmon/dictionary/kcmond_01.dict) which is used by EMS to identify resources for monitoring. Users can control the monitoring of each kernel tunable by setti... |
|
kconfig(1m) -- manage kernel configurations
|
|
kconfig is the administrative command for HP-UX kernel configurations. In the first form, kconfig will give summary information about the currently running kernel configuration. In the second form, kconfig will give information about saved kernel configurations. (If configuration names are listed on the command line, the output is restricted to those configurations.) In the other forms, kconfig su... |
|
kcpath(1m) -- print kernel configuration pathnames
|
|
kcpath prints the pathnames associated with a kernel configuration. If config is specified, kcpath gives information about the saved kernel configuration named config. Otherwise, kcpath gives information about the currently running configuration. See kconfig(5) for information on saved kernel configurations. |
|
kctune(1m) -- manage kernel tunable parameters
|
|
kctune is the administrative command for HP-UX kernel tunable parameters. It gives information about tunable parameters and their values, and makes changes to tunable values. This command can work with any saved kernel configuration, or with the currently running kernel configuration, depending on the use of the -c flag (see below). By default, changes to the currently running kernel configuration... |
|
kcusage(1m) -- query the usage of kernel resources
|
|
kcusage is used to query the usage of kernel resources controlled by various kernel tunables. The full list of tunables are given below, along with some indication on how to interpret the data on each tunable. When none of the options h, d, m, or y are given, data is displayed that reflects the currently running system. When any of these options are given, then historical data is displayed. When t... |
|
kcweb(1m) -- start the HP-UX kernel configuration tool (a Web interface)
|
|
The HP-UX Kernel Configuration tool (kcweb) user interface uses a Web browser. Executing the kcweb command without any options performs the following tasks: + create server certificates if needed + start the management Web server if it is not running + start a Web client (browser) An attempt will be made to connect to a Mozilla/Netscape Web browser running on the X server defined by the DISPLAY en... |
|
kdestroy(1m) -- Destroys a principal's login context and associated credentials
|
|
The kdestroy command destroys a principal's login context and the principal's credentials. Until the credentials are reestablished by either executing the dce_login command or the kinit command, the principal and any processes created by the principal will be limited to unauthenticated access. Specify the expiration period in the following format: {num{interval}}... where: num A number that spec... |
|
kdestroy(1) -- destroy Kerberos tickets
|
|
The kdestroy utility destroys the user's active Kerberos authorization tickets by writing zeros to the specified credentials cache that contains them. If the credentials cache is not specified, the default credentials cache is destroyed. |
|
kermit(1) -- C-Kermit 8.0 communications software for serial and network connections: modem dialing, file transfer and mana
|
|
Kermit is a family of file transfer, management, and communication software programs from the Kermit Project at Columbia University available for most computers and operating systems. The version of Kermit for Hewlett-Packard HP-UX, called C-Kermit, supports both serial connections (direct or dialed) and TCP/IP connections. C-Kermit can be thought of as a user-friendly and powerful alternative to ... |
|
keyenvoy(1m) -- talk to keyserver
|
|
keyenvoy is a setuid root process that is used by some RPC programs to intermediate between a user process and the keyserv process, keyserv(1M), which will not talk to anything but a root process. This program cannot be run interactively. |
|
keylogin(1) -- decrypt and store secret key with keyserv
|
|
The keylogin command prompts for a password, and uses it to decrypt the user's secret key. The key may be found in the /etc/publickey file (see publickey(4)) or the NIS map ``publickey.byname'' or the NIS+ table ``cred.org_dir'' in the user's home domain. The sources and their lookup order are specified in the /etc/nsswitch.conf file (see nsswitch.conf(4)). Once decrypted, the user's secret... |
|
keylogout(1) -- delete stored secret key with keyserv
|
|
keylogout deletes the key stored by the key server process keyserv(1M). Further access to the key is revoked; however, current session keys may remain valid until they expire or are refreshed. Deleting the keys stored by keyserv will cause any background jobs or scheduled at(1) jobs that need secure RPC services to fail. Since only one copy of the key is kept on a machine, it is a bad idea to plac... |
|
keyserv(1m) -- server for storing private encryption keys
|
|
keyserv is a daemon that is used for storing the private encryption keys of each user logged into the system. These encryption keys are used for accessing secure network services such as NIS+. Normally, root's key is read from the file /etc/.rootkey when the daemon is started. This is useful during power-fail reboots when no one is around to type a password. |
|
keysh(1) -- context-sensitive softkey shell
|
|
keysh is an extension of the standard Korn-shell (for a description of the basic Korn-shell functionality, see ksh(1)). keysh uses hierarchical softkey menus and context-sensitive help to aid users in building command-lines, combining the power of the Kornshell with the ease-of-use of a menu system. And keysh is entirely data-driven, allowing its menus and help to be easily extended as needed. Not... |
|
kill(1) -- send a signal to a process; terminate a process
|
|
The kill command sends a signal to each process specified by a pid process identifier. The default signal is SIGTERM, which normally terminates processes that do not trap or ignore the signal. |
|
killall(1m) -- kill all active processes
|
|
killall is a procedure used by /usr/sbin/shutdown to kill all active processes not directly related to the shutdown procedure. killall is chiefly used to terminate all processes with open files so that the mounted file systems are no longer busy and can be unmounted. killall sends the specified signal to all user processes in the system, with the following exceptions: the init process; all process... |
|
killsm(1m) -- kill the sendmail daemon
|
|
killsm reads the pid file to get the pid number of the currently running sendmail daemon, and then kills that daemon. The pid file is specified using the PidFile option in the /etc/mail/sendmail.cf file. If this option is not set, sendmail uses /etc/mail/sendmail.pid file as the default pid file. If the sendmail daemon is not killed instantaneously, killsm will not exit until the sendmail daemon i... |
|
kinit(1m) -- Obtains and caches ticket-granting ticket
|
|
The kinit command can be used to refresh a DCE credentials cache. When you invoke kinit, it prompts for your password. The ticket lifetime and renewable lifetime are set in the following format: {num {interval}}... where: num A number that specifies the number of the interval; interval can be specified by the following: + w - weeks + d - days + h - hours + m - minutes + s - seconds For example, to... |
|
kinit(1) -- obtain and cache the Kerberos ticket-granting ticket
|
|
kinit obtains and caches an initial ticket-granting ticket for the principal. |
|
kks(1) -- Kana Kanji conversion server
|
|
kks is a Kana Kanji conversion server which communicates with Kana Kanji conversion library. kks uses /usr/lib/asx/dict/japanese/j1_mphrase as the system dictionary. If a port-number is specified, kks uses the port to provide its service. If no port-number is specified, kks searches /etc/services and gets the value of nuekks as the port-number to be used. kks writes host-name and port-number into ... |
|
kkstat(1) -- Kana Kanji Conversion Server information
|
|
kkstat displays kks's information. kkstat is also used to stop Kana Kanji Conversion Server kks. |
|
kl(1m) -- control kernel logging
|
|
The kl command controls the operation of the Kernel Logging facility. Kernel Logging is a high-availability feature that gives system administrators the ability to collect the information necessary to diagnose problems with the HP-UX kernel while the system is running. kl is used to specify the levels of events to be logged and the kernel subsystems that will write messages to memory or disk. kl a... |
|
klist(1m) -- Lists cached tickets
|
|
The klist command lists the primary principal and tickets held in the default credentials cache, or in the cache identified by cachename if the -c option is used. The name of the default credentials cache can vary between systems. However, if the KRB5CCNAME environment variable is set, its value is used to name the default cache. If it is not set, the form of the name is /tmp/krb5cc_[unix_id], whe... |
|
klist(1) -- list cached Kerberos tickets
|
|
klist lists the Kerberos principal and Kerberos tickets held in a credentials cache, or the keys held in a keytab file. |
|
kmpath(1m) -- retrieve kernel name and associated kernel configuration information
|
|
The kmpath command is obsolete and superseded by the kcpat . The kmpath command will be removed in a future release of HP-UX. The behavior of some of kmpath's options have changed and they are noted in the appropriate sections below. kmpath retrieves the main kernel file name and path information of the currently running kernel. kmpath also retrieves the configuration directory of the current or ... |
|
kmtune(1m) -- query, set, or reset system parameters
|
|
kmtune is an obsolete command that is replaced by kctune(1M). Users are encouraged to migrate to kctune(1M). kmtune will be removed in a future release of HP-UX. The behavior of some of kmtune's options have changed and they are noted in the appropriate sections below. kmtune is used to query, set, or reset system parameters. kmtune displays the planned values of all system parameters when used w... |
|
kpasswd(1) -- change a user's Kerberos password
|
|
The kpasswd command is used to change a Kerberos principal's password. kpasswd prompts for the current Kerberos password, which is used to obtain a changepw ticket from the KDC (Key Distribution Center) for the user's Kerberos realm. If kpasswd successfully obtains the changepw ticket, the user is prompted twice for the new password, and the password is changed. If the principal is governed by a... |
|
krsd(1m) -- kernel registry services daemon
|
|
krsd saves data, flagged as persistent in the core kernel KRS tree, to files on disk. These files are read when the system is booted, in order to restore the aforementioned persistent data. When running in daemon mode, krsd sleeps, waking periodically to check if any persistent data have changed since the last save. If persistent data have changed, the new state of the data is saved to disk. Other... |
|
krs_flush(1m) -- flush kernel registry services data to disk
|
|
krs_flush causes persistent, in core, kernel KRS data to be flushed to files on disk. This command signals the KRS daemon, krsd(1M), causing it to save the KRS data to disk. The data will only be saved if it has changed from the time of the last save. |
|
ksh(1) -- shell, the standard/restricted command programming language
|
|
ksh is a command programming language that executes commands read from a terminal or a file. rksh is a restricted version of the command interpreter ksh, used to set up login names and execution environments whose capabilities are more controlled than those of the standard shell. See Invoking ksh and Special Commands sections later in this entry for details about command line options and arguments... |
|
ktutil(1) -- Kerberos keytab file maintenance utility
|
|
The ktutil command invokes a subshell from which an administrator can read, write, or edit entries in a Kerberos V5 keytab or V4 srvtab file. ktutil Commands list Display the current key list. Alias: l read_kt keytab_filename Read the Kerberos V5 keytab file, keytab_filename, into the current key list. Alias: rkt read_st srvtab_filename Read the Kerberos V4 srvtab file, srvtab_filename, into the c... |
|
kvno(1) -- print key version numbers of Kerberos principals
|
|
kvno acquires a service ticket for the specified Kerberos principals and prints out the key version numbers of each principal. |
|
l(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
labelit(1m) -- copy a file system with label checking
|
|
The volcopy command makes a literal copy of the file system using a block size matched to the device. |
|
labelit_hfs(1m) -- copy an HFS file system with label checking
|
|
The volcopy command makes a literal copy of an HFS file system using a block size matched to the device. |
|
labelit_vxfs(1m) -- copy a VxFS file system with label checking
|
|
volcopy makes a literal copy of a VxFS file system using a block size matched to the device. |
|
lanadmin(1m) -- local area network administration program
|
|
The lanadmin program administers and tests the Local Area Network (LAN). For each interface card, it allows you to: + Display and change the station address. + Display and change the 802.5 Source Routing options (RIF). + Display and change the maximum transmission unit (MTU). + Display and change the speed setting. + Clear the network statistics registers to zero. + Display the interface statistic... |
|
landiag(1m) -- local area network administration program
|
|
The lanadmin program administers and tests the Local Area Network (LAN). For each interface card, it allows you to: + Display and change the station address. + Display and change the 802.5 Source Routing options (RIF). + Display and change the maximum transmission unit (MTU). + Display and change the speed setting. + Clear the network statistics registers to zero. + Display the interface statistic... |
|
lanscan(1m) -- display LAN device configuration and status
|
|
lanscan displays the following information about each LAN device and VLAN interface that have software support on the system: + Hardware Path. + Active Station Address (also known as Physical Address). + Card Instance Number. + Hardware State. + Network Interface ``NamePPA''. The Network Interface ``Name'' and the ``PPA'' (Physical Point of Attachment) number are concatenated together. A sin... |
|
last(1) -- indicate last logins of users and ttys
|
|
The last command searches backwards through the file /var/adm/wtmps (which contains a record of all logins and logouts) for information about a user, a tty, or any group of users and ttys. Arguments specify names of users or ttys of interest. The names of ttys can be given fully or abbreviated. For example, last 0 is the same as last tty0. If multiple arguments are given, the information that appl... |
|
lastb(1) -- indicate last logins of users and ttys
|
|
The last command searches backwards through the file /var/adm/wtmps (which contains a record of all logins and logouts) for information about a user, a tty, or any group of users and ttys. Arguments specify names of users or ttys of interest. The names of ttys can be given fully or abbreviated. For example, last 0 is the same as last tty0. If multiple arguments are given, the information that appl... |
|
lastcomm(1) -- show last commands executed in reverse order
|
|
lastcomm gives information on previously executed commands. If no arguments are specified, lastcomm prints information about all the commands recorded in the accounting file, /var/adm/pacct during the current accounting file's lifetime. If called with arguments, only accounting entries with a matching command name, user name, or terminal name are printed. For example, to produce a listing of all ... |
|
lastlogin(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
lbxproxy(1) -- Low BandWidth X proxy
|
|
Applications that would like to take advantage of the Low Bandwidth extension to X (LBX) must make their connections to an lbxproxy. These applications need to know nothing about LBX, they simply connect to the lbxproxy as if were a regular server. The lbxproxy accepts client connections, multiplexes them over a single connection to the X server, and performs various optimizations on the X protoco... |
|
lc(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
ld(1) -- link editor
|
|
ld takes one or more object files or libraries as input and combines them to produce a single (usually executable) file. In doing so it resolves references to external symbols, assigns final addresses to procedures and variables, revises code and data to reflect new addresses (a process called "relocation") and updates symbolic debug information when present in the file. By default, ld produces ... |
|
ldd(1) -- list dynamic dependencies of executable files or shared libraries
|
|
ldd is a command that can list the dynamic dependencies of incomplete executable files or shared libraries. ldd lists verbose information about dynamic dependencies and symbol references. If the object file is an executable file, ldd lists all shared libraries that would be loaded as a result of executing the file. If it is a shared library, ldd lists all shared libraries that would be loaded as a... |
|
ldd_ia(1) -- list dynamic dependencies of executable files or shared libraries
|
|
ldd is a command that can list the dynamic dependencies of incomplete executable files or shared libraries. ldd lists verbose information about dynamic dependencies and symbol references. If the object file is an executable file, ldd lists all shared libraries that would be loaded as a result of executing the file. If it is a shared library, ldd lists all shared libraries that would be loaded as a... |
|
ldd_pa(1) -- list dynamic dependencies of executable files or shared libraries
|
|
ldd is a command that can list the dynamic dependencies of incomplete executable files or shared libraries. ldd lists verbose information about dynamic dependencies and symbol references. If the object file is an executable file, ldd lists all shared libraries that would be loaded as a result of executing the file. If it is a shared library, ldd lists all shared libraries that would be loaded as a... |
|
ld_ia(1) -- link editor
|
|
ld takes one or more object files or libraries as input and combines them to produce a single (usually executable) file. In doing so it resolves references to external symbols, assigns final addresses to procedures and variables, revises code and data to reflect new addresses (a process called "relocation") and updates symbolic debug information when present in the file. By default, ld produces ... |
|
ld_pa(1) -- link editor
|
|
ld takes one or more object files or libraries as input and combines them to produce a single (usually executable) file. In doing so it resolves references to external symbols, assigns final addresses to procedures and variables, revises code and data to reflect new addresses (a process called "relocation"), and updates symbolic debug information when present in the file. By default, ld produces... |
|
leave(1) -- remind you when you have to leave
|
|
The leave command waits until the specified time, then reminds you to leave. You are reminded 5 minutes and 1 minute before the actual time, at the time, and every minute thereafter. When you log off, leave exits. The time of day is in the form hhmm, where hh is a time in hours (which can range from 0 through 11 or 0 through 24 hours), and mm is the number of minutes after the specified hour. If t... |
|
libcadmin(1m) -- libc administration command
|
|
The libcadmin command is used to perform administrative functions for libc. Currently the only function that the command performs is to replace the shared 32-bit PA-RISC2.0 library in /usr/lib/libc.2 with the shared 32-bit PA-RISC1.1 version of that library. There are no required arguments or options used with this command. The /usr/lib/libc.a archive library and the libc.sl symbolic link are unaf... |
|
lifcp(1) -- copy to or from LIF files
|
|
lifcp copies a LIF file to an HP-UX file, an HP-UX file to a LIF file, or a LIF file to another LIF file. It also copies a list of (HPUX/LIF) files to a (LIF/HP-UX) directory. The last name on the argument list is the destination file or directory. Options can be used singly or combined in any order before the file names. The space between option and argument is optional. -Txxx Used only when copy... |
|
lifinit(1) -- write LIF volume header on file
|
|
lifinit writes a LIF volume header on a volume or file. |
|
lifls(1) -- list contents of a LIF directory
|
|
lifls lists the contents of a LIF directory on standard output. The default output format lists file names in multiple columns (similar to ls(1), except unsorted) if standard output is a character special file. If standard output is not a tty device, the output format is one file name per line. name is a path name to an HP-UX file containing a LIF volume and optional file name. If name is a volume... |
|
lifrename(1) -- rename LIF files
|
|
oldfile is a full LIF file specifier (see lif(4) for details) for the file to be renamed (e.g. liffile:A_FILE). newfile is new name to be given to the file (only the file name portion). This operation does not include copy or delete. Old file names must match the name of the file to be renamed, even if that file name is not a legal LIF name. Do not mount the special file while using lifrename. |
|
lifrm(1) -- remove a LIF file
|
|
lifrm removes one or more entries from a LIF volume. File name specifiers are as described in lif(4). Do not mount the special file while using lifrm. |
|
line(1) -- read one line from user input
|
|
line copies one line (up to a new-line) from the standard input and writes it on the standard output. It returns an exit code of 1 on EOF and always prints at least a new-line. It is often used within shell files to read from the user's terminal. |
|
link(1m) -- execute link() and unlink() system calls without error checking
|
|
The link and unlink commands perform their respective system calls (link() or unlink()) on their arguments, abandoning most error checking. These commands can be executed only by users who have appropriate privileges. |
|
linkloop(1m) -- verify LAN connectivity with link-level loopback
|
|
The linkloop command uses IEEE 802.2 link-level test frames to check connectivity within a local area network (LAN). linkaddr is the hardware station address of a remote node. Several addresses can be specified at one time. linkloop tests the connectivity of the local node and the remote node specified by each hardware station address. The hardware station address of a remote node can be found by ... |
|
listusers(1) -- display user login data
|
|
The listusers command displays data concerning user logins. The output shows the user login and the /etc/passwd comment field value (e.g., user name, etc.). The default displays data about all user logins. |
|
list_child(1m) -- Displays a list of all the child pointers whose names match the specified child name
|
|
The list child command displays a list of all the child pointers whose names match the specified child name. The last simple name can contain wildcard characters. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to child pointers whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede and follow the = (equals sign). |
|
list_clearinghouse(1m) -- Displays a list of all the clearinghouses whose names match the specified clearinghouse name
|
|
The list clearinghouse command displays a list of all the clearinghouses whose names match the specified name. The last simple name can contain wildcards. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to clearinghouses whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede and follow the = (equals sign). |
|
list_directory(1m) -- Displays a list of all the directories whose names match the specified directory name
|
|
The list directory command displays a list of all the directories whose names match the specified directory name. The last simple name can contain wildcards. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to directories whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede and follow the = (equals sign). |
|
list_link(1m) -- Displays a list of all the soft links whose names match the link name that you specify
|
|
The list link command displays a list of all the soft links whose names match the link name that you specify. The last simple name can contain wildcard characters. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to soft links whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede and follow the = (equals sign). This command does not list th... |
|
list_object(1m) -- Lists the specifies object entries (including clearinghouse object entries)
|
|
The list object command displays a list of all the object entries (including clearinghouse object entries) whose names match the object entry name that you specify. The last simple name can contain wildcard characters. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to object entries whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede an... |
|
ll(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
ln(1) -- link files and directories
|
|
The ln command links: + file1 to a new or existing new_file, + file1 to a new or existing file named file1 in existing dest_directory, + file1, file2, ... to new or existing files of the same name in existing dest_directory, + directory1, directory2, ... to new directories of the same name in existing dest_directory, + or it creates symbolic links between files or between directories. If links are... |
|
locale(1) -- get locale-specific (NLS) information
|
|
The locale command displays information about the current locale or about available locales. When invoked without arguments, locale displays the name and actual or implied value of each of the locale-related environment variables in the order shown below, one per line: |
|
localedef(1m) -- generate a locale environment
|
|
localedef sets up the language environment for the named locale. localedef reads a locale definition file (see localedef(4) for a detailed description) from standard input (default) or from locale_definition file, creates a locale file with the same name as specified for the locale_name parameter, and optionally installs this locale in the appropriate directory. Installation of public locales (tho... |
|
lock(1) -- reserve a terminal
|
|
lock requests a password from the user, then prints LOCKED on the terminal and refuses to relinquish the terminal until the password is repeated. If the user forgets the password, the only recourse is to log in elsewhere and kill the lock process. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 |
|
lockd(1m) -- network lock daemon
|
|
lockd is an RPC server that processes NFS file locking requests from the local kernel or from another remote lock daemon. lockd forwards lock requests for remote data to the server site's lock daemon through the RPC/XDR package (see rpc(3N)). lockd then requests the status monitor daemon, statd for monitor service (see statd(1M)). The reply to the lock request is not sent to the kernel until the ... |
|
logger(1) -- make entries in the system log
|
|
The logger command provides a program interface to the syslog() system log module (see syslog(3C)). A message can be given on the command line, which is logged immediately, or a file is read and each line is logged. If no file or message is specified, the contents of the standard input are logged. |
|
login(1) -- sign on; start terminal session
|
|
The login command is used at the beginning of each terminal session to properly identify a prospective user. login can be invoked as a user command or by the system as an incoming connection is established. login can also be invoked by the system when a previous user shell terminates but the terminal does not disconnect. If login is invoked as a command, it must replace the initial command interpr... |
|
logins(1m) -- display system and user login data
|
|
logins displays data concerning system and user logins. The format and content of the output is controlled by command options and may include: system or user login, user ID number, /etc/passwd comment field value (e.g., user name, etc...), primary group name, primary group ID, supplementary group names, supplementary group IDs, home directory, login shell, user security level, user audit events, a... |
|
logname(1) -- get login name
|
|
logname writes the user's login name to standard output. The login name is equivalent to that returned by getlogin() (see getlogin(3C)). |
|
lorder(1) -- find ordering relation for an object library
|
|
The input consists of one or more object or archive library files (see ar(1)) placed on the command line or read from standard input. The standard output is a list of pairs of object file names, meaning that the first file of the pair refers to external identifiers defined in the second. Output can be processed by tsort to find an ordering of a library suitable for one-pass access by ld (see tsort... |
|
lp(1) -- print/alter/cancel requests on an LP destination
|
|
The lp command queues files for printing. The lpalt command changes information in a queued request. The cancel command deletes a queued request. lp Command The lp command arranges for the named files, file ..., and associated information (collectively called a request) to be queued for output to a destination in the LP (line printer) subsystem. The process is called printing, regardless of the ac... |
|
lpadmin(1m) -- configure the LP spooling system
|
|
lpadmin configures LP spooling systems to describe printers, classes and devices. It is used to add and remove destinations, change membership in classes, change devices for printers, change printer interface programs, and to change the system default destination. lpadmin cannot be used when the LP scheduler, lpsched(1M), is running, except where noted below. Exactly one of the -p, -x or -d option... |
|
lpalt(1) -- print/alter/cancel requests on an LP destination
|
|
The lp command queues files for printing. The lpalt command changes information in a queued request. The cancel command deletes a queued request. lp Command The lp command arranges for the named files, file ..., and associated information (collectively called a request) to be queued for output to a destination in the LP (line printer) subsystem. The process is called printing, regardless of the ac... |
|
lpana(1m) -- display LP spooler performance analysis information
|
|
lpana displays LP spooler performance information, which system administrators can use to optimize the configuration of the entire spooler system. |
|
lpfence(1m) -- start the LP request scheduler,
|
|
lpsched Schedules requests taken by lp(1) for printing on printers. lpsched(1M) is typically invoked in /sbin/rc. This creates a process which runs in the background until lpshut is executed. The activity of the process is recorded in /var/adm/lp/log. lpsched recognizes the following options: -v Write a verbose record of the lpsched process on /var/adm/lp/log. -a Write lpana(1M) logging data on /v... |
|
lpfilter(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
lpmove(1m) -- start the LP request scheduler,
|
|
lpsched Schedules requests taken by lp(1) for printing on printers. lpsched(1M) is typically invoked in /sbin/rc. This creates a process which runs in the background until lpshut is executed. The activity of the process is recorded in /var/adm/lp/log. lpsched recognizes the following options: -v Write a verbose record of the lpsched process on /var/adm/lp/log. -a Write lpana(1M) logging data on /v... |
|
lprpp(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
lpsched(1m) -- start the LP request scheduler,
|
|
lpsched Schedules requests taken by lp(1) for printing on printers. lpsched(1M) is typically invoked in /sbin/rc. This creates a process which runs in the background until lpshut is executed. The activity of the process is recorded in /var/adm/lp/log. lpsched recognizes the following options: -v Write a verbose record of the lpsched process on /var/adm/lp/log. -a Write lpana(1M) logging data on /v... |
|
lpshut(1m) -- start the LP request scheduler,
|
|
lpsched Schedules requests taken by lp(1) for printing on printers. lpsched(1M) is typically invoked in /sbin/rc. This creates a process which runs in the background until lpshut is executed. The activity of the process is recorded in /var/adm/lp/log. lpsched recognizes the following options: -v Write a verbose record of the lpsched process on /var/adm/lp/log. -a Write lpana(1M) logging data on /v... |
|
lpstat(1) -- report status information of the LP subsystem
|
|
The lpstat utility writes to standard output information about the current status of the LP subsystem. If no arguments are given, lpstat writes the status of all requests made to lp by the user that are still in the output queue. |
|
ls(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
lsacl(1) -- list access control lists (ACLs) of files
|
|
lsacl lists access control lists (ACLs) of one or more files in symbolic, ``short'' form, one file's ACL per line of output, followed by the file name; see acl(5) for ACL syntax. |
|
lsdev(1m) -- list device drivers in the system
|
|
The lsdev command lists, one pair per line, the major device numbers and driver names of device drivers configured into the system and available for invocation via special files. A -1 in either the block or character column means that a major number does not exist for that type. If no arguments are specified, lsdev lists all drivers configured into the system. If the -h option is specified, lsdev ... |
|
lsf(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
lsr(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
lssf(1m) -- list a special file
|
|
lssf lists information about a special file. For each special_file name, lssf determines the major number of the special file and whether it is block or character (using stat(2)). It then scans the system for the device that is associated with the special file. When the device is found, the minor number of the special file is decoded. A mnemonic description of the minor number is printed on standa... |
|
lsx(1) -- list contents of directories
|
|
For each directory argument, the ls command lists the contents of the directory. For each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted in ascending collation order by default (see Environment Variables below). When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, bu... |
|
lvchange(1m) -- change LVM logical volume characteristics
|
|
The lvchange command changes certain characteristics of a logical volume. Other characteristics can be changed with the lvextend and lvreduce commands (see lvextend(1M) and lvreduce(1M)). The command-line options specify the type and extent of change. Each current characteristic for a logical volume remains in effect until explicitly changed by the corresponding option. All options take effect imm... |
|
lvcreate(1m) -- create logical volume in LVM volume group
|
|
The lvcreate command creates a new logical volume within the volume group specified by vg_name. Up to 255 logical volumes can be created in one volume group. If you specify the -n lv_name option, a new logical volume is created with that name. Otherwise, a system-generated name of the form lvolN is created, where N is created, where N is the decimal equivalent of the two least significant bytes of... |
|
lvdisplay(1m) -- display information about LVM logical volumes
|
|
The lvdisplay command displays the characteristics and status of each logical volume specified by lv_path. |
|
lvextend(1m) -- increase space, increase mirrors for LVM logical volume
|
|
The lvextend command can increase a logical volume's allocated extents, or increase its number of mirrored copies. Other logical volume characteristics can be modified with the lvchange and lvreduce commands (see lvchang ). To limit the allocation to specific physical volumes, specify the physical volume names as pv_path arguments or specify the physical volume group names as pvg_name arguments. ... |
|
lvlnboot(1m) -- prepare LVM logical volume to be root, boot, primary swap, or dump volume
|
|
The lvlnboot command updates all physical volumes in the volume group so that the logical volume becomes the root, boot, primary swap, or a dump volume when the system is next booted on the volume group. If a nonexistent logical volume is specified, this command fails. If a different logical volume is already linked to the root or primary swap, the command fails. This command should be run in reco... |
|
lvmerge(1m) -- merge two LVM logical volumes into one logical volume
|
|
The lvmerge command merges two logical volumes of the same size. The number of mirrored copies of the dest_lv_path is increased by the number of copies in the src_lv_path. Data previously contained in the dest_lv_path is resynchronized using the data in the src_lv_path. All new data on the dest_lv_path is destroyed. Whenever a mirrored logical volume is split into two logical volumes, a bit map is... |
|
lvmmigrate(1m) -- prepare root file system for migration from partitions to LVM logical volumes
|
|
The lvmmigrate command records the configuration information of the current system in the LIF volume of the boot section for use with a subsequent cold-install process. If there is no LIF volume on the disk, lvmmigrate creates it using lifinit(1), then records the information in a LIF file named CUSTOM. A copy of the LIF file is saved as /tmp/LVMMIGRATE.CFG. The information is also written to file... |
|
lvreduce(1m) -- decrease space allocation or the number of mirror copies of logical volumes
|
|
The lvreduce command reduces the number of logical extents allocated to a logical volume specified by lv_path. The excess physical extents in the logical volume and any mirror copies are deallocated. Alternatively, it reduces the number of mirror copies in the logical volume. The physical extents that comprise the deleted mirror copy or copies are deallocated. If pv_path ... is specified, the mirr... |
|
lvremove(1m) -- remove one or more logical volumes from LVM volume group
|
|
The lvremove command removes each logical volume specified by lv_path .... Logical volumes must be closed before they can be removed. For example, if the logical volume contains a file system, unmount the file system before removing it. |
|
lvrmboot(1m) -- remove LVM logical volume link to root, primary swap, or dump volume
|
|
The lvrmboot command updates all physical volumes contained in the volume group vg_name such that the logical volume is removed as a root, primary swap, or dump volume when the system is next booted on the volume group. |
|
lvsplit(1m) -- split mirrored LVM logical volume into two logical volumes
|
|
The lvsplit command splits a single- or double-mirrored logical volume, lv_path, into two logical volumes. A second logical volume is created containing one copy of the data. The original logical volume is appropriately reset as unmirrored or single-mirrored. If the -s option is specified, the new logical volume name has the form lv_pathsuffix. If -s is not specified, suffix defaults to b, as in l... |
|
lvsync(1m) -- synchronize stale mirrors in LVM logical volumes
|
|
The lvsync command synchronizes the physical extents of each logical volume specified by lv_path. Synchronization occurs only on physical extents that are stale mirrors of the original logical extent. The synchronization process can be time consuming, depending on the hardware characteristics and the amount of data. |
|
lwresd(1m) -- lightweight resolver daemon
|
|
lwresd is the daemon providing name lookup services to clients that use the BIND 9 lightweight resolver library. It is essentially a stripped-down, caching-only name server that answers queries using the BIND 9 lightweight resolver protocol rather than the DNS protocol. lwresd listens for resolver queries on a UDP port on the IPv4 loopback interface, 127.0.0.1. This means that lwresd can only be u... |
|
m4(1) -- macro processor
|
|
m4 is a macro processor intended as a front end for Ratfor, C, and other languages. Each of the argument files is processed in order; if there are no files, or if a file name is -, standard input is read. The processed text is written to standard output. |
|
machid(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
machinfo(1) -- print machine information
|
|
machinfo prints useful debugging information about the machine. The information includes chip stepping, firmware revision, number of CPUs, and amount of memory. Note the CPU-specific data only applies to the processor running the machinfo command. Running the machinfo command on another CPU could result in different CPU-specific information being displayed. Use the mpsched(1) command to force mach... |
|
mail(1) -- send mail to users or read mail
|
|
The mail command, when used without arguments, prints the user's mail, message-by-message, in last-in, first-out order. For each message, mail prints a ? prompt and reads a line from the standard input to determine the disposition of the message. Commands that automatically proceed to the next message exit from mail if mail already on the last message. |
|
mailfrom(1) -- summarize mail folders by subject and sender
|
|
The mailfrom command reads one or more mail folders and outputs one line per message in the form: from [subject] where from is the name of the person the message is from, and subject is the subject of the message, if present. If mailfrom determines that the message is from you, the from portion will read To user, where user is the user the message was sent to. This happens when you receive a copy ... |
|
mailq(1) -- prints the mail queue
|
|
mailq prints a summary of the mail messages queued for future delivery. The first line printed for each message shows the internal identifier used on this host for the message, the size of the message in bytes, the date and time the message was accepted into the queue, and the envelope sender of the message. The second line shows the error message that caused this message to be retained in the que... |
|
mailstats(1) -- print mail traffic statistics
|
|
mailstats reads and interprets the sendmail statistics file, and then prints out the mail traffic statistics. The statistics file is the one set by the StatusFile option in the /etc/mail/sendmail.cf. The default statistics file is /etc/mail/sendmail.st. If the statistics file exists, sendmail collects statistics about your mail traffic and stores them in that file. This file does not grow. Statist... |
|
mailx(1) -- interactive message processing system
|
|
mailx provides a comfortable, flexible environment for sending and receiving messages electronically. When reading mail, mailx provides commands to facilitate saving, deleting, and responding to messages. When sending mail, mailx allows editing, reviewing and other modification of the message as it is created. Incoming mail for each user is stored in a standard file called the system mailbox for t... |
|
make(1) -- maintain, update, and regenerate groups of programs
|
|
Makefile Structure A makefile can contain four different kinds of lines: target lines, shell command lines, macro definitions, and include lines. |
|
makedbm(1m) -- make a Network Information System database
|
|
makedbm generates databases (maps) for the Network Information System (NIS) from infile. A database created by makedbm consists of two files: outfile.pag and .pag and pag and outfile.dir. A .dir. A dir. A makedbm database contains records called dbm records composed of key-value pairs. Each line of infile is converted to a single dbm record; all characters up to the first tab or space form the key... |
|
makekey(1) -- generate encryption key
|
|
makekey improves the usefulness of encryption schemes depending on a key by increasing the amount of time required to search the key space. It reads 10 bytes from its standard input and writes 13 bytes on its standard output. The output depends on the input in a way intended to be difficult to compute (i.e., to require a substantial fraction of a second). The first eight input bytes (the input key... |
|
makemap(1m) -- creates database maps for sendmail
|
|
makemap creates the database maps used by the keyed map lookups in sendmail(1M). It reads input from the standard input and outputs them to the indicated mapname. makemap handles up to three different database formats, selected using the maptype parameter. They may be: dbm DBM format maps. (.pag,.dir) btree B-Tree format maps. (.db) hash Hash format maps. (.db) In all cases, makemap reads lines fr... |
|
man(1) -- find manual information by keywords; print out a manual entry
|
|
man accesses information from the HP-UX manual pages. It can be used to: + List all manual entries whose one-line description contains any of a specified set of keywords. + Display or print one-line descriptions of entries specified by name. + Search on-line manual directories by entry name and display or print the specified entry or entries. + Search a specified on-line manual section (directory)... |
|
map-mbone(1m) -- Multicast Router Connection Mapper
|
|
map-mbone requests the multicast router connection information from the multicast-router, and prints the information to the standard out. map-mbone sends out the ASK_NEIGHBORS igmp message to the multicastrouter. When the multicast-router receives the request, it sends back its configuration information. multicast-router can be either an ip address or a system name. If the multicast-router is not ... |
|
mc(1m) -- media changer manipulation utility
|
|
The mc utility provides users with a command-line interface to send media manipulation commands to an autoloader or media changer device. It takes "element types" as arguments to most of the options. The valid element types (element_types) are: D Specifies a Data Transfer (DT) element. I Specifies an Import/Export (IE) element. M Specifies a Medium Transport (MT) element. S Specifies a Storage (... |
|
mediainit(1) -- initialize disk or partition DDS tape
|
|
mediainit initializes mass storage media by formatting the media, writing and reading test patterns to verify media integrity, then sparing any defective blocks found. This process prepares the disk or tape for error-free operation. Initialization destroys all existing user data in the area being initialized. mediainit can also used for partitioning DDS tape media. See the -p option below for furt... |
|
memlogd(1m) -- Support Tools Manager memory logging daemon
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) uses a memory logging daemon ( memlogd ) to periodically poll main memory for single bit errors, and log them to the memory log file ( memlog ). memlogd is launched automatically at boot by the STM daemon, diagmond. The User Interface, xstm , mstm , or cstm , Daemon commands can also be used to launch the daemon as well as shut it down and view the daemon's activit... |
|
merge(1) -- three-way file merge
|
|
merge combines two files that are revisions of a single original file. The original file is file2, and the revised files are file1 and file3. merge identifies all changes that lead from file2 to file3 and from file2 to file1, then deposits the merged text into file1. If the -p option is used, the result goes to standard output instead of file1. An overlap occurs if both file1 and file3 have change... |
|
mesg(1) -- permit or deny messages to terminal
|
|
The command form mesg [-] n forbids messages via write by revoking write permission to users without appropriate privilege on the user's terminal (see write(1)). The command form mesg [-] g reinstates permission so that only legitimate commands (such as write(1)) can be used by other users to send messages. mesg [-] y allows applications such as write or talk to send messages to the user's termi... |
|
mkboot(1m) -- install, update or remove boot programs from disk
|
|
mkboot is used to install or update boot programs on the specified device file. The position on device at which boot programs are installed depends on the disk layout of the device. mkboot examines device to discover the current layout and uses this as the default. If the disk is uninitialized, the default is LVM layout on PA-RISC and Whole Disk on Itanium(R)-based systems. The default can be over... |
|
mkdir(1) -- make a directory
|
|
mkdir creates specified directories in mode 0777 (possibly altered by umask unless specified otherwise by a -m mode option (see umask(1)). Standard entries, . (for the directory itself) and .. (for its parent) are created automatically. If dirname already exists, mkdir exits with a diagnostic message, and the directory is not changed. |
|
mkfifo(1) -- make FIFO (named pipe) special files
|
|
mkfifo creates the FIFO special files named by its operand list. The operands are taken sequentially in the order specified and, if the user has write permission in the appropriate directory, the FIFO is created with permissions 0666 modified by the user's file mode creation mask (see umask(2)). The specific actions performed are equivalent to calling mkfifo(filename, 0666) for each filename in t... |
|
mkfontdir(1) -- create an index of X font files in a directory
|
|
For each directory argument, mkfontdir reads all of the font files in the directory searching for properties named "FONT", or (failing that) the name of the file stripped of its suffix. These are converted to lower case and used as font names, and, along with the name of the font file, are written out to the file "fonts.dir" in the directory. The X server and font server use "fonts.dir" to f... |
|
mkfs(1m) -- construct a file system (generic)
|
|
The mkfs command creates a file system by writing on the special file special. operands are listed on file system specific manual pages (see "SEE ALSO"). |
|
mkfs_hfs(1m) -- construct an HFS file system
|
|
The mkfs command constructs an HFS file system by writing on the special file special. The mkfs command builds the file system with a root directory and a lost+found directory (see fsck_hfs(1M)). The FS_CLEAN magic number for the file system is stored in the superblock. The mkfs command creates the file system with a rotational delay value of zero (see tunefs(1M)). |
|
mkfs_vxfs(1m) -- construct a VxFS file system
|
|
mkfs creates a VxFS file system by writing on the special device file, unless either the -o N or -m option is specified. special must be the first argument on the command line after the options are given. The file system is created based on the options and size specified on the command line. The numeric size specifies the number of sectors in the file system. By default, size is specified in units... |
|
mklost+foun(1m) -- make a lost+found directory for fsck(1M)
|
|
The mklost+found command creates a directory named lost+found in the current directory. It also creates several empty files which are then removed to provide empty slots for the fsck command (see fsck(1M)). For an HFS file system, the mklost+found command is not normally needed since the mkfs command automatically creates the lost+found directory when a new file system is created (see mkfs(1M)). |
|
mkmf(1) -- make a makefile
|
|
The mkmf command creates a makefile that informs the make command how to construct and maintain programs and libraries (see make(1)). After gathering up all source code file names in the current working directory and inserting them into the makefile, mkmf scans source code files for included files and generates dependency information that is appended to the makefile. Source code files are identifi... |
|
mkmsgs(1) -- create message files for use by gettxt()
|
|
The mkmsgs command takes as input a file of localized text strings and generates a message file that can be accessed by the gettxt(3C) routine. textfile is the name of the file that contains the text strings. msgfile is the name of the output message file. mkmsgs appends the suffix .cat to the message file name. The combined length of the file name should be less than 14 bytes for short file name ... |
|
mknod(1m) -- create special files
|
|
The mknod command creates the following types of files: + Character device special file (first SYNOPSIS form), + Block device special file (second SYNOPSIS form), + FIFO file, sometimes called a named pipe (third SYNOPSIS form). name is the path name of the file to be created. The newly created file has a default mode that is readable and writable by all users (0666), but the mode is modified by t... |
|
mksf(1m) -- make a special (device) file
|
|
The mksf command makes a special file in the devices directory, normally /dev, for an existing device, a device that has already been assigned an instance number by the system. The device is specified by supplying some combination of the -C, -d, -H, and -I options. If the options specified match a unique device in the system, mksf creates a special file for that device; otherwise, mksf prints an e... |
|
mkstr(1) -- extract error messages from C source into a file
|
|
mkstr examines a C program and creates a file containing error message strings used by the program. Programs with many error diagnostics can be made much smaller by referring to places in the file, and reduce system overhead in running the program. mkstr processes each of the specified files, placing a revised version of each in a file whose name consists of the specified prefix concatenated in fr... |
|
mktemp(1) -- make a name for a temporary file
|
|
mktemp makes a name that is suitable for use as the pathname of a temporary file, and writes that name to the standard output. The name is chosen such that it does not duplicate the name of an existing file. If the -c option is specified, a zero-length file is created with the generated name. The name generated by mktemp is the concatenation of a directory name, a slash (/), the value of the LOGNA... |
|
mkuupath(1) -- access and manage the pathalias database
|
|
The uucp commands, including uupath and mkuupath, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uupath provides electronic message routing by expanding a simple UUCP address into a full UUCP path (see uucp(1)). For example, host!user could be expanded into !user could be expanded into user could be expanded into hostA!hostB!host!user. !hostB!host!user. hostB!host!user. !host!user. h... |
|
mk_kernel(1m) -- load a kernel configuration from a system file
|
|
mk_kernel reads configuration information from the system file (see system(4)) and applies those changes to a kernel configuration (see kconfig(5)). mk_kernel performs a function similar to that of kconfig -i, but has some semantic differences in order to preserve compatibility with previous releases. mk_kernel will build a new kernel executable only if needed to effect the requested changes. mk_k... |
|
mm(1) -- print documents formatted with the mm macros
|
|
mm can be used to format and print documents using nroff and the mm text-formatting macro package (see nroff(1)). It has options to specify preprocessing by tbl and/or neqn, (see tbl(1) and neqn(1)), and postprocessing by various terminal-oriented output filters. The proper pipelines and the required arguments and flags for nroff and mm are generated, depending on the options selected. osdd is equ... |
|
model(1) -- print hardware model information
|
|
model prints the machine hardware model. model may also display the manufacturer, product names, or other information. |
|
modprpw(1m) -- modify protected password database
|
|
modprpw updates the user's protected password database settings. This command is available only to the superuser in a trusted system. Usage other than via SAM, and/or modifications out of sync with /etc/passwd or NIS+ tables, may result in serious database corruption and the inability to access the system. All updated values may be verified using getprpw(1M). The database contains information for... |
|
monacct(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
more(1) -- file perusal filter for crt viewing
|
|
more is a filter for examining continuous text, one screenful at a time, on a soft-copy terminal. It is quite similar to pg, and is retained primarily for backward compatibility. more normally pauses after each screenful, printing the filename at the bottom of the screen. To display one more line, press . To display another screenful press . Other possibilities are described later. ... |
|
mount(1m) -- mount and unmount file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. directory, which must already exist, will become the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. special and directory must be given as absolute path na... |
|
mountall(1m) -- mount and unmount multiple file systems
|
|
mountall is used to mount file systems according to file_system_table. By default, /etc/fstab is the file_system_table. If a dash (-) is specified, mountall reads file_system_table from the standard input; the standard input must be in the same format as the /etc/fstab. Before each file system is mounted, a check is done using fsck (see fsck(1M)) to ensure that the file system is mountable. If the... |
|
mountd(1m) -- NFS mount request server
|
|
mountd is an RPC server that answers file system mount requests. It reads file /etc/xtab (described in exports(4)) to determine which directories are available to which machines. It also provides information on what file systems are mounted by which clients. This information can be printed using the showmount command (see showmount(1M)). rpc.mountd can be started at boot time by setting the variab... |
|
mount_cachefs(1m) -- mount CacheFS file systems
|
|
The CacheFS-specific version of the mount command mounts a cached file system; if necessary, it NFS-mounts its back file system. It also provides a number of CacheFS-specific options for controlling the caching process. |
|
mount_cdfs(1m) -- mount and unmount CDFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. directory, which must already exist, will become the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. special and directory must be given as absolute path na... |
|
mount_hfs(1m) -- mount and unmount HFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. directory, which must already exist, will become the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. special and directory must be given as absolute path na... |
|
mount_lofs(1m) -- mount and unmount LOFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts LOFS file systems. Only superuser can mount LOFS file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. mount, attaches special_directory, a directory from one of the mounted file systems, to directory, an another directory in one of the mounted file systems. This enables new file systems to be created, which provide access to existing directories or file sy... |
|
mount_nfs(1m) -- mount and unmount NFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches host:path to :path to path to directory. host is a remote system, path is a directory on this remote system and directory is a directory on the local file tree. directory must already exist, be given as an absolute path name and will bec... |
|
mount_vxfs(1m) -- mount and unmount VxFS file systems
|
|
mount attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. (This directory is also known as the mount point). directory, which must already exist, becomes the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. If you omit either special or directory, mount attempts to determine the missing value from an entry in /etc/fstab. mount can be invoked on any removable fi... |
|
mpsched(1) -- control the processor or locality domain on which a specific process executes
|
|
mpsched controls the processor (spu), or locality domain (locality- domain-id) on which a process executes. It can do this by binding a process to a particular processor or locality domain (ldom), or by setting the launch policy for the process. The command can be invoked in five manners. + With -h, it prints a help message. + With -s, it returns the hardware configuration of the system. This incl... |
|
mptconfig(1m) -- configure Ultra320 SCSI controller and A7173A PCI-X Dual Channel Host Bus Adapters
|
|
mptconfig command provides a mechanism to query or change the SCSI settings of a SCSI bus. The mptconfig command only operates with Ultra320 SCSI controllers claimed by the MPT driver. Prerequisites: An effective user ID of 0 (superuser) is required in order to run the mptconfig command. In addition, some of the mptconfig options are intended for use by HP support personnel and require detailed kn... |
|
mptutil(1m) -- Diagnostic utility for Ultra320 SCSI controllers and A7173A
|
|
The mptutil command is a diagnostic tool to be used for Ultra320 SCSI controllers claimed by the MPT driver. This command provides the ability to retrieve various configuration information, perform firmware downloads, issue Task Management commands and read accumulated statistics of the controller and connected target devices. The utility can be used with various options with a specified device fi... |
|
mrinfo(1m) -- Multicast Routing Configuration Information Tool
|
|
mrinfo requests the configuration information from the multicast- ourter, and prints the information to the standard out. multicast- router can be either an IP address or a system name. mrinfo sends out the ASK_NEIGHBORS igmp message to the specified multicast-router, when the router receives the request, it sends back its configuration information. If the multicast-router is not specified, the re... |
|
mrouted(1m) -- IP multicast routing daemon
|
|
The mrouted command is an implementation of the Distance-Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP), an earlier version of which is specified in RFC-1075. It maintains topological knowledge via a distance-vector routing protocol (like RIP, described in RFC-1058), upon which it implements a multicast datagram-forwarding algorithm called Reverse Path Multicasting. mrouted forwards a multicast datagra... |
|
mstm(1m) -- Support Tools Manager
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) provides three interfaces that allow a user access to an underlying toolset, consisting of information modules, firmware update tools, verifiers, diagnostics, exercisers, expert tools, and utilities: XSTM - the graphical interface (for X11-based graphics terminals) MSTM - the menu-based interface (for non-X11-based, non-graphics terminals) CSTM - the command line in... |
|
mt(1) -- magnetic tape manipulating program
|
|
mt is used to give commands to the tape drive. If tapename is not specified, the environment variable TAPE is used; if TAPE is not defined, the default drive is used. mt winds the tape in the requested direction (forward or backward), stopping after the specified count EOF marks or records are passed. If count is not specified, one is assumed. Each EOF mark counts as one record. When winding backw... |
|
mtail(1m) -- tails the mail log file
|
|
mtail displays the last part of the mail log, typically /var/adm/syslog/mail.log. By default, it displays the last 20 lines of this log. |
|
mv(1) -- move or rename files and directories
|
|
The mv command moves: + One file (file1) to a new or existing file (new-file). + One or more files (file1, [file2, ...]) to an existing directory (dest-directory). + One or more directory subtrees (directory1, [directory2, ...]) to a new or existing directory (dest-directory). Moving file1 to new-file is used to rename a file within a directory or to relocate a file within a file system or across ... |
|
mvdir(1m) -- move a directory
|
|
mvdir moves one directory tree into another existing directory (within the same file system), or renames a directory without moving it. dir must be an existing directory. If newdir does not exist but the directory that would contain it does, dir is moved and/or renamed to newdir. Otherwise, newdir must be an existing directory not already containing an entry with the same name as the last pathname... |
|
mwm(1) -- The Motif Window Manager
|
|
mwm is an X Window System client that provides window management functionality and some session management functionality. It provides functions that facilitate control (by the user and the programmer) of elements of window state such as placement, size, icon/normal display, and input-focus ownership. It also provides session management functions such as stopping a client. |
|
naaagt(1m) -- Native Agent Adapter (NAA)
|
|
The Native Agent Adapter (naaagt) allows third-party SNMP agents to work with the HP SNMP Master Agent (snmpdm). The Native Agent Adapter runs as a subagent to the HP SNMP Master Agent. naaagt reads the naaCnf file (see the HP_NAA_CNF environment variable, described below), and it registers each object identifier (OID) with snmpdm. See the naaCnf File Format section. After registration is complete... |
|
named(1m) -- Internet domain name server
|
|
named is the Internet domain name server. See RFC 1033, RFC 1034, and RFC 1035 for more information on the Domain Name System (DNS). Without any arguments, named reads the default configuration file /etc/named.conf, reads any initial data, and listens for queries. named requires superuser privileges to execute. |
|
named-checkconf(1) -- named configuration file syntax checking tool
|
|
named-checkconf is a tool to check the syntax, but not semantics, of the configuration file for named. |
|
named-checkzone(1) -- zone validity checking tool
|
|
named-checkzone is a tool for performing integrity checks on the zone contents. It uses the same integrity checks as named. It mainly checks for syntax errors and also the RR type. |
|
ncheck(1m) -- generate a list of path names from inode numbers
|
|
ncheck, when invoked without arguments, generates a list of path names corresponding to the inode numbers of all files contained on the file systems listed in /etc/fstab. If special is specified, ncheck reports on the special only. Path names generated by ncheck are relative to the given special. |
|
ncheck_hfs(1m) -- generate a list of path names from inode numbers for a HFS file system
|
|
ncheck, when invoked without arguments, generates a list of path names corresponding to the inode numbers of all files contained on the HFS file systems listed in /etc/fstab. If special is specified, ncheck reports on the special only. Path names generated by ncheck are relative to the given special. Names of directory files are followed by /. |
|
ncheck_vxfs(1m) -- generate pathnames from inode numbers for a VxFS file system
|
|
ncheck generates a list of pathnames corresponding to inode numbers for files in a specified VxFS file system. You can specify a range for some options. A range can be a single number, or two numbers separated by a hyphen (-). The range is inclusive. If the range is a single number, the output will refer to the single sector, block, or surface specified by that number. If you enter a hyphen and om... |
|
ndd(1m) -- network tuning
|
|
The ndd command allows the examination and modification of several tunable parameters that affect networking operation and behavior. It accepts arguments on the command line or may be run interactively. The -h option displays all the supported and unsupported tunable parameters that ndd provides. Valid network_device names are: /dev/arp, /dev/ip, /dev/rawip, /dev/tcp, and /dev/udp. Set parameter t... |
|
ndp(1m) -- IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache display and control
|
|
The ndp command displays and modifies the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache as specified in the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery (ND) protocol. |
|
neqn(1) -- format mathematical text for nroff
|
|
neqn is a preprocessor for nroff (see nroff(1)) for typesetting mathematical text on typewriter-like terminals. Its invocation is almost always one of the following two forms or equivalent: neqn file... | nroff | col tbl file... | neqn | nroff | col If no files are specified (or if - is specified instead of file), neqn reads from standard input. A line beginning with .EQ marks the start of an equa... |
|
netfmt(1m) -- format tracing and logging binary files
|
|
netfmt is used to format binary trace and log data gathered from the network tracing and logging facility (see nettl(1M)) and the kernel logging facility (see kl(1M)). The binary trace and log information can be read from a file or from standard input (if standard input is a tty device, an informative message is given and netfmt quits). Formatted data is written to standard output. Formatting opti... |
|
netstat(1) -- show network status
|
|
netstat displays statistics for network interfaces and protocols, as well as the contents of various network-related data structures. The output format varies according to the options selected. Some options are ignored or invalid when used in combination with other options. Generally, the netstat command takes one of the three forms shown above: + The first form of the command displays a list of a... |
|
nettl(1m) -- control network tracing and logging
|
|
The nettl command is a tool used to capture network events or packets. Logging is a means of capturing network activities such as state changes, errors, and connection establishment. Tracing is used to capture or take a snapshot of inbound and outbound packets going through the network, as well as loopback or header information. A subsystem is a particular network module that can be acted upon, su... |
|
nettladm(1m) -- network tracing and logging administration manager
|
|
The nettladm command is a tool used to administer network tracing and logging. It provides an interactive user interface to the nettl, netfmt, and nettlconf commands. The interface runs in either text terminal mode or in a Motif graphical environment. To run nettladm using Motif windows set the DISPLAY environment variable to match the system name (e.g., DISPLAY=system:0.0) prior to using the comm... |
|
nettlconf(1m) -- configure network tracing and logging command subsystem database
|
|
nettlconf maintains the database file /etc/nettlgen.conf which contains information required by the nettl, kl, and netfmt commands (see nettl(1M), kl(1M), and netfmt(1M)). This database contains system logging information along with a description of each subsystem that uses either NetTL or KL facility to log messages. nettlconf can be used to update the network or kernel logging parameters or to a... |
|
newalias(1) -- install new elm aliases for user or system
|
|
The newalias command creates new alias database files from an alias text file for use by elm and other programs. For user aliases, this functionality can also be performed from the Alias Menu of the elm program (see elm(1)). |
|
newaliases(1m) -- rebuilds the database for the mail aliases file
|
|
newaliases rebuilds the random access database for the mail aliases file /etc/mail/aliases. It must be run each time this file is changed in order for the change to take effect. newaliases is identical to sendmail -bi. |
|
newform(1) -- change or reformat a text file
|
|
newform reads lines from the named files, or the standard input if no input file is named, and reproduces the lines on the standard output. Lines are reformatted in accordance with command line options in effect. Except for -s, command line options can appear in any order, can be repeated, and can be intermingled with the optional files. Command line options are processed in the order specified. T... |
|
newfs(1m) -- construct a new file system
|
|
The newfs command is a "friendly" front-end to the mkfs command (see mkfs(1M)). The newfs command calculates the appropriate parameters and then builds the file system by invoking the mkfs command. special represents a character (raw) special device. |
|
newfs_hfs(1m) -- construct a new HFS file system
|
|
The newfs command builds a file system by invoking the mkfs command. The newfs command creates the file system with a rotational delay value of zero (see tunefs(1M)). special represents a character (raw) special device. |
|
newfs_vxfs(1m) -- create a new VxFS file system
|
|
newfs -F vxfs builds a VxFS file system by invoking mkfs. special specifies a character (or raw) file (for example, /dev/rdsk/c0t6d0). |
|
newgrp(1) -- switch to a new group
|
|
The newgrp command changes your group ID without changing your user ID and replaces your current shell with a new one. If you specify group, the change is successful if group exists and either your user ID is a member of the new group, or group has a password and you can supply it from the terminal. If you omit group, newgroup changes to the group specified in your entry in the password file, /etc... |
|
newkey(1m) -- create a new Diffie-Hellman key pair in the publickey database
|
|
newkey establishes new public keys for users and machines on the network. These keys are needed when using secure RPC or secure NFS service. newkey prompts for a password for the given username or hostname and then creates a new public/secret Diffie-Hellman 192 bit key pair for the user or host. The secret key is encrypted with the given password. The key pair can be stored in the /etc/publickey f... |
|
newmail(1) -- notify users of new mail in mailboxes
|
|
The newmail utility monitors your incoming mailbox or specified mail folders. The basic operation is that the program checks the folders each interval seconds (default 60) and lists any new mail that has arrived in any of the mailboxes, indicating the sender's name, and the subject of the message. Without any options, newmail runs in the background at a default interval of 60 seconds to monitor t... |
|
news(1) -- print news items
|
|
news is used to keep the user informed of current events. By convention, these events are described by files in the directory /var/news. When invoked without arguments, news prints the contents of all current files in /var/news, most recent first, with each preceded by an appropriate header. news stores the ``currency'' time as the modification date of a file named .news_time in the user's home... |
|
nfsd(1m) -- NFS daemons
|
|
nfsd starts the NFS server daemons that handle client file system requests (see nfs(7)). num_nfsd is the suggested number of file system request daemons that will start. One daemon will be started to support the kernel threads servicing TCP requests, and multiple additional daemons will be started to service UDP requests. At system boot time, num_nfsd is defined by the NUM_NFSD variable in the /et... |
|
nfsstat(1m) -- Network File System statistics
|
|
nfsstat displays statistical information about the NFS (Network File System) and RPC (Remote Procedure Call), interfaces to the kernel. It can also be used to reinitialize this information. If no options are given, the default is nfsstat -cnrs That is, display everything, but reinitialize nothing. |
|
nice(1) -- run a command at nondefault priority
|
|
The nice command executes command at a nondefault CPU scheduling priority. (The name is derived from being "nice" to other system users by running large programs at lower priority.) |
|
nis(1) -- a new version of the network information name service
|
|
NIS+ is a new version of the network information name service. This version differs in several significant ways from version 2, which is referred to as NIS or YP in earlier releases. Specific areas of enhancement include the ability to scale to larger networks, security, and the administration of the service. The man pages for NIS+ are broken up into three basic categories. Those in section 1 are ... |
|
nis+(1) -- a new version of the network information name service
|
|
NIS+ is a new version of the network information name service. This version differs in several significant ways from version 2, which is referred to as NIS or YP in earlier releases. Specific areas of enhancement include the ability to scale to larger networks, security, and the administration of the service. The man pages for NIS+ are broken up into three basic categories. Those in section 1 are ... |
|
NIS+(1) -- a new version of the network information name service
|
|
NIS+ is a new version of the network information name service. This version differs in several significant ways from version 2, which is referred to as NIS or YP in earlier releases. Specific areas of enhancement include the ability to scale to larger networks, security, and the administration of the service. The man pages for NIS+ are broken up into three basic categories. Those in section 1 are ... |
|
nisaddcred(1m) -- create NIS+ credentials
|
|
The nisaddcred command is used to create security credentials for NIS+ principals. NIS+ credentials serve two purposes. The first is to provide authentication information to various services; the second is to map the authentication service name into an NIS+ principal name. When the nisaddcred command is run, these credentials get created and stored in a table named cred.org_dir in the default NIS+... |
|
nisaddent(1m) -- create NIS+ tables from corresponding /etc files or NIS maps
|
|
nisaddent creates entries in NIS+ tables from their corresponding /etc files and NIS maps. This operation is customized for each of the standard tables that are used in the administration of HP-UX systems. The type argument specifies the type of the data being processed. Legal values for this type are one of aliases, bootparams, ethers, group, hosts, netid, netmasks, networks, passwd, protocols, p... |
|
niscat(1) -- display NIS+ tables and objects
|
|
In the first synopsis, niscat displays the contents of the NIS+ tables named by tablename. In the second synopsis, it displays the internal representation of the NIS+ objects named by name. |
|
nischgrp(1) -- change the group owner of an NIS+ object
|
|
nischgrp changes the group owner of the NIS+ objects or entries specified by name to the specified NIS+ group. Entries are specified using indexed names (see nismatch(1)). If group is not a fully qualified NIS+ group name, it will be resolved using the directory search path (see nisdefaults(1)). The only restriction on changing an object's group owner is that you must have modify permissions for ... |
|
nischmod(1) -- change access rights on an NIS+ object
|
|
nischmod changes the access rights (mode) of the NIS+ objects or entries specified by name to mode. Entries are specified using indexed names (see nismatch(1)). Only principals with modify access to an object may change its mode. mode has the following form: rights [,rights] ... rights has the form: [ who ] op permission [ op permission ]... who is a combination of: n Nobody's permissions. o Owne... |
|
nischown(1) -- change the owner of an NIS+ object
|
|
nischown changes the owner of the NIS+ objects or entries specified by name to owner. Entries are specified using indexed names (see nismatch(1)). If owner is not a fully qualified NIS+ principal name (see nisaddcred(1M)), the default domain (see nisdefaults(1)) will be appended to it. The only restriction on changing an object's owner is that you must have modify permissions for the object. Note... |
|
nischttl(1) -- change the time to live value of an NIS+ object
|
|
nischttl changes the time to live value (ttl) of the NIS+ objects or entries specified by name to time. Entries are specified using indexed names (see nismatch(1)). The time to live value is used by object caches to expire objects within their cache. When an object is read into the cache, this value is added to the current time in seconds yielding the time when the cached object would expire. The ... |
|
nisclient(1m) -- initialize NIS+ credentials for NIS+ principals
|
|
The nisclient shell script can be used to: + create NIS+ credentials for hosts and users + initialize NIS+ hosts and users + restore the network service environment NIS+ credentials are used to provide authentication information of NIS+ clients to NIS+ service. Use the first synopsis ( -c ) to create individual NIS+ credentials for hosts or users. You must be logged in as a NIS+ principal in the d... |
|
nisd(1m) -- NIS+ service daemon
|
|
The rpc.nisd daemon is an RPC service that implements the NIS+ service. This daemon must be running on all machines that serve a portion of the NIS+ namespace. rpc.nisd is usually started from a system startup script. rpc.nisd_resolv is an auxillary process that is started by rpc.nisd when it is invoked with -B option. Note that rpc.nisd_resolv should not be started independently. |
|
nisdefaults(1) -- display NIS+ default values
|
|
nisdefaults prints the default values that are returned by calls to the NIS+ local name functions (see nis_local_names(3N)). With no options specified, all defaults will be printed in a verbose format. With options, only that option is displayed in a terse form suitable for shell scripts. See the example below. |
|
nisd_resolv(1m) -- NIS+ service daemon
|
|
The rpc.nisd daemon is an RPC service that implements the NIS+ service. This daemon must be running on all machines that serve a portion of the NIS+ namespace. rpc.nisd is usually started from a system startup script. rpc.nisd_resolv is an auxillary process that is started by rpc.nisd when it is invoked with -B option. Note that rpc.nisd_resolv should not be started independently. |
|
niserror(1) -- display NIS+ error messages
|
|
niserror prints the NIS+ error associated with status value error-num on the standard output. It is used by shell scripts to translate NIS+ error numbers that are returned into text messages. |
|
nisgrep(1) -- utilities for searching NIS+ tables
|
|
nismatch and nisgrep can be used to search NIS+ tables. The command nisgrep differs from the nismatch command in its ability to accept regular expressions keypat for the search criteria rather than simple text matches. Because nisgrep uses a callback function, it is not constrained to searching only those columns that are specifically made searchable at the time of table creation. This makes it mo... |
|
nisgrpadm(1) -- NIS+ group administration command
|
|
nisgrpadm is used to administer NIS+ groups. This command administers both groups and the groups' membership lists. nisgrpadm can create, destroy, or list NIS+ groups. nisgrpadm can be used to administer a group's membership list. It can add or delete principals to the group, or test principals for membership in the group. The names of NIS+ groups are syntactically similar to names of NIS+ objec... |
|
nisinit(1m) -- NIS+ client and server initialization utility
|
|
nisinit initializes a machine to be a NIS+ client or an NIS+ root master server. It may be easier to use nisclient(1M) or nisserver(1M) to accomplish this same task. |
|
nisln(1) -- symbolically link NIS+ objects
|
|
The nisln command links an NIS+ object named name to an NIS+ name linkname. If name is an indexed name (see nismatch(1)), the link points to entries within an NIS+ table. Clients wishing to look up information in the name service can use the FOLLOW_LINKS flag to force the client library to follow links to the name they point to. Further, all of the NIS+ administration commands accept the -L switch... |
|
nislog(1m) -- display the contents of the NIS+ transaction log
|
|
nislog displays the contents of the NIS+ server transaction log on the standard output. This command can be used to track changes in the namespace. The /var/nis/hostname.log file contains the transaction log maintained by the NIS+ server. hostname.log file contains the transaction log maintained by the NIS+ server. .log file contains the transaction log maintained by the NIS+ server. hostname is t... |
|
nisls(1) -- list the contents of an NIS+ directory
|
|
For each name that is an NIS+ directory, nisls lists the contents of the directory. For each name that is an NIS+ object other than a directory, nisls simply echos the name. If no name is specified, the first directory in the search path (see nisdefaults(1)) is listed. |
|
nismatch(1) -- utilities for searching NIS+ tables
|
|
nismatch and nisgrep can be used to search NIS+ tables. The command nisgrep differs from the nismatch command in its ability to accept regular expressions keypat for the search criteria rather than simple text matches. Because nisgrep uses a callback function, it is not constrained to searching only those columns that are specifically made searchable at the time of table creation. This makes it mo... |
|
nismkdir(1) -- create NIS+ directories
|
|
The nismkdir command creates new NIS+ subdirectories within an existing domain. It can also be used to create replicated directories. Without options, this command will create a subdirectory with the same master and the replicas as its parent directory. It is advisable to use nisserver(1M) to create an NIS+ domain which consists of the specified directory along with the org_dir and groups_dir subd... |
|
nispasswd(1) -- change NIS+ password information
|
|
nispasswd changes a password, gecos (finger) field (-goption), home directory (-hoption), or login shell (-soption) associated with the username (invoker by default) in the NIS+ passwd table. Additionally, the command can be used to view or modify aging information associated with the user specified if the invoker has the right NIS+ privileges. nispasswd uses secure RPC to communicate with the NIS... |
|
nispasswdd(1m) -- NIS+ password update daemon
|
|
rpc.nispasswdd daemon is an ONC+ RPC service that services password update requests from nispassw . It updates password entries in the NIS+ passwd table. rpc.nispasswdd is normally started from a system startup script after the NIS+ server (rpc.nisd(1M)) has been started. rpc.nispasswdd will determine whether it is running on a machine that is a master server for one or more NIS+ directories. If i... |
|
nisping(1m) -- send ping to NIS+ servers
|
|
In the first SYNOPSIS line, the nisping command sends a ping to all replicas of a NIS+ directory. Once a replica receives a ping, it will check with the master server for the directory to get updates. Prior to pinging the replicas, this command attempts to determine the last update "seen" by a replica and the last update logged by the master. If these two timestamps are the same, the ping is not... |
|
nispopulate(1m) -- populate the NIS+ tables in a NIS+ domain.
|
|
The nispopulate shell script can be used to populate NIS+ tables in a specified domain from their corresponding files or NIS maps. nispopulate assumes that the tables have been created either through nisserver(1M) or nissetup(1M). The table argument accepts standard names that are used in the administration of HP-UX systems and non-standard key-value type tables. See nisaddent(1M) for more informa... |
|
nisrm(1) -- remove NIS+ objects from the namespace
|
|
The nisrm command removes NIS+ objects named name from the NIS+ namespace. This command will fail if the NIS+ master server is not running. |
|
nisrmdir(1) -- remove NIS+ directories
|
|
nisrmdir deletes existing NIS+ subdirectories. It can remove a directory outright, or simply remove replicas from serving a directory. This command modifies the object that describes the directory dirname, and then notifies each replica to remove the directory named dirname. If the notification of any of the affected replicas fails, the directory object is returned to its original state unless the... |
|
nisserver(1m) -- set up NIS+ servers.
|
|
The nisserver shell script can be used to set up a root master, nonroot master, and replica NIS+ servers with level 2 security (DES). When setting up a new domain, this script creates the NIS+ directories (including groups_dir and org_dir) and system table objects for the domain specified. It does not populate the tables. You will need to use nispopulate(1M) to populate the tables. Use the first S... |
|
nissetup(1m) -- initialize a NIS+ domain
|
|
nissetup is a shell script that sets up a NIS+ domain to serve clients that wish to store system administration information in a domain named domain. This domain should already exist prior to executing this command (see nismkdir(1) and nisinit(1M)). A NIS+ domain consists of a NIS+ directory and its subdirectories: org_dir and groups_dir. org_dir stores system administration information and groups... |
|
nisshowcache(1m) -- NIS+ utility to print out the contents of the shared cache file
|
|
nisshowcache prints out the contents of the per-machine NIS+ directory cache that is shared by all processes accessing NIS+ on the machine. By default, nisshowcache only prints out the directory names in the cache along with the cache header. The shared cache is maintained by nis_cachemgr(1M). |
|
nisstat(1m) -- report NIS+ server statistics
|
|
The nisstat command queries a NIS+ server for various statistics about its operations. These statistics may vary between implementations and from release to release. Not all statistics are available from all servers. Requesting a statistic from a server that does not support that statistic is never fatal, it simply returns 'unknown statistic.' By default, statistics are fetched from the server(s... |
|
nistbladm(1) -- NIS+ table administration command
|
|
The nistbladm command is used to administer NIS+ tables. There are five primary operations that it performs: creating and deleting tables, adding entries to, modifying entries within, and removing entries from tables. Though NIS+ does not place restrictions on the size of tables or entries, the size of data has an impact on the performance and the disk space requirements of the NIS+ server. NIS+ i... |
|
nistest(1) -- return the state of the NIS+ namespace using a conditional expression
|
|
nistest provides a way for shell scripts and other programs to test for the existence, type, and access rights of objects and entries. Entries are named using indexed names (see nismatch(1)). |
|
nisupdkeys(1m) -- update the public keys in a NIS+ directory object
|
|
This command updates the public keys in an NIS+ directory object. When the public key for a NIS+ server is changed, the new key must be propagated to all directory objects that reference that server. nisupdkeys reads a directory object and attempts to get the public key for each server of that directory. These keys are placed in the directory object and the object is then modified to reflect the n... |
|
nis_cachemgr(1m) -- maintains a cache containing location information about NIS+ servers
|
|
The nis_cachemgr daemon maintains a cache of the NIS+ directory objects. The cache contains location information necessary to contact the NIS+ servers that serve the various directories in the name space. This includes transport addresses, information neeeded to authenticate the server, and a time to live field which gives a hint on how long the directory object can be cached. The cache helps to i... |
|
nl(1) -- line numbering filter
|
|
nl reads lines from the named file or the standard input if no file is named and reproduces the lines on the standard output. Lines are numbered on the left in accordance with the command options in effect. nl views the text it reads in terms of logical pages. Line numbering is reset at the start of each logical page. A logical page consists of a header, a body, and a footer section. Empty section... |
|
nljust(1) -- justify lines, left or right, for printing
|
|
nljust formats for printing data written in languages with a rightto-left orientation. It is designed to be used with the pr and the lp commands (see pr(1) and lp(1)). nljust reads the concatenation of input files (or standard input if none are given) and produces on standard output a right-to-left formatted version of its input. If - appears as an input file name, nljust reads standard input at t... |
|
nm(1) -- print name list of common object file
|
|
The nm command displays the symbol table of each object file, file. There are three general output formats: the default (neither -p nor -P specified), -p specified, and -P specified. The output formats are described after the "Options" subsection. By default, nm prints the entire name of the symbols listed. Since object files can have symbol names with an arbitrary number of characters, a name t... |
|
nohup(1) -- run a command immune to hangups
|
|
nohup executes command with hangups and quits ignored. If output is not redirected by the user, both standard output and standard error are sent to nohup.out. If nohup.out is not writable in the current directory, output is redirected to $HOME/nohup.out; otherwise, nohup fails. If a file is created, the file's permission bits will be set to S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR. If output from nohup is redirected to... |
|
nroff(1) -- format text
|
|
nroff is a text formatting program that interprets source text contained in file and prepares it for printing on typewriter-like devices and line printers. If file name is - or not specified, standard input is used as source text. If the file contains plain text with no formatter requests, nroff uses default line lengths and page dimensions to produce readable output, outputting a blank line for e... |
|
nslookup(1) -- query name servers interactively
|
|
nslookup is a program to query Internet domain name servers. nslookup has been extended to follow the configured name resolution algorithm of the host and to query NIS, as well as, DNS and host tables. Both an interactive and non-interactive mode are available with nslookup. Interactive mode allows the user to query a name server for information about various hosts and domains, or print a list of ... |
|
nsquery(1) -- query the Name Service Switch backend libraries
|
|
nsquery is used to find the Name Service that returned the response to a gethostbyname(), gethostbyaddr(), getpwnam(), getpwuid(), getgrnam(), or getgrgid() function call. This application is Name Service Switch aware and follows the lookup policies in /etc/nsswitch.conf. The lookup types supported are: hosts Used to resolve host name or IP Address lookups. passwd Used to resolve user name or UID ... |
|
nsupdate(1) -- Dynamic DNS update utility
|
|
nsupdate is used to submit Dynamic DNS Update requests as defined in RFC2136 to a name server. This allows resource records to be added or removed from a zone without manually editing the zone file. A single update request can contain requests to add or remove more than one resource record. Zones that are under dynamic control via nsupdate or a DHCP server should not be edited by hand. Manual edit... |
|
ntpdate(1m) -- set the date and time via NTP
|
|
ntpdate sets the local date and time by polling those Network Time Protocol (NTP) server(s) given as the server arguments to determine the correct time. It must be run as root on the local host. A number of samples are obtained from each of the servers specified and a subset of the NTP clock filter and selection algorithms are applied to select the best of these. Note that the accuracy and reliabi... |
|
ntpq(1m) -- standard Network Time Protocol query program
|
|
ntpq is used to query NTP servers, that implement the recommended NTP mode 6 control message format about current state and to request changes in that state. The program may be run either in interactive mode or controlled mode using command line arguments. Requests to read and write arbitrary variables can be assembled, with raw and pretty-printed output options available. ntpq can also obtain and... |
|
nulladm(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
ocd(1m) -- outbound connection daemon used by DDFA software
|
|
The Outbound Connection Daemon (ocd) is part of the Data Communications and Terminal Controller (DTC) Device File Access (DDFA) software. It manages the connection and data transfer to the remote terminal server port. It can be spawned from the Dedicated Port Parser (dpp) or run directly from the shell. For performance reasons, ocd does not have a debug mode. However, a version called ocdebug with... |
|
ocdebug(1m) -- outbound connection daemon debug utility used by DDFA software
|
|
The ocdebug daemon is the debugging version of the Outbound Connection Daemon (ocd). ocd is part of the Data Communications and Terminal Controller (DTC) Device File Access (DDFA) software. It manages the connection and data transfer to the remote terminal server port. See ddfa(7) for more information on how to configure the DDFA software and for an explanation of how it works. Debugging may be to... |
|
od(1) -- octal and hexadecimal dump
|
|
od and xd concatenate one or more input files and write their contents to standard output in a user-specified format. If file is not specified, the standard input is used. |
|
odump(1) -- dump information contained in SOM object files
|
|
odump takes one or more 32-bit native code files (object files, shared and archive libraries, executables) and dumps information about them. Note: odump skips non-SOM input files and issues a warning. $ odump -all /usr/lib/pa20_64/libc.sl File is not a SOM, skipping: /usr/lib/pa20_64/libc.sl. |
|
olrad(1m) -- command for online addition/replacement of PCI IO cards
|
|
The olrad command provides the ability to perform on-line addition and replacement of I/O cards. olrad performs critical resource analysis of the system before performing any OLA/R operation. This is to ensure that the system is not left in an inconsistent state after a PCI card is added/replaced. Only users with root privileges may use this command. |
|
on(1) -- execute command on remote host with environment similar to local
|
|
on executes a command on a remote host, using an environment similar to that of the invoking user where: host specifies the name of the host on which to execute the command. command specifies the command to execute on host If command is not specified, on starts a shell on host. argument ... is a list of arguments for command. The user's environment variables are copied to the remote host, and the... |
|
opx25(1m) -- execute HALGOL programs
|
|
The uucp commands, including opx25, are targeted for removal from HPUX; see the WARNINGS below. HALGOL is a simple language for communicating with devices such as modems and X.25 PADs. It has simple statements similar to send xxx and expect yyy that are described below. Options: opx25 recognizes the following options: -f script Causes opx25 to read script as the input program. If -f is not specifi... |
|
osdd(1) -- print documents formatted with the mm macros
|
|
mm can be used to format and print documents using nroff and the mm text-formatting macro package (see nroff(1)). It has options to specify preprocessing by tbl and/or neqn, (see tbl(1) and neqn(1)), and postprocessing by various terminal-oriented output filters. The proper pipelines and the required arguments and flags for nroff and mm are generated, depending on the options selected. osdd is equ... |
|
ospf_monitor(1m) -- monitor OSPF (Open Shortest Path First protocol) gateways
|
|
Use the ospf_monitor command to query OSPF routers. The ospf_monitor command operates in interactive mode. It allows the user to query the various OSPF routers to provide detailed information on IO statistics, error logs, link-state data bases, AS external data bases, the OSPF routing table, configured OSPF interfaces, and OSPF neighbors. mon_db_file is the complete pathname of a database composed... |
|
owners(1m) -- list owners of outgoing network connections
|
|
owners displays a list of established network connections which originate on this system, and indicates the owners of each connection using the identd running on this system. |
|
pack(1) -- compress and expand files
|
|
pack attempts to store the specified files in a compressed form. Wherever possible, each input file name is replaced by a packed file name.z with the same ownership, modes, and access and modification times. The .z with the same ownership, modes, and access and modification times. The -f option forces packing of name. This is useful for causing an entire directory to be packed even if some of the ... |
|
page(1) -- file perusal filter for crt viewing
|
|
more is a filter for examining continuous text, one screenful at a time, on a soft-copy terminal. It is quite similar to pg, and is retained primarily for backward compatibility. more normally pauses after each screenful, printing the filename at the bottom of the screen. To display one more line, press . To display another screenful press . Other possibilities are described later. ... |
|
pamkrbval(1m) -- validates the PAM Kerberos configuration.
|
|
pamkrbval verifies the PAM Kerberos related configuration files, /etc/pam.conf, /etc/pam_user.conf, /etc/krb5.conf, and /etc/krb5.keytab. It also checks if the default realm KDC is running. This version of pamkrbval is based on Kerberos V5 Client Version 1.0 and may not work with configuration files of other Kerberos versions. This tool will help the administrator diagnose the problem. pamkrbval p... |
|
parcreate(1m) -- create a new partition
|
|
The parcreate command creates a new partition. By default the new partition is created on the local complex. Either the -u or the -g option can be specified to create a partition on the specified target (local or remote) complex. The command takes the specified cells (and any attached I/O chassis) and assigns them to the new partition. At least one of the cells specified must be attached to an I/O... |
|
parmgr(1m) -- Start or stop Partition Manager
|
|
The parmgr command starts or stops the HP-UX Tomcat-based Servlet Engine (a component in the HP-UX Web Server Suite) and by default starts a client Web browser running Partition Manager. Partition Manager is a Web-based application that allows system administrators to use a convenient graphical user interface to configure and manage nPartitions on HP server systems. Partition Manager also provides... |
|
parmodify(1m) -- modify an existing partition
|
|
The parmodify command is used to modify the attributes of an existing partition. By default the target partition is the local partition. Either the -u or the -g option can be specified to allow this command to modify any other partition in the (local or remote) complex. This command can modify the following attributes: Partition name Cell assignment: Add cells to the partition Delete cells from th... |
|
parremove(1m) -- remove an existing partition
|
|
The parremove command removes an existing partition. This will unassign all cells from the partition and destroy the partition definition. PartitionNumber, the target partition, must be inactive except when the -F option is used. Even then, one of the following additional conditions must be satisfied: + The target partition must be the local partition, the partition executing the parremove command... |
|
parstatus(1) -- display information about a hardware partitionable complex
|
|
The parstatus command displays information about a system complex. If no arguments are supplied, all major components that are physically present in the local complex are listed. A specific component (cell, I/O chassis, cabinet, or partition) may be specified in order to restrict the output to information about that component. Either the -u option or the -g option can be specified to access a remo... |
|
parunlock(1m) -- unlock the Stable Complex Configuration Data, Partition Configuration Data, Dynamic Complex Configuration Data
|
|
The parunlock command unlocks the specified Partition Configuration Data, the Dynamic Complex Configuration Data, the Stable Complex Configuration Data, specified cell data or cancels pending changes to the Stable Complex Configuration Data or any combination of these. This command should be used with caution. It should be used only when the system resources are locked due to the abnormal terminat... |
|
passwd(1) -- change login password and associated attributes
|
|
The passwd command modifies the password as well as the attributes associated with the login name. If name is omitted, it defaults to the invoking user's login name, which is determined using getuid. See getuid(2). Ordinary users can only change passwords corresponding to their login name. If an old password has been established, it is requested from the user. If valid, a new password is obtained... |
|
passwd_export(1m) -- Creates local password and group files
|
|
The dceshared/bin/passwd_export command creates local password and group files from registry data. These files are used when the network registry is unavailable and by programs that use the original UNIX passwd and group interfaces instead of the DCE interfaces. Use /bin/passwd_export command creates local password and group files from registry data. These files are used when the network registry ... |
|
passwd_import(1m) -- Creates registry database entries based on information in UNIX group and password files
|
|
The passwd_import command is a mechanism for creating registry database entries that are consistent with foreign password and group file entries. Use passwd_import to ensure consistency between DCE and foreign protection mechanisms when you do the following: Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 passwd_import(1m) Open Software Foundation passwd_import(1m) + Attach DCE no... |
|
paste(1) -- merge same lines of several files or subsequent lines of one file
|
|
In the first two forms, paste concatenates corresponding lines of the given input files file1, file2, etc. It treats each file as a column or columns in a table and pastes them together horizontally (parallel merging). In other words, it is the horizontal counterpart of cat(1) which concatenates vertically; i.e., one file after the other. In the -s option form above, paste replaces the function of... |
|
patch(1) -- a program for applying a diff file to an original
|
|
patch will take a patch file containing any of the three forms of difference listing produced by the diff program (normal, context or in the style of ed) and apply those differences to an original file, producing a patched version. By default, the patched version is put in place of the original, with the original file backed up to the same name with the extension ``.orig'', or as specified by th... |
|
pathalias(1) -- electronic address router
|
|
pathalias computes the shortest paths and corresponding routes from one host (computer system) to all other known, reachable hosts. pathalias reads host-to-host connectivity information on standard input or in the named files, and writes a list of host-route pairs on the standard output. |
|
pathchk(1) -- check path names
|
|
The pathchk command checks that one or more path names are valid and portable. By default, the pathchk command checks each component of each path name specified by the pathname parameter based on the underlying file system. An error message is written for each path name operand that: + is longer than that allowed by the system. + contains any component longer than that allowed by the system. + con... |
|
pax(1) -- Extracts, writes, and lists archive files; copies files and directory hierarchies
|
|
The pax command extracts and writes member files of archive files; writes lists of the member files of archives; and copies directory hierarchies. The -r and -w flags specify the archive operation performed by the pax command. The pattern argument specifies a pattern that matches one or more paths of archive members. A \ (backslash) character is not recognized in the pattern argument and it preve... |
|
pcat(1) -- compress and expand files
|
|
pack attempts to store the specified files in a compressed form. Wherever possible, each input file name is replaced by a packed file name.z with the same ownership, modes, and access and modification times. The .z with the same ownership, modes, and access and modification times. The -f option forces packing of name. This is useful for causing an entire directory to be packed even if some of the ... |
|
pcnfsd(1m) -- PC-NFS authentication and print request server
|
|
pcnfsd is an RPC server that supports ONC clients on PC (DOS, OS/2, Macintosh, and other) systems. This describes version two of the pcnfsd server. pcnfsd can be started from the /sbin/init.d/nfs.server startup script by setting the PCNFS_SERVER variable to 1 in /etc/rc.config.d/nfsconf, or from the inetd daemon (see inetd(1M)). It reads the configuration file /etc/pcnfsd.conf, if present, and ser... |
|
pcserver(1m) -- Basic Serial and HP AdvanceLink server
|
|
pcserver is the hostside server program for Basic Serial and AdvanceLink, and is started and terminated by an application program running on a PC. pcserver supports both the Basic Serial and the AdvanceLink protocols. Basic Serial offers a library of routines that support a variety of services between a PC and a serially connected host computer, including file transfers and remote interprocess com... |
|
pdc(1m) -- processor-dependent code (firmware)
|
|
pdc is the firmware that implements all processor-dependent functionality, including initialization and self-test of the processor. Upon completion, it loads and transfers control to the initial system loader (isl(1M)). Firmware behavior varies somewhat, depending on the hardware series as described below. |
|
pdp11(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
pdweb(1m) -- start the HP-UX peripheral device tool (a Web interface)
|
|
The HP-UX Peripheral Device tool (pdweb) can be used to manage hot pluggable PCI slots on systems that support adding and replacing cards without rebooting. On all HP-UX systems, pdweb will display the devices and can be used to (re)create device files for a selected device. The pdweb command starts the user interface. Once started the help facility of pdweb is available and can be used to learn m... |
|
pfsd(1m) -- PFS daemon
|
|
pfsd starts the daemons that handle client filesystem requests. nservers is the number of file system server daemons to start. This number should be based on the load expected on this server. The load is defined by the number of mounted file systems. Mounts are distributed in a round-robin fashion to the pfsd daemons. It is recommended that the pfsd daemon be invoked by rc(1M). It must be invoked ... |
|
pfsd.rpc(1m) -- PFS daemon
|
|
pfsd starts the daemons that handle client filesystem requests. nservers is the number of file system server daemons to start. This number should be based on the load expected on this server. The load is defined by the number of mounted file systems. Mounts are distributed in a round-robin fashion to the pfsd daemons. It is recommended that the pfsd daemon be invoked by rc(1M). It must be invoked ... |
|
pfs_exportfs(1m) -- export and unexport directories to PFS clients
|
|
pfs_exportfs makes a local directory or filename available for mounting over the network by PFS clients. It is recommended that a command to invoke pfs_exportfs at boot time be added to rc(1M). pfs_exportfs uses information contained in the /etc/pfs_exports file to export pathname (which must be specified as a full pathname). The superuser can run pfs_exportfs at any time to alter the list or char... |
|
pfs_mount(1m) -- mount and unmount CD-ROM file systems
|
|
pfs_mount attaches a named filesystem to the file system hierarchy at the pathname location directory, which must already exist. If directory has any contents prior to the pfs_mount operation, these remain hidden until the filesystem is once again unmounted. If filesystem is of the form host:pathname, it is assumed to be a remote file system. In the case of a local mount, :pathname, it is assumed ... |
|
pfs_mountd(1m) -- PFS mount request server
|
|
This program is available with the Portable File System Package (PFS). pfs_mountd is an RPC server that answers file system mount requests. In the case of remote mount requests, it reads the file /etc/pfs_xtab, described in pfs_exports(5), to determine which file systems are available for mounting by which machines. It is recommended that the pfs_mountd daemon be invoked by rc(1M). It must be invo... |
|
pfs_mountd.rpc(1m) -- PFS mount request server
|
|
This program is available with the Portable File System Package (PFS). pfs_mountd is an RPC server that answers file system mount requests. In the case of remote mount requests, it reads the file /etc/pfs_xtab, described in pfs_exports(5), to determine which file systems are available for mounting by which machines. It is recommended that the pfs_mountd daemon be invoked by rc(1M). It must be invo... |
|
pfs_umount(1m) -- mount and unmount CD-ROM file systems
|
|
pfs_mount attaches a named filesystem to the file system hierarchy at the pathname location directory, which must already exist. If directory has any contents prior to the pfs_mount operation, these remain hidden until the filesystem is once again unmounted. If filesystem is of the form host:pathname, it is assumed to be a remote file system. In the case of a local mount, :pathname, it is assumed ... |
|
pg(1) -- file perusal filter for soft-copy terminals
|
|
pg is a text file filter that allows the examination of files one screenful at a time on a soft-copy terminal. If - is used as a file argument, or pg detects NULL arguments in the comand line, the standard input is used. Each screenful is followed by a prompt. To display a new page, press Return. Other possibilities are enumerated below. This command is different from other paginators such as more... |
|
ping(1m) -- send ICMP Echo Request packets to network host
|
|
The ping command sends ICMP Echo Request (ECHO_REQUEST) packets to the host once per second. Each packet that is echoed back via an ICMP Echo Response packet is written to the standard output, including round-trip time. ICMP Echo Request datagrams ("pings") have an IP and ICMP header, followed by a struct timeval (see gettimeofday(2)) and an arbitrary number of "pad" bytes used to fill out the... |
|
pipcrm(1) -- remove a POSIX message queue or a POSIX named semaphore
|
|
The pipcrm command removes one or more specified POSIX message queue or POSIX named semaphore. |
|
pipcs(1) -- report status of POSIX interprocess communication facilities
|
|
pipcs displays certain information on active POSIX interprocess communication facilities. When no options are specified, pipcs displays information in short format for the POSIX message queues and POSIX named semaphores that are currently active in the system. |
|
plotdvr(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
portmap(1m) -- universal addresses to RPC program number mapper
|
|
rpcbind is a server that converts RPC program numbers into universal addresses. It must be running on the host to be able to make RPC calls on a server on that machine. When an RPC service is started, it tells rpcbind the address at which it is listening, and the RPC program numbers it is prepared to serve. When a client wishes to make an RPC call to a given program number, it first contacts rpcbi... |
|
power_onoff(1m) -- timed, automatic system power on, and power off
|
|
power_onoff instructs the UPS monitor (ups_mond) to shut down the system, and optionally informs the monitor when to power on the system again. The UPS monitor in turn instructs the uninterruptible power source (UPS) when to turn the power off and on. The UPS monitor then proceeds to shut down the system. The time to restart the system (power on) is specified with power_onoff command-line argument... |
|
ppl(1) -- PPP daemon
|
|
pppd is a daemon process used in UNIX systems to manage connections to other hosts using PPP (Point to Point Protocol) or SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol). It uses the UNIX host's native serial ports. It communicates with the UNIX kernel's own TCP/IP implementation via the HP IP tunnel driver. The functionality supplied by this daemon supersedes that provided by ppl(1) in HP-UX prior to Rele... |
|
ppp(1) -- PPP daemon
|
|
pppd is a daemon process used in UNIX systems to manage connections to other hosts using PPP (Point to Point Protocol) or SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol). It uses the UNIX host's native serial ports. It communicates with the UNIX kernel's own TCP/IP implementation via the HP IP tunnel driver. The functionality supplied by this daemon supersedes that provided by ppl(1) in HP-UX prior to Rele... |
|
pppd(1) -- PPP daemon
|
|
pppd is a daemon process used in UNIX systems to manage connections to other hosts using PPP (Point to Point Protocol) or SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol). It uses the UNIX host's native serial ports. It communicates with the UNIX kernel's own TCP/IP implementation via the HP IP tunnel driver. The functionality supplied by this daemon supersedes that provided by ppl(1) in HP-UX prior to Rele... |
|
pppoec(1) -- PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) client
|
|
pppoec discovers an access concentrator that is willing to offer services to the client. It obtains a unique session-id from the selected access concentrator. pppoec then forks a pppd daemon which performs the session phase functionalities of PPPoE as mentioned in RFC 2516. |
|
pppoerd(1m) -- PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) relay
|
|
You need the pppoerd daemon if the PPPoE client and the server are not on the same link. |
|
pppoesd(1m) -- PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) server daemon
|
|
pppoesd performs the server side discovery phase functionalities of PPPoE as mentioned in RFC 2516. The pppoesd daemon responds to PADI and PADR packets from clients if it can offer services desired by the client. pppoesd generates a unique session-id for every client that it services. It then forks a pppd daemon which performs the session phase functionalities of PPPoE as mentioned in RFC 2516. |
|
pr(1) -- print files
|
|
The pr command prints the named files on the standard output. If file is -, or if no files are specified, the standard input is assumed. By default, the listing is separated into pages, each headed by the page number, a date and time, and the name of the file. By default, columns are of equal width, separated by at least one space; lines that do not fit are truncated. If the -s option is used, lin... |
|
praliases(1) -- print system-wide sendmail aliases
|
|
praliases prints out the contents of the alias data base used by sendmail to resolve system-wide mail aliases. The alias data base is built with the command newaliases or /usr/sbin/sendmail -bi. See sendmail(1M). The options are: -C file Read the sendmail configuration file specified with this option instead of the default configuration file. -f Accesses the alias database built from file with the... |
|
prctmp(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
prdaily(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
prealloc(1) -- preallocate disk storage
|
|
prealloc preallocates at least size bytes of disk space for an ordinary file name, creating the file if name does not already exist. The space is allocated in an implementation-dependent fashion for fast sequential reads and writes of the file. prealloc fails and no disk space is allocated if name already exists and is not an ordinary file of zero length, if insufficient space is left on disk, or ... |
|
primes(1) -- factor a number, generate large primes
|
|
If no arguments are provided on the command line, factor waits for a number to be typed in. If a positive number is typed, it factors the number and print its prime factors; each one is printed the proper number of times. It then waits for another number. factor exits if it encounters a zero or any non-numeric character. If an argument is provided on the command line, factor factors the number as ... |
|
printenv(1) -- print out the environment
|
|
printenv prints out the values of the variables in the environment. If a name is specified, only its value is printed. |
|
printf(1) -- format and print arguments
|
|
printf writes formatted arguments to the standard output. The arg arguments are formatted under control of the format operand. format is a character string patterned after the formatting conventions of printf(3S), and contains the following types of objects: characters Characters that are not escape sequences or conversion specifications (as described below) are copied to standard output. escape s... |
|
printstat(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
privatepw(1) -- Change WU-FTPD Group Access File Information
|
|
If a site supports the SITE GROUP and SITE GPASS commands, it is necessary to be able to add, delete and list enhanced access group information. The privatepw utility is used to update this information in the group access file (/etc/ftpd/ftpgroups). This is meant as an administrative tool and not to be run by the general user population. This command requires read/write permission to the appropria... |
|
prmail(1) -- print out mail in the incoming mailbox file
|
|
prmail prints the mail which waits for you or the specified user in the incoming mailbox file. The mailbox file is not disturbed. prmail is functionally similar to the command: cat /var/mail/mailfile mailfile | more or cat /var/mail/mailfile mailfile | pg depending upon the setting of the user's PAGER environment variable |
|
prof(1) -- display profile data
|
|
prof interprets a profile file produced by monitor() (see monitor(3C)). The symbol table in the object file prog (a.out by default) is read and correlated with a profile file (mon.out by default). For each external text symbol, the percentage of time spent executing between the address of that symbol and the address of the next is printed, together with the number of times that function was called... |
|
prs(1) -- print and summarize an SCCS file
|
|
The prs command prints, on the standard output, parts or all of an SCCS file (see sccsfile(4)) in a user-supplied format. If a directory is named, prs behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component of the path name does not begin with s.), and unreadable files are silently ignored. If a name of - is given, the standard input ... |
|
prtacct(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
ps(1) -- report process status
|
|
ps prints information about selected processes. Use options to specify which processes to select and what information to print about them. |
|
psrset(1m) -- create and manage processor sets
|
|
The psrset utility controls the management of processor sets. Processor sets allow a subset of processors in the system to be isolated for exclusive use by specified threads and processes. Processes may now be bound to groups of processors rather than just one. Each processor set represents a separate scheduling allocation Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 - HP-UX 11i Version 2: August 2003 psrset(1M) p... |
|
ptr(1) -- termainl print utility
|
|
ptr is a printer utility which support two method -- First Method is LOG PRINT - display the file on the screen then print it out. Second Method is TRANSPARENT PRINT MODE - just print file and non-display. And terminal must be HP or VT mode terminal, printer must be ESC/P printer. |
|
ptx(1) -- permuted index
|
|
ptx generates the file output that can be processed with a text formatter to produce a permuted index of file input (standard input and output default). It has three phases: the first does the permutation, generating one line for each keyword in an input line. The keyword is rotated to the front. The permuted file is then sorted (see sort(1) and Environment Variables below). Finally, the sorted li... |
|
pty(1) -- get the name of the terminal
|
|
tty and pty print the path name of the user's terminal. The -s option inhibits printing of the terminal path name and any diagnostics, providing a means to test only the exit code. |
|
pvchange(1m) -- change characteristics and access path of physical volume in LVM volume group
|
|
The pvchange command changes the characteristics and access path of a physical volume (pv_path) in a volume group. For multiported devices accessed via multiple paths, pvchange may be used to customize the circumstances that may cause LVM to automatically switch from one path to another, or when LVM will switch back to a prior path which failed when it is available again (generally described as th... |
|
pvck(1m) -- check or repair a physical volume in LVM volume group
|
|
Note: Currently pvck is only capable of detecting bad checksums caused by a forward system migration after a backward system migration. It should not be used in other situations. The pvck command examines and repairs LVM data structures on a raw disk (pv_path) in a volume group. |
|
pvcreate(1m) -- create physical volume for use in LVM volume group
|
|
The pvcreate command initializes a direct access storage device (a raw disk device) for use as a physical volume in a volume group. If pv_path contains a file system and the -f option is not specified, pvcreate asks for confirmation. The request for confirmation avoids accidentally deleting a file system. Furthermore, when the -f option is not specified, the operation is denied if pv_path already ... |
|
pvdisplay(1m) -- display information about physical volumes within LVM volume group
|
|
The pvdisplay command displays information about each physical volume specified by a pv_path parameter. |
|
pvmove(1m) -- move allocated physical extents from one LVM physical volume to other physical volumes
|
|
The pvmove command moves allocated physical extents and the data they contain from a source physical volume, source_pv_path, to one or more other physical volumes in the same volume group. If a destination physical volume or physical volume group is not specified, all physical volumes in the volume group are available as destination volumes for the transfer. pvmove selects the proper physical volu... |
|
pvremove(1m) -- remove LVM data structure from a physical volume
|
|
The pvremove command clears the LVM data structure on a disk, so that it is no longer an LVM physical volume. The device may then be used by the file system or by other Volume Manager. The operation is denied if pv_path is assigned to a volume group. The pvremove command only clears the LVM data structure on a disk if the disk does not belong to a volume group. This avoids accidentally removing a ... |
|
pwck(1m) -- password/group file checkers
|
|
pwck scans fields in the password and shadow files and reports any inconsistencies to standard error. The checks include validation of the number of fields, login name, user ID, group ID, and whether the login directory and optional program exist. In addition, if the root entry shows a program, it can only be one of: /sbin/sh, /usr/bin/csh, /usr/bin/ksh, or /usr/bin/sh. The criteria for validation... |
|
pwconv(1m) -- install, update or check the /etc/shadow file
|
|
The pwconv command installs or appends /etc/shadow with information from /etc/passwd, or checks for any discrepancies between the contents of the two files. The pwconv command without options does the following: 1. Creates the file /etc/shadow if it does not exist; otherwise, it removes all entries for usernames that are not present in /etc/passwd. 2. For each entry in /etc/passwd, move the encryp... |
|
pwd(1) -- working directory name
|
|
pwd prints the path name of the working (current) directory. |
|
pwd_strengthd(1m) -- The sample Password Management Server
|
|
DESCRIPTION pwd_strengthd is a sample Password Management Server. It exports the rsec_pwd_mgmt application programming interface. pwd_strengthd generates passwords and strength-checks them. It enforces the security registry policy for password strength-checking. Administrators can override the security registry policy via the command-line options (alpha_num, all_spaces, min_len.) Administrators ca... |
|
pwget(1) -- get password and group information
|
|
pwget and grget locate and display information from /etc/passwd and /etc/group. The standard output of pwget contains lines of colon-separated password information whose format is the same as that used in the /etc/passwd file (see passwd(4)). The standard output of grget contains lines of colon-separated group information whose format is the same as that used in the /etc/group file (see group(4)).... |
|
pwgrd(1m) -- Password and Group Hashing and Caching daemon.
|
|
pwgrd provides accelerated lookup of password and group information for libc routines like getpwuid and getgrname. pwgrd implements per request type caches and hashtables as appropriate. When the corresponding routine in libc is called, a request is issued to pwgrd via a Unix domain socket connection. pwgrd determines whether it can satisfy the request, returning the appropriate results to the req... |
|
pwgr_stat(1m) -- Password and Group Hashing and Caching Statistics.
|
|
pwgr_stat displays the current status of the pwgrd daemon process running on the system. It includes whether or not the daemon is running, how much activity is occurring, as well as statistics for each kind of request serviced by pwgrd. Request specific statistics include the number of request and the percent of requests handled by the cache and the hashtables used to service that request. A reque... |
|
pwunconv(1m) -- convert passwords from shadow to nonshadow
|
|
The pwunconv command transfers the password and aging information for all users from /etc/shadow to /etc/passwd. The /etc/shadow file is removed. Some of the aging information may be lost during the conversion; the warn and expire fields are discarded, while min, max, and lstchg are rounded from days to weeks. |
|
quit(1m) -- Causes dtscp to complete execution
|
|
The quit command causes dtscp to complete execution and returns operation to the parent process. |
|
quot(1m) -- summarize file system ownership
|
|
The quot command displays the number of 1024-byte blocks in the named filesystem that are currently owned by each user. filesystem is either the name of the directory on which the file system is mounted or the name of the device containing the file system. |
|
quota(1) -- display disk usage and limits
|
|
The quota command displays the disk usage and limits for one or more users. Without the -v option, it displays information only when the usage exceeds the limits. user is a user name or a numeric UID. The default is the login user name. Only users with appropriate privileges can view the limits of other users. |
|
quotacheck(1m) -- file system quota consistency checker
|
|
The quotacheck command examines each file system, builds a table of current disk usage, and compares this table against that stored in the disk quota file for the file system. If any inconsistencies are detected, both the quota file and the current system copy of the incorrect quotas are updated. quotacheck expects each file system to be checked to have a file named quotas in the root directory. I... |
|
quotacheck_hfs(1m) -- quota consistency checker for HFS file systems
|
|
The quotacheck command examines each HFS file system, builds a table of current disk usage, and compares this table against that stored in the disk quota file for the file system. If any inconsistencies are detected, both the quota file and the current system copy of the incorrect quotas are updated. quotacheck expects each file system to be checked to have a file named quotas in the root director... |
|
quotacheck_vxfs(1m) -- VxFS file system quota consistency checker
|
|
Because VxFS maintains quota information in the kernel, quotacheck for VxFS synchronizes quotas from the current system copy to the disk quota file for the specified VxFS file system. quotacheck requires that each file system it checks has a file named quotas in the root directory. quotacheck is typically run at mount time from a start-up script. filesystem is a mount point or block special device... |
|
quotaoff(1m) -- turn HFS file system quotas on and off
|
|
The quotaon command enables quotas on one or more HFS file systems. The quotaoff command disables quotas on one or more HFS file systems. filesystem is either the name of the mount point of the file system, or the name of the block device containing the file system. The file systems specified must be currently mounted in order to turn quotas on or off. Also, the file system quota file, quotas, mus... |
|
quotaon(1m) -- turn HFS file system quotas on and off
|
|
The quotaon command enables quotas on one or more HFS file systems. The quotaoff command disables quotas on one or more HFS file systems. filesystem is either the name of the mount point of the file system, or the name of the block device containing the file system. The file systems specified must be currently mounted in order to turn quotas on or off. Also, the file system quota file, quotas, mus... |
|
quot_hfs(1m) -- summarize ownership on an HFS file system
|
|
The quot command displays the number of 1024-byte blocks in the named HFS filesystem that are currently owned by each user. filesystem is either the name of the directory on which the file system is mounted or the name of the device containing the file system. |
|
quot_vxfs(1m) -- summarize ownership on a VxFS file system
|
|
quot displays the number of 1024-byte blocks in the specified VxFS filesystem that are currently owned by each user. filesystem is either the name of the directory on which the file system is mounted or the name of the device containing the file system. |
|
rad(1m) -- rad features have been moved to olrad
|
|
rad has been replaced with a new olrad command which provides enhanced features for performing on-line addition and replacement of I/O cards. Please see the olrad(1M) manual page. |
|
ranlib(1) -- regenerate archive symbol table
|
|
ranlib regenerates the symbol tables of the specified archives. It is equivalent to executing ar qs archive on each of the archives. After using the z modifier of ar, the symbol table of an archive must be regenerated before it can be used. |
|
rarpc(1m) -- Reverse Address Resolution Protocol client
|
|
rarpc, the Reverse Address Resolution Protocol client, implements the client portion of the Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (see SEE ALSO). It sends RARP requests for the specified interface's hardware address and waits for the response from the RARP server. rarpc can be used during boot-time initialization to find the IP address of an interface. To do so, set the IP_ADDRESS[i] variable of in... |
|
rarpd(1m) -- Reverse Address Resolution Protocol daemon
|
|
rarpd, the Reverse Address Resolution Protocol daemon, implements the server portion of the Reverse Address Resolution Protocol [1]. It responds to RARP requests providing the requested client IP address. Rarpd can be started during boot-time initialization. To do so, set the RARPD variable with RARPD=1 in /etc/rc.config.d/netconf. Options are: -d Print debugging information. -f config_file Use th... |
|
rc(1m) -- general purpose sequencer invoked upon entering new run level
|
|
The rc shell script is the general sequencer invoked upon entering a new run level via the init N command (where N equals 0-6). The script /sbin/rc is typically invoked by the corresponding entry in the file /etc/inittab as follows: sqnc:123456:wait:/sbin/rc /dev/console 2>&1 /sbin/rc is the startup and shutdown sequencer script. There is only one sequencer script and it handles all... |
|
rcancel(1m) -- remove requests from a remote printer spooling queue
|
|
The rcancel command removes a request, or requests, from the spool queue of a remote printer. rcancel is invoked by the cancel command (see lp(1)). At least one id or the name of a printer must be specified. This command is intended to be used only by the spool system in response to the cancel command (see lp(1)), and should not be invoked directly. |
|
rcp(1) -- remote file copy
|
|
The rcp command copies files, directory subtrees, or a combination of files and directory subtrees from one or more systems to another. In many respects, it is similar to the cp command (see cp(1)). To use rcp, you must have read access to files being copied, and read and search (execute) permission on all directories in the directory path. Note that there are special requirements for third-party ... |
|
rcs(1) -- change RCS file attributes
|
|
rcs creates new RCS files or changes attributes of existing ones. An RCS file contains multiple revisions of text, an access list, a change log, descriptive text, and some control attributes. For rcs to work, the user's login name must be on the access list, except if the access list is empty, if the user is the owner of the file or the superuser, or if the -i option is present. The user of the c... |
|
rcsdiff(1) -- compareRCS revisions
|
|
rcsdiff compares two revisions of each given RCS file and creates output very similar to diff (see diff(1)). A file name ending in ,v is an RCS file name, otherwise it is a working file name. rcsdiff derives the working file name from the RCS file name and vice versa, as explained in rcsintro(5). Pairs consisting of both an RCS and a working file name can also be specified. rcsdiff recognizes the ... |
|
rcsmerge(1) -- merge RCS revisions
|
|
rcsmerge incorporates the changes between rev1 and rev2 of an RCS file into the corresponding working file. If -p is given, the result is printed on the standard output; otherwise the result overwrites the working file. A file name ending in ,v is an RCS file name; otherwise it is a working file name. rcsmerge derives the working file name from the RCS file name and vice versa, as explained in rcs... |
|
rdist(1) -- remote file distribution program
|
|
rdist facilitates the maintaining of identical copies of files over multiple hosts. It preserves the owner, group, mode, and modification time of files if possible and can update programs that are executing. -f distfile Specify a distfile for rdist to execute. distfile contains a sequence of entries that specify the files to be copied, the destination hosts, and what operations to perform to do th... |
|
rdpd(1m) -- router discovery protocol daemon (OBSOLETE)
|
|
rdpd, the router discover protocol daemon, implements the host portion of the router discovery protocol (see SEE ALSO). More specifically rdpd: + solicits router advertisements when it is first started so as to populate the kernel table as soon as possible. + listens on all ethernet interfaces (that are up) for ICMP router advertisement datagrams. + adds a default router to the kernel table based ... |
|
rdump(1m) -- incremental file system dump, local or across network
|
|
The dump and rdump commands copy to magnetic tape all files in the filesystem that have been changed after a certain date. This information is derived from the files /var/adm/dumpdates and /etc/fstab. option specifies the date and other options about the dump. option consists of characters from the set 0123456789bdfnsuWw. The dump and rdump commands work only on file systems of type hfs. If the gi... |
|
read(1) -- read a line from standard input
|
|
read reads a single line from standard input. The line is split into fields as when processed by the shell (refer to shells in SEE ALSO); the first field is assigned to the first variable var, the second field to the second variable var, and so forth. If there are more fields than there are specified var operands, the remaining fields and their intervening separators are assigned to the last var. ... |
|
readmail(1) -- read mail from a mail folder or incoming mailbox
|
|
The readmail program displays messages from your incoming mailbox or a specified mail folder. Within the elm mail system (see elm(1) with no operands and optionally the -h or -n option, readmail displays the appropriate headers and the body of the current message. With the number-list operand and no options, readmail displays the corresponding messages and a summary of the headers from your incomi... |
|
reboot(1m) -- reboot the system
|
|
The reboot command terminates all currently executing processes except those essential to the system, then reboots the system, or halts, or makes the partition ready for reconfiguration. When invoked without arguments, reboot syncs all disks before rebooting the system. |
|
recserv(1m) -- HP SharedX Receiver Service
|
|
HP SharedX Receiver Service provides a method for a receiver to allow the sharing of windows without explicitly performing any xhost commands. The Internet daemon (inetd(1M)) executes recserv when it receives a service request at the port listed in the services data base for recserv (see inetd(1m) and services(4)). When recserv is executed via inetd, a dialog box appears informing the receiver of ... |
|
red(1) -- line-oriented text editor
|
|
The ed command executes a line-oriented text editor. It is most commonly used in scripts and noninteractive editing applications because, even though it can be used interactively, other editors such as vi and ex are typically easier to use in an interactive environment. If file is specified, ed performs an e command (see below) on the named file; that is to say, the file is read into ed's buffer ... |
|
reject(1m) -- allow/prevent LP destination queuing requests
|
|
The accept command permits the lp command (see lp(1)) to accept printing requests for each named LP printer or printer class destination queue. The reject command causes the lp command to reject subsequent printing requests for each named destination queue. Requests already queued will continue to be processed for printing by the lpsched scheduler (see lpsched(1M)). Use the lpstat command (see lps... |
|
remove_directory(1m) -- attribute (including application-defined attributes) of a directory
|
|
The remove directory command removes a value from a set-valued or single-valued attribute (including application-defined attributes) of a directory. If you do not specify a value, the command removes the entire attribute. This command can delete attributes created by the add directory and set directory commands. Usually this task is performed through the client application. See the OSF DCE Adminis... |
|
remove_link(1m) -- Removes a soft link's timeout value attribute
|
|
The remove link command removes a soft link's timeout value attribute, CDS_LinkTimeout, causing the soft link to become permanent. |
|
remove_object(1m) -- attribute (including application-defined attributes) of an object entry
|
|
The remove object command removes a value from a set-valued or single-valued attribute (including application-defined attributes) of an object entry. If you do not specify a value, the command removes the entire attribute. This command can delete attributes created by the add object and set object commands. Usually, this task is performed through the client application. See the OSF DCE Administrat... |
|
remsh(1) -- execute from a remote shell
|
|
remsh connects to a specified host and executes a specified command. The host name can be either the official name or an alias as understood by gethostbyname() (see gethostent(3N) and hosts(4)). remsh copies its standard input (stdin) to the remote command, the standard output of the remote command to its standard output (stdout), and the standard error of the remote command to its standard error ... |
|
remshd(1m) -- remote shell server
|
|
The remshd command is the server for the rcp, rdist and remsh commands, rcmd() and the rcmd_af() function in case of IPv6 systems (see rcp(1), rdist(1), remsh(1), rcmd(3N)), and rcmd_af(3N). remshd allows two kinds of authentication methods: 1. Authentication based on privileged port numbers where the client's source port must be in the range 512 through 1023. In this case remshd assumes it is op... |
|
renice(1m) -- alter priority of running processes
|
|
The renice command alters the system nice value (used in the system scheduling priority) of one or more running processes specified by id .... The new system nice value is set to 20 + newoffset, and is limited to the range 0 to 39. However if the UNIX95 environment variable is set, the new system nice value is set to current nice value + newoffset. Processes with lower system nice values run at hi... |
|
repquota(1m) -- summarize file system quotas
|
|
The repquota command prints a summary of disk usage and quotas for each specified filesystem. filesystem is either the name of the directory on which the file system is mounted or the name of the device containing the file system. For each user, the current number of files and amount of space (in Kbytes) is printed, along with any quotas created with edquota (see edquota(1M)). |
|
reset(1) -- terminal-dependent initialization
|
|
tset sets up the terminal when logging in on an HP-UX system. It does terminal-dependent processing, such as setting erase and kill characters, setting or resetting delays, and sending any sequences needed to properly initialize the terminal. It first determines the type of terminal involved, then does the necessary initializations and mode settings. The type of terminal attached to each HP-UX por... |
|
resize(1) -- set TERMCAP and terminal settings to current xterm window size
|
|
Resize prints a shell command for setting the TERM and TERMCAP environment variables to indicate the current size of xterm window from which the command is run. For this output to take effect, resize must either be evaluated as part of the command line (usually done with a shell alias or function) or else redirected to a file which can then be read in. From the C shell (usually known as /bin/csh),... |
|
restore(1m) -- restore file system incrementally, local or across network
|
|
The restore and rrestore commands read tapes previously dumped by the dump or rdump command (see dum ). Actions taken are controlled by the key argument where key is a string of characters containing not more than one function letter and possibly one or more function modifiers. One or more name arguments, if present, are file or directory names specifying the files that are to be restored. Unless ... |
|
rev(1) -- reverse lines of a file
|
|
rev copies the named files to the standard output, reversing the order of characters in every line. If no file is specified, the standard input is copied. |
|
reverse(1) -- filters invoked by lp interface scripts
|
|
Various filters are used by the lp subsystem to obtain specialized behavior for specific types of devices or data. This entry describes currently supported filters. A number of these filters use a specified username and filename to determine the location of the user who originated the print message. The filename is used to determine the hostname of the system where the request originated, and must... |
|
rexd(1m) -- RPC-based remote execution server
|
|
rexd is the RPC server for remote command execution. A rexd is started by inetd when a remote execution request is received (see inetd(1M)). rexd exits when command execution has completed. If the user ID (uid) in the remote execution request is assigned to a user on the server, rexd executes the command as that user. If no user on the server is assigned to the uid, rexd does not execute the comma... |
|
rexec(1) -- execute from a remote shell
|
|
remsh connects to a specified host and executes a specified command. The host name can be either the official name or an alias as understood by gethostbyname() (see gethostent(3N) and hosts(4)). remsh copies its standard input (stdin) to the remote command, the standard output of the remote command to its standard output (stdout), and the standard error of the remote command to its standard error ... |
|
rexecd(1m) -- remote execution server
|
|
rexecd is the server for the rexec() routine, and the rexec_af() routine in case of IPv6 systems; it expects to be started by the internet daemon (see inetd(1M)). rexecd provides remote execution facilities with authentication based on user account names and unencrypted passwords. inetd(1M) calls rexecd when a service request is received at the port indicated for the ``exec'' service specificati... |
|
rgb(1) -- X Window System color database creator.
|
|
rgb creates a data base used by the X window system server for its colors. Stdin is used as its input and must be in the format of: 0-255 0-255 0-255 colorname For example: 0 0 0 black 0 128 0 green 255 255 255 white rgb stands for red-green-blue. Each element can have no intensity (0) to full intensity (255). How the elements are combined determines the actual color. The name given to the color c... |
|
rgy_edit(1m) -- Edits the registry database
|
|
The rgy_edit tool views and edits information in the registry database. You can invoke rgy_edit from any node. You can edit and view principals, groups, organization, accounts, and policies in the network registry (the default) or perform a subset of those functions on the local registry (using the -l option). Changes made by rgy_edit apply only to the registry. They do not apply to the local over... |
|
ripquery(1m) -- query RIP gateways
|
|
ripquery is used to request all routes known by a RIP gateway by sending a RIP request or POLL command. The routing information in any routing packets returned is displayed numerically and symbolically. ripquery is intended to be used as a tool for debugging gateways, not for network management. SNMP is the preferred protocol for network management. ripquery by default uses the RIP POLL command, w... |
|
rksh(1) -- shell, the standard/restricted command programming language
|
|
ksh is a command programming language that executes commands read from a terminal or a file. rksh is a restricted version of the command interpreter ksh, used to set up login names and execution environments whose capabilities are more controlled than those of the standard shell. See Invoking ksh and Special Commands sections later in this entry for details about command line options and arguments... |
|
rlog(1) -- print log messages and other information on RCS files
|
|
rlog prints information about RCS files. Files ending in ,v are RCS files; all others are working files. If a working file is given, rlog tries to find the corresponding RCS file first in directory ./RCS, then in the current directory, as explained in rcsintro(5). rlog prints the following information for each RCS file: RCS file name, working file name, head (i.e., the number of the latest revisio... |
|
rlogin(1) -- remote login
|
|
The rlogin command connects your terminal on the local host to the remote host (rhost). rlogin acts as a virtual terminal to the remote system. The host name rhost can be either the official name or an alias as listed in the file /etc/hosts (see hosts(4)). In non-secure or traditional environment, rlogin allows a user to log in on an equivalent remote host, rhost, bypassing the normal login/passwo... |
|
rlogind(1m) -- remote login server
|
|
rlogind is the server for the rlogin(1) program. It provides a remote login facility with two kinds of authentication methods: 1. Authentication based on privileged port numbers where the client's source port must be in the range 512 through 1023. In this case rlogind assumes it is operating in normal or non-secure environment. 2. Authentication based on Kerberos V5. In this case rlogind assumes ... |
|
rlp(1m) -- send LP print request to a remote system
|
|
rlp transfers a spooling request to a remote system to be printed. rlp communicates with a spooling daemon on a remote system to transfer the spooling request. Options can be set only on the original system (the system where the request originated). The file name must be last. Transfers of a remote request use only the -I option and the file. This command is intended to be used only by the spool s... |
|
rlpdaemon(1m) -- daemon for queuing, displaying, removing and altering remote spool requests and writing remote messages
|
|
rlpdaemon is a LP daemon (spool area handler) for remote spool requests. rlpdaemon is normally invoked at boot time from the /sbin/rc file or started by inetd(1M), when necessary. rlpdaemon runs on a system that receives requests to be printed. rlpdaemon transfers files to the spooling area, displays the queue, removes jobs from the queue, or alters jobs in the queue. rlpdaemon is also used as a s... |
|
rlpstat(1m) -- print status of LP spooler requests on a remote system
|
|
rlpstat reports the status of the specified jobs or all requests associated with the specified users on the specified printer. At least one id or the name of a printer must be specified. For each request submitted (by lp command - see lp(1)) rlpstat reports the request ID, user's name, total size of the request, date of the request, and, if it is being transferred, the device. This command is int... |
|
rm(1) -- remove files or directories
|
|
The rm command removes the entries for one or more files from a directory. If an entry was the last link to the file, the file is destroyed. Removal of a file requires write and search (execute) permission in its directory, but no permissions on the file itself. However, if the sticky bit is set on the directory containing the file, only the owner of the file, the owner of the directory, or a user... |
|
rmail(1) -- send mail to users or read mail
|
|
The mail command, when used without arguments, prints the user's mail, message-by-message, in last-in, first-out order. For each message, mail prints a ? prompt and reads a line from the standard input to determine the disposition of the message. Commands that automatically proceed to the next message exit from mail if mail already on the last message. |
|
rmboot(1m) -- install, update or remove boot programs from disk
|
|
mkboot is used to install or update boot programs on the specified device file. The position on device at which boot programs are installed depends on the disk layout of the device. mkboot examines device to discover the current layout and uses this as the default. If the disk is uninitialized, the default is LVM layout on PA-RISC and Whole Disk on Itanium(R)-based systems. The default can be over... |
|
rmdel(1) -- remove a delta from an SCCS file
|
|
The rmdel command removes the delta specified by the SID from each named SCCS file. The delta to be removed must be the newest (most recent) delta in its branch in the delta chain of each named SCCS file. In addition, the SID specified must not be that of a version being edited for the purpose of making a delta (i.e., if a p-file (see get(1)) exists for the named SCCS file, the SID specified must ... |
|
rmdir(1) -- remove directories
|
|
rmdir removes the directory entry for each dir operand that refers to an empty directory. Directories are removed in the order specified. Consequently, if a directory and a subdirectory of that directory are both specified as arguments, the subdirectory must be specified before the parent directory so that the parent directory will be empty when rmdir tries to remove it. Removal of a directory req... |
|
rmnl(1) -- remove extra new-line characters from file
|
|
rmnl removes all blank lines from a file (except at beginning of file as explained below), and is useful for removing excess white space from files for display on a CRT terminal. Groups of two or more successive \n (new-line) characters are reduced to a single \n character, effectively eliminating all blank lines in the file except that one or more blank lines at the beginning of a file remain a... |
|
rmsf(1m) -- remove a special (device) file
|
|
The rmsf command removes one or more special files from the /dev directory and potentially removes information about the associated device or devices with H/W type "DEVICE" (see ioscan(1M)) from the system. If no options are specified, rmsf removes only the special_files specified on the command line. The -k option causes rmsf to remove the definition of the device from the system without removi... |
|
rmt(1m) -- remote magnetic-tape protocol module
|
|
rmt is a program used by the remote dump and restore programs for manipulating a magnetic tape drive through an interprocess communication (IPC) connection. The fbackup and frecover commands also use rmt to achieve remote backup capability (see fbackup(1M) and frecover(1M)). rmt is normally started up with an rexec() or rcmd() call (see rexec(3N) and rcmd(3N)). rmt accepts requests specific to the... |
|
rndc(1) -- name server control utility
|
|
This command allows the system administrator to control the operation of a name server. If rndc is invoked without any command line options or arguments, it prints a short summary of the supported commands and the available options and their arguments. rndc communicates with the name server over a TCP connection, sending commands authenticated with digital signatures. In the current versions of rn... |
|
rndc-confgen(1) -- rndc key generation tool
|
|
rndc-confgen can be used to generate rndc.conf, the configuration file for rndc. Alternatively, it can be run with the -a option to set up a rndc.key file and avoid the need for a rndc.conf file and a controls statement altogether. |
|
route(1m) -- manually manipulate the routing tables
|
|
The route command manipulates the network routing tables manually. You must have appropriate privileges. |
|
rpc.lockd(1m) -- network lock daemon
|
|
lockd is an RPC server that processes NFS file locking requests from the local kernel or from another remote lock daemon. lockd forwards lock requests for remote data to the server site's lock daemon through the RPC/XDR package (see rpc(3N)). lockd then requests the status monitor daemon, statd for monitor service (see statd(1M)). The reply to the lock request is not sent to the kernel until the ... |
|
rpc.mountd(1m) -- NFS mount request server
|
|
mountd is an RPC server that answers file system mount requests. It reads file /etc/xtab (described in exports(4)) to determine which directories are available to which machines. It also provides information on what file systems are mounted by which clients. This information can be printed using the showmount command (see showmount(1M)). rpc.mountd can be started at boot time by setting the variab... |
|
rpc.nisd(1m) -- NIS+ service daemon
|
|
The rpc.nisd daemon is an RPC service that implements the NIS+ service. This daemon must be running on all machines that serve a portion of the NIS+ namespace. rpc.nisd is usually started from a system startup script. rpc.nisd_resolv is an auxillary process that is started by rpc.nisd when it is invoked with -B option. Note that rpc.nisd_resolv should not be started independently. |
|
rpc.nisd_resolv(1m) -- NIS+ service daemon
|
|
The rpc.nisd daemon is an RPC service that implements the NIS+ service. This daemon must be running on all machines that serve a portion of the NIS+ namespace. rpc.nisd is usually started from a system startup script. rpc.nisd_resolv is an auxillary process that is started by rpc.nisd when it is invoked with -B option. Note that rpc.nisd_resolv should not be started independently. |
|
rpc.nispasswdd(1m) -- NIS+ password update daemon
|
|
rpc.nispasswdd daemon is an ONC+ RPC service that services password update requests from nispassw . It updates password entries in the NIS+ passwd table. rpc.nispasswdd is normally started from a system startup script after the NIS+ server (rpc.nisd(1M)) has been started. rpc.nispasswdd will determine whether it is running on a machine that is a master server for one or more NIS+ directories. If i... |
|
rpc.pcnfsd(1m) -- PC-NFS authentication and print request server
|
|
pcnfsd is an RPC server that supports ONC clients on PC (DOS, OS/2, Macintosh, and other) systems. This describes version two of the pcnfsd server. pcnfsd can be started from the /sbin/init.d/nfs.server startup script by setting the PCNFS_SERVER variable to 1 in /etc/rc.config.d/nfsconf, or from the inetd daemon (see inetd(1M)). It reads the configuration file /etc/pcnfsd.conf, if present, and ser... |
|
rpc.statd(1m) -- network status monitor
|
|
statd is an RPC server. It interacts with lockd to provide crash and recovery functions for the locking services on NFS (see lockd(1M)). |
|
rpc.ypupdated(1m) -- server for changing NIS information
|
|
ypupdated is a daemon that updates information in the Network Information Service (NIS) databases. It is activated at system startup when the NIS_MASTER_SERVER variable is set to 1 in /etc/rc.config.d/namesvrs file on the NIS master server. ypupdated consults the file updaters in the directory /var/yp to determine which NIS maps should be updated and how to change them. By default, the daemon requ... |
|
rpcbind(1m) -- universal addresses to RPC program number mapper
|
|
rpcbind is a server that converts RPC program numbers into universal addresses. It must be running on the host to be able to make RPC calls on a server on that machine. When an RPC service is started, it tells rpcbind the address at which it is listening, and the RPC program numbers it is prepared to serve. When a client wishes to make an RPC call to a given program number, it first contacts rpcbi... |
|
rpccp(1m) -- Starts the RPC control program
|
|
Hewlett-Packard Company - 2 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 rpccp(1m) Open Software Foundation rpccp(1m) The RPC control program (RPCCP) provides a set of commands for managing name service use for RPC applications and for managing the endpoint map. You can use control program commands from within the control program or from the system prompt (represented here as a $). To use the control prog... |
|
rpccp_add_element(1m) -- Adds an element to a profile in a name service entry; if the specified entry does not exist, creates the entry
|
|
The add element command adds an element to a profile in a name service entry. The name of the entry containing the profile and the entry name of the profile member in the new element are required. The entry of a profile may have been created previously (by either the add entry or add element command). But, if the specified entry does not exist, the add element command tries to create the entry. A ... |
|
rpccp_add_entry(1m) -- Adds a name service entry to the name service database
|
|
The add entry command adds an unspecialized entry to the name service database. The name of the entry is required. The new entry initially contains no NSI attributes. This command creates a general name service entry for an application or user. The application or user can later use the export, add element, and add member commands to make the generic entry into a server entry, a group, or a profile... |
|
rpccp_add_mapping(1m) -- Adds or replaces server address information in the local endpoint map
|
|
The add mapping command adds to, replaces, or adds server address information to the local endpoint map. Each element in the local endpoint map logically contains the following: + Interface ID, consisting of an interface UUID and versions (major and minor) + Binding information + Object UUID (optional) + Annotation (optional) This command should be used without the -N option when only a single ins... |
|
rpccp_add_member(1m) -- Adds a member to a group in a name service entry; if the specified entry does not exist, creates the entry
|
|
The add member command adds a member to a group in a name service entry. The name of the entry containing the group and the name of the new group member are required. The entry of a group may have been created previously (by either the add entry or add member command). If the specified entry does not exist, the add member command tries to create the entry. |
|
rpccp_export(1m) -- Exports binding information for an interface identifier or object UUIDs or both to a server entry; if the spec
|
|
The export command places binding information and an interface identifier, object UUIDs, or both into a server entry, or the command object UUIDs into a group's entry. The export command searches the name service database for the entry with the specified entry name. If the entry exists, the command uses it; otherwise, the command tries to create a new name service entry using the specified entry ... |
|
rpccp_help(1m) -- Displays a list of commands or the options of a specified command
|
|
The help command displays information about the RPCCP command set or the options and argument associated with a specific command. |
|
rpccp_import(1m) -- Imports binding information and an object UUID from a server entry
|
|
The import command imports binding information and an RPC object UUID for a specific RPC interface from a server entry. The name of the entry and the interface identifier are required. The entry name can refer to a server entry, a group, or a profile. |
|
rpccp_remove_element(1m) -- Removes selected elements from a profile
|
|
The remove element command removes an element from a profile in the name service database. For a description of the fields in a profile element, see add entry(1m). The remove element command requires the entry name of the profile. The command also requires one of the following options: -d The default profile option takes precedence over the other two options. -i interface-id -m member-name An inte... |
|
rpccp_remove_entry(1m) -- Removes a name service entry from the name service database
|
|
The remove entry command removes an entry from the name service database. The name of the entry is required. |
|
rpccp_remove_group(1m) -- Removes all group members and the group from the specified name service entry
|
|
The remove group command removes a group from the name service database. The group need not be empty. The entry name of the group is required. |
|
rpccp_remove_mapping(1m) -- Removes specified elements from the local endpoint map
|
|
The remove mapping command removes server address information from the local endpoint map. Each element in the local endpoint map logically Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 remove mapping(1m) Open Software Foundation remove mapping(1m) contains the following: + Interface ID, consisting of an interface UUID and versions (major and minor) + Binding information + Objec... |
|
rpccp_remove_member(1m) -- Removes a specified member from a group
|
|
The remove member command removes a specified member from a specified group. |
|
rpccp_remove_profile(1m) -- Removes all profile elements and the profile from the specified name service entry
|
|
The remove profile command removes a profile (and all of its elements) from the name service database. The entry name of the profile is required. |
|
rpccp_show_entry(1m) -- Shows the NSI attributes of a name service entry
|
|
The show entry command shows the NSI attributes of a name service entry. The name of the entry is required. Note that this operation shows all of the compatible bindings for a given interface. The show entry command shows the same list of string bindings as the import operation returns for the specified entry. This list includes all string bindings that refer to a major version that matches the sp... |
|
rpccp_show_group(1m) -- Shows the members of a group
|
|
The show group command shows the members of a group in the name service database. The entry name of the group is required. Unless it is limited to a specific member (by the -m option), the show group command shows all members. The command shows only the members in the specified group; the -r option enables you to show members of nested groups. |
|
rpccp_show_mapping(1m) -- Shows the elements of the either the local or a remote endpoint map
|
|
The show mapping command shows elements of an endpoint map. Each element corresponds to an object UUID, interface identifier, annotation, and binding information. The binding information contains an RPC protocol sequence, a network address, and an endpoint within square brackets (rpc- prot-seq:network-addr[endpoint]). The endpoint map can be either the local endpoint map or the endpoint map of a s... |
|
rpccp_show_profile(1m) -- Shows the elements of a profile
|
|
The show profile command shows the elements of a profile in the name service database. The entry name of the profile is required. By default, all elements in the profile are shown. You can select a subset of the elements by specifying the -a, -i, or -m options. The -r option enables you to show nested profiles. |
|
rpccp_show_server(1m) -- Shows the binding information, interface identifiers, and object UUIDs in a server entry
|
|
The show server command shows the RPC binding information, interface identifiers, and object UUIDs in a server entry. The entry name of the server entry is required. This operation shows all of the potential bindings for an interface. By default, this command displays bindings for the specified version of the interface and for upwardly compatible versions of the interface. The -v option controls w... |
|
rpccp_unexport(1m) -- Removes binding information, interface identifiers, and object UUIDs from a server entry
|
|
The unexport command removes binding information and an interface identifier, object UUIDs, or both from a server entry, or it removes Hewlett-Packard Company - 2 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 unexport(1m) Open Software Foundation unexport(1m) object UUIDs from a group's entry. The command requires the entry name and either the interface identifier or one or more object UUIDs. By default, ... |
|
rpcd(1m) -- DCE Host daemon
|
|
The DCE Host daemon is a process that provides services for the local host, and is also the server used by remote applications to access these host services. The daemon can be invoked either as dced or as rpcd. When invoked as dced, it provides by default all of the services described below, and it requires that the local host be configured into a DCE cell. When invoked as rpcd, it provides only t... |
|
rpcgen(1) -- an RPC protocol compiler
|
|
rpcgen is a tool that generates C code to implement an RPC protocol. The input to rpcgen is a language similar to C known as RPC Language (Remote Procedure Call Language). rpcgen is normally used as in the first synopsis where it takes an input file and generates three output files. If the infile is named proto.x, then rpcgen generates a header in proto.h, XDR routines in proto_xdr.c, server-side ... |
|
rpcinfo(1m) -- report RPC information
|
|
rpcinfo makes an RPC call to an RPC server and reports what it finds. In the first synopsis, rpcinfo lists all the registered RPC services with rpcbind on host. If host is not specified, the local host is the default. If -s is used, the information is displayed in a concise format. In the second synopsis, rpcinfo lists all the RPC services registered with rpcbind, version 2. Also note that the for... |
|
rpc_intro(1m) -- Introduction to DCE RPC daemon and RPC control program commands
|
|
DCE RPC provides two administrative facilities, the RPC daemon and the RPC control program. Note: These facilities are superceded by the DCE Host daemon (dced) and the DCE control program (dcecp) for OSF DCE version 1.1. + The RPC daemon is a process that provides the Endpoint Map Service, which maintains the local endpoint map for local RPC servers and looks up endpoints for RPC clients. An endpo... |
|
rpc_intro(1) -- Introduction to the DCE RPC programmer commands
|
|
DCE RPC provides the following programmer commands: + The idl command invokes the Interface Definition Language (IDL) compiler to convert an interface definition, written in IDL, to output files. + The uuidgen command creates a UUID string that you assign to an object to uniquely distinguish it from other objects. See each command's reference page for further information. |
|
rquotad(1m) -- remote quota server
|
|
rquotad is an RPC server that returns quotas for a user of a local file system currently mounted by a remote machine by means of NFS (see rpc(3N)). The results are used by quota to display user quotas for remote file systems (see quota(1)). rquotad is normally invoked by inetd (see inetd(1M)). |
|
rrestore(1m) -- restore file system incrementally, local or across network
|
|
The restore and rrestore commands read tapes previously dumped by the dump or rdump command (see dum ). Actions taken are controlled by the key argument where key is a string of characters containing not more than one function letter and possibly one or more function modifiers. One or more name arguments, if present, are file or directory names specifying the files that are to be restored. Unless ... |
|
rstatd(1m) -- kernel statistics server
|
|
rstatd is an RPC server that returns performance statistics obtained from the kernel. The rup utility prints this information (see rup(1)). inetd invokes rstatd through /etc/inetd.conf (see inetd(1M)). |
|
rtprio(1) -- execute process with real-time priority
|
|
rtprio executes command with a real-time priority, or changes the real-time priority of currently executing process pid. Real-time priorities range from zero (highest) to 127 (lowest). Real-time processes are not subject to priority degradation, and are all of greater (scheduling) importance than non-real-time processes. See rtprio(2) for more details. If -t is specified instead of a real-time pri... |
|
rtradvd(1m) -- Router Advertisement daemon for IPv6
|
|
rtradvd, the router advertisement daemon for IPv6, implements router functionality as specified by RFC 2461 ("Neighbor Discovery for IP Version 6"). The daemon listens to router solicitation and sends router advertisement messages on demand and periodically as described in "Neighbor Discovery for IP Version 6". These advertisements allow any listening host to configure their addresses and some... |
|
rtsched(1) -- execute process with real-time priority
|
|
Rtsched executes command with POSIX or HP-UX real-time priority, or changes the real-time priority of currently executing process pid. All POSIX real-time priority processes are of greater scheduling importance than processes with HP-UX real-time or HP-UX timeshare priority. All HP-UX real-time priority processes are of greater scheduling importance than HP-UX timeshare priority processes, but are... |
|
runacct(1m) -- run daily accounting
|
|
runacct is the main daily accounting shell procedure. It is normally initiated via cron(1M). runacct processes connect, fee, disk, and process accounting files. It also prepares summary files for prdaily or billing purposes. runacct takes care not to damage active accounting files or summary files in the event of errors. It records its progress by writing descriptive diagnostic messages into activ... |
|
rup(1) -- show host status of local machines (RPC version)
|
|
rup gives a status similar to uptime for remote machines. It broadcasts on the local network and displays the responses it receives. Though the listing is normally in the order responses are received, the order can be changed by using command-line options. The broadcast process takes about two minutes. When host arguments are given, instead of broadcasting, rup only queries the list of specified h... |
|
ruptime(1) -- show status of local machines
|
|
ruptime outputs a status line for each machine on the local network that is running the rwho daemon. ruptime's status lines are formed from packets broadcast once every 3 minutes between rwho daemons (see rwhod(1M)) on each host on the network. Each status line has a field for the name of the machine, the status of the machine (up or down), how long the machine has been up or down, the number of ... |
|
rusers(1) -- determine who is logged in on machines on local network
|
|
rusers produces output similar to the "quick" option of who(1), but for remote machines. It broadcasts on the local network and prints the responses it receives. Though the listing is normally in the order that responses are received, the order can be changed by specifying a command-line option. The broadcast process takes about two minutes. When host arguments are given, instead of broadcasting... |
|
rusersd(1m) -- network username server
|
|
rusersd is an RPC server that returns a list of users on the network. The rusers command prints this information (see rusers(1)). inetd invokes rusersd through /etc/inetd.conf (see inetd(1M)). |
|
rvxdump(1m) -- incremental VxFS file system dump, local or across network
|
|
vxdump copies to magnetic tape all files in the vxfs filesystem that have been changed after a certain date. This information is derived from the files /etc/fstab and a timestamp file, by default /etc/dumpdates. rvxdump copies the files to a tape drive on a remote system. rvxdump runs a process, /usr/sbin/rmt, on the remote machine to access the tape device. vxdump and rvxdump support both getopt(... |
|
rvxrestore(1m) -- restore file system incrementally, local or across network
|
|
vxrestore and rvxrestore read tapes previously dumped by the vxdump or rvxdump command (see vxdump(1M)). vxrestore restores from tape on the local system; rvxrestore restores from tape on a remote system. rvxrestore runs /usr/sbin/rmt on the remote machine to access the tape device. vxrestore and rvxrestore support both getopt(3C) and traditional restore command line invocations as shown above. Th... |
|
rwall(1m) -- write to all users over a network
|
|
rwall reads a message from standard input until EOF, then sends the message, preceded by the line Broadcast Message ..., to all users logged in on the specified host machines. With the -n option, rwall sends the message to the specified network hosts defined in /etc/netgroup (see netgroup(4)). A machine can only receive such a message if it is running rwalld, which is normally started from /etc/in... |
|
rwalld(1m) -- network rwall server
|
|
rwalld is an RPC server that handles rwall requests (see rwall(1)). rwalld calls wall to send a message to all users logged into the host on which rwalld is running (see wall(1)). inetd invokes rwalld through /etc/inetd.conf (see inetd(1M)). |
|
rwho(1) -- show who is logged in on local machines
|
|
rwho produces output similar to the output of the HP-UX who command for all machines on the local network that are running the rwho daemon (see who(1) and rwhod(1M)). If rwhod has not received a report from a machine for 11 minutes, rwho assumes the machine is down and rwho does not report users last known to be logged into that machine. rwho's output line has fields for the name of the user, the... |
|
rwhod(1m) -- system status server
|
|
rwhod is the server that maintains the database used by rwho and ruptime (see rwho(1) and ruptime(1)). rwhod sends status information to and receives status information from other nodes on the local network that are running rwhod. rwhod is started at system boot time if the RWHOD variable is set to 1 in the file /etc/rc.config.d/netdaemons. As an information sender, it periodically queries the sta... |
|
sa1(1m) -- system activity report package
|
|
System activity data can be accessed at the special request of a user (see sar(1M)) and automatically on a routine basis as described here. The operating system contains a number of counters that are incremented as various system actions occur. These include CPU utilization counters, buffer usage counters, disk and tape I/O activity counters, tty device activity counters, switching and system-call... |
|
sa2(1m) -- system activity report package
|
|
System activity data can be accessed at the special request of a user (see sar(1M)) and automatically on a routine basis as described here. The operating system contains a number of counters that are incremented as various system actions occur. These include CPU utilization counters, buffer usage counters, disk and tape I/O activity counters, tty device activity counters, switching and system-call... |
|
sact(1) -- print current SCCS file editing activity
|
|
The sact command informs the user of any impending deltas to a named SCCS file. This situation occurs when get -e has been previously executed without a subsequent execution of delta (see delta(1) and get(1)). If a directory is named on the command line, sact behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component of path name does no... |
|
sadc(1m) -- system activity report package
|
|
System activity data can be accessed at the special request of a user (see sar(1M)) and automatically on a routine basis as described here. The operating system contains a number of counters that are incremented as various system actions occur. These include CPU utilization counters, buffer usage counters, disk and tape I/O activity counters, tty device activity counters, switching and system-call... |
|
sam(1m) -- system administration manager
|
|
The sam command starts a menu-driven System Administration Manager program (SAM) for performing system administration tasks with only limited, specialized knowledge of the HP-UX operating system. SAM discovers many aspects of a system's configuration through automated inquiries and tests. Help menus describe how to use SAM and perform various management tasks. Press the F1 function key for help o... |
|
samlog_view(1) -- a tool for viewing and saving the SAM logfile
|
|
The samlog_viewer command enables the viewing of part or all of the SAM logfile (or another file containing data in the same format) at varying levels of detail. This tool is run by SAM whenever the View SAM Log option is chosen. It can also be run independently of SAM, in either interactive or noninteractive mode. The samlog_viewer command executes in either interactive or noninteractive mode, de... |
|
sams(1) -- Builds DCE message system files
|
|
The sams utility reads the specified input file and creates a number of output files. The name sams stands for ``symbols and message strings'', which is what the program manipulates. The input file consists of keywords, numbers, and text. Whitespace, except in quoted strings, is used only to separate tokens. If the text is a simple word, it can be entered unquoted. Text that is a keyword or that... |
|
sar(1m) -- system activity reporter
|
|
In the first form above, sar samples cumulative activity counters in the operating system at n intervals of t seconds. If the -o option is specified, it saves the samples in file in binary format. The default value of n is 1. In the second form, with no sampling interval specified, sar extracts data from a previously recorded file, either the one specified by -f option or, by default, the standard... |
|
savecrash(1m) -- save a crash dump of the operating system
|
|
savecrash saves the crash dump information of the system (assuming one was made when the system crashed) and writes a reboot message in the shutdown log file. dirname is the name of the existing directory in which to store the crash dump; the default is /var/adm/crash. savecrash saves the crash image and related files in the directory dirname/crash.n. The trailing /crash.n. The trailing n. The tra... |
|
sccs(1) -- front-end utility program for SCCS commands
|
|
The sccs command is a straightforward front end to the various programs comprising the Source Code Control System. It includes the capability of running set-user-id to another user to allow shared access to the SCCS files. sccs reduces the need to explicitly reference the SCCS filenames. The SCCS filenames are generated by prepending the string SCCS/s. to the working files specified. The default S... |
|
sccsdiff(1) -- compare two versions of an SCCS file
|
|
The sccsdiff command compares two versions of an SCCS file, and generates the differences between the two versions. Any number of SCCS files may be specified, but arguments apply to all files. -rSID? SID? SID1 and SID2 specify the deltas of an SCCS file that are to be compared. Versions are passed to bdiff in the order given (see bdiff(1)). The SIDs accepted, and the corresponding version retrieve... |
|
sccshelp(1) -- ask for help on SCCS commands
|
|
The sccshelp command finds information to explain a message from an SCCS command or to explain the use of a SCCS command. Zero or more arguments can be supplied. If no arguments are given, sccshelp prompts for one: What is the message number or SCCS command name? The arguments can be either message numbers (which normally appear in parentheses following messages) or command names, of one of the fo... |
|
sconv(1) -- hp9000 utility for Simplified-Chinese code code-converter
|
|
sconv is used to do code conversion from GB internal code to Big5/Unicode(UCS2 or UTF8) internal code and vice versa, also from Big5 internal code to GBK code and vice versa. It provides three processing modes. Mode (1) : sconv The first one is an interactive menu mode. Just invoke the command. It will display the main menu, and prompt you for which kind of code conversion you need(whether it is f... |
|
script(1) -- make typescript of terminal session
|
|
script makes a typescript of everything printed on your terminal. It starts a shell named by the SHELL environment variable, or by default /usr/bin/sh, and silently records a copy of output to your terminal from that shell or its descendents, using a pseudo-terminal device (see pty(7)). All output is written to file, or appended to file if the -a option is given. If no file name is given, the outp... |
|
scsictl(1m) -- control a SCSI device
|
|
The scsictl command provides a mechanism for controlling a SCSI device. It can be used to query mode parameters, set configurable mode parameters, and perform SCSI commands. The operations are performed in the same order as they appear on the command line. The second form, as shown above, supports the online addition of a supported SCSI card to a system. This option cannot be used with any other o... |
|
sd(1m) -- display and monitor job information and create and remove jobs; invoke graphical user interface to display and
|
|
The swjob command displays job information and removes jobs. It supports these features: + Display the current install jobs, copy jobs, and other SD jobs initiated by the SD commands. + Specify a specific job to list or remove. + Display the command logfile for a specific job. + Display the target logfile for a specific target. |
|
sdiff(1) -- side-by-side difference program
|
|
sdiff uses the output of diff(1) with the -b option, which ignores trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) and treats other strings of blanks as equal, to produce a side-by-side listing of two files, indicating those lines that are different. Each line of the two files is printed with a blank gutter between them if the lines are identical, a < in the gutter if the line only exists in file1, a > in the g... |
|
secd(1m) -- The DCE Security Server
|
|
The secd daemon is the Security Server. It manages all access to the registry database. You must have root privileges to invoke the secd. The Security Server can be replicated, so that several copies of the registry database exist on a network, each managed by a secd process. Only one Security Server, the master replica, can perform database update operations (such as adding an account). Other ser... |
|
sec_admin(1m) -- Registry replica administration tool
|
|
The registry database is replicated: each instance of a registry server, secd, maintains a working copy of the database in virtual memory and on disk. One server, called the master replica, accepts updates and handles the subsequent propagation of changes to all other replicas. All other replicas are slave replicas, which accept only queries. Each cell has one master replica and numerous slave rep... |
|
sec_create_db(1m) -- registry database creation utility
|
|
The sec_create_db tool creates new master and slave databases in dcelocal/var/security/rgy_data on the machine from which /var/security/rgy_data on the machine from which sec_create_db is run. Normally, these databases are created only once by the system configuration tool, dce_config. However, you can use sec_create_db if you need to re-create the master or a slave databse from scratch. You must ... |
|
sec_intro(1m) -- Introduction to the DCE Security administrative commands
|
|
This section describes DCE Security commands for system administration. These commands are acl_edit Manages Access Control Lists (ACLs) for DCE objects auditd Starts the DCE Audit Daemon chpass Changes user information, such as login name, password, home directory, password and account expiration dates, and login shell. The implementation of this utility is platformspecific. Use the chpass utility... |
|
sec_salvage_db(1m) -- Recover a corrupted registry database Note: The sec_salvage_db -check and -fix options are not currently avail
|
|
The sec_salvage_db tool is an aid to database administration and troubleshooting. Although day-to-day administration is handled by the rgy_edit command, sec_salvage_db can be useful for listing registry data, reconstructing databases, and salvaging corrupted databases. Hewlett-Packard Company - 4 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 sec_salvage_db(1m) Open Software Foundation sec_salvage_db(1m) Th... |
|
sed(1) -- stream text editor
|
|
sed copies the named text files (standard input default) to the standard output, edited according to a script containing up to 100 commands. Only complete input lines are processed. Any input text at the end of a file that is not terminated by a new-line character is ignored. |
|
sendmail(1m) -- send mail over the Internet
|
|
sendmail sends a message to one or more recipients or addresses and routes the message over whatever networks are necessary. sendmail does internetwork forwarding as necessary to deliver the message to the correct place. sendmail is not intended as a user interface routine. Other programs provide user-friendly front ends. sendmail is used only to deliver pre-formatted messages. With no flags speci... |
|
send_sound(1) -- play an audio file
|
|
This command plays an audio file. send_sound is the command used when you double-click an audio file from the HP VUE File Manager. The file begins playing, according to the settings of the Audio Control Panel. -format_format_switch is one these formats: au Sun file format snd NeXT file format wav Microsoft RIFF Waveform file format u MuLaw format al ALaw l16 linear 16-bit format lo8 offset (unsign... |
|
serialize(1) -- force target process to run serially with other processes
|
|
The serialize command is used to force the target process to run serially with other processes also marked by this command. The target process can be referred to by pid value, or it can be invoked directly on the command. Once a process has been marked by serialize, the process stays marked until process completion unless serialize is reissued on the serialized process with the -t option. The -t o... |
|
service.switch(1m) -- indicate lookup sources and fallback mechanism
|
|
/etc/mail/service.switch is a sendmail(1M) service switch similar to /etc/nsswitch.conf (see switch(4)) that indicates the lookup source for hostnames and aliases. It consists of two lines, one for hosts and one for aliases. The lookup sources are listed after the 'hosts' or 'aliases' name. For hosts, one or more of the following can be listed: files (for /etc/hosts), dns, nis, or nisplus. For... |
|
set(1m) -- Modifies characteristics for the DTS entity.
|
|
The set command modifies the charactistics you specify for the DTS entity. The modifiable characteristics and their values are described in the following list. check interval [relative-time] Specifies the amount of time between checks for faulty servers. Applicable only for servers that have external time providers. Hewlett-Packard Company - 1 OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96 set(1m) Open Soft... |
|
setacl(1) -- modify access control lists (ACLs) for files (JFS File Systems only)
|
|
For each file specified, setacl will either replace its entire ACL, including the default ACL on a directory, or it will add, modify, or delete one or more ACL entries, including default entries on directories. The -s option will set the ACL to the entries specified on the command line. The -f option will set the ACL to the entries contained within the file acl_file. The -d option will delete one ... |
|
setboot(1m) -- display and modify boot variables in stable storage
|
|
The setboot command displays and sets boot variables in stable storage (also known as nonvolatile memory). Any user can display the values; only a superuser can change them. On all systems, the variables are: primary path, alternate path, autoboot flag, and autosearch flag. If SpeedyBoot is installed, the variables expand to include: early CPU tests, late CPU tests, memory initialization (on Itani... |
|
setext(1m) -- set VxFS extent attributes
|
|
setext specifies a fixed extent size for a file, and reserves space for a file. The file must already exist. |
|
setmemwindow(1m) -- changes the window id of a running program or starts a program in a particular memory window
|
|
setmemwindow is the command that changes the window id of a running process or starts a specified program in a particular memory window. If the -p option is specified with a non-zero pid, only the process' window id is changed, and any value specified for program is ignored. The executable program is only executed if the process id pid is either 0 or unspecified. Changing the window id for the ru... |
|
setmnt(1m) -- establish the file-system mount table, /etc/mnttab
|
|
The setmnt command creates the /etc/mnttab table (see mnttab(4)), which is needed by both the mount and umount commands (see mount(1M)). setmnt reads the standard input and creates an entry in /etc/mnttab for each line of input. Input lines have the format: filesys node where filesys is the name of the device special file associated with the file system (such as /dev/dsk/c0t5d0) and node is the ro... |
|
setnetlp(1m) -- configure the LP spooling system for lpd or ftp network printers
|
|
setnetlp configures LP spooling systems to describe printers supported lpd protocol or accepted ftp output requesting, and those are connected with network by TCP/IP. It is used to add and remove destinations, change configuration of destination if the destination exists. setnetlp is shell procedure, and invokes lpadmin(1M) command from the procedure. Exactly one of the -p, -x options or no option... |
|
setoncenv(1m) -- NFS environment configuration command
|
|
setoncenv initializes the value of NFS configuration environment variables, found either in /etc/rc.config.d/nfsconf or in /etc/rc.config.d/namesvrs (See rc.config(4)). The value can be an integer or a string. The value should be consistent with the variable being set. |
|
setprivgrp(1m) -- set special privileges for groups
|
|
The setprivgrp command associates a group with a list of privileges, thus providing access to certain system capabilities for members of a particular group or groups. The privileges can be displayed with the getprivgrp command (see getprivgrp(1)). Privileges can be granted to individual groups, as defined in the /etc/group file, and globally for all groups. Only a superuser can use the setprivgrp ... |
|
setuname(1m) -- change machine information
|
|
The setuname command is used to modify the value for system name and/or the node name by using the appropriate option(s). The setuname command attempts to change the parameter values in both the running kernel and the system configuration to cross reboots. A temporary change affects only the running kernel. |
|
set_cdscp_confidence(1m) -- Sets the confidence level of clerk calls issued as a result of CDS control program commands
|
|
The set cdscp confidence command sets the confidence level of clerk calls issued as a result of CDS control program commands. You must use this command within the CDS control program. Exiting from the CDS control program removes the confidence level setting. You must reset the confidence level each time you enter the CDS control program. |
|
set_cdscp_preferred_clearinghouse(1m) -- Specifies a preferred clearinghouse to use for satisfying read requests that result from CDS control program c
|
|
The set cdscp preferred clearinghouse command specifies a preferred clearinghouse to use for satisfying read requests that result from CDS control program commands. You cannot specify a preferred clearinghouse for making modifications, because these requests always use the master replica. You must use this command within the CDS control program. Exiting from the CDS control program removes the pre... |
|
set_directory(1m) -- Changes the value of a modifiable, single-valued attribute of a directory
|
|
The set directory command changes the value of a modifiable, singlevalued attribute of a directory. If the attribute does not exist, this command creates it. Usually, this task is performed through the client application. See the OSF DCE Administration Guide for more information about attributes. You can specify an application-defined attribute or the following attributes: CDS_Convergence = value ... |
|
set_directory_epoch(1m) -- Reconstructs a directory's replica set, allowing you to designate a new master replica or to exclude a replica
|
|
The set directory to new epoch command reconstructs a directory's replica set, allowing you to designate a new master replica or to exclude a replica. You must list each existing replica and indicate whether an existing replica needs to be included in or excluded from the new replica set. You can include or exclude more than one replica. The ellipses (...) indicates that you can specify multiple ... |
|
set_directory_skulk(1m) -- Starts the skulk of a directory immediately
|
|
The set directory to skulk command starts the skulk of a directory immediately. The CDS control program prompt dscp> does not return until the skulk is complete. The amount of time for the skulk to complete is dependent on the location, number, and availability of replicas of the directory. |
|
set_link(1m) -- Changes the value of a modifiable, single-valued attribute of a soft link
|
|
The set link command changes the value of a modifiable, single-valued attribute of a soft link. The following are valid attributes: CDS_LinkTarget = fullname Specifies the full name of the directory, object entry, or other soft link to which the soft link points. CDS_LinkTimeout = (expiration-time extension-time) Specifies a timeout value after which the soft link is either checked or deleted. The... |
|
set_object(1m) -- Changes the value of a modifiable, single-valued attribute of an object entry
|
|
The set object command changes the value of a modifiable, singlevalued attribute of an object entry. If the attribute does not exist, this command creates it. Usually, this task is performed through the client application. See the OSF DCE Administration Guide for more information about attributes. |
|
set_parms(1m) -- set system initial identity parameters: hostname, date/time, root password, and networking
|
|
The set_parms command is an interactive system set-up command that allows you to specify various "initial identity parameters" when first booting a newly installed operating system (whether preinstalled, or installed locally from media or an install server), and to revise these parameters later on a running system. Initial identity parameters are a minimal set of values required to bring a syste... |
|
sffinger(1) -- utility programs for TCP Wrappers
|
|
tryfrom This program identifies the end-point details related to a connection. This program must be called via a remote shell command as shown below. It is used to find out if the hostname and the address are properly recognized, and also if the username lookup works properly. # remsh host /usr/bin/tryfrom tryfrom prints the following output when it is invoked: client address (%a): client hostname... |
|
sh(1) -- overview of various system shells
|
|
Remarks: The POSIX.2 standard requires that, on a POSIX-compliant system, executing the command sh activates the POSIX shell (located in file /usr/bin/sh on HP-UX systems), and executing the command man sh produces an on-line manual entry that displays the syntax of the POSIX shell command-line. However, the sh command has historically been associated with the conventional Bourne shell, which coul... |
|
sh-posix(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
shar(1) -- make a shell archive package
|
|
The shar command bundles the named files and directories into a single distribution package suitable for mailing or moving. The files can contain any data, including executables. The resulting package, written to standard output, is a shell script file that can be edited (to add messages at the beginning, etc.). To unpack package, use the sh command with the package name as an argument as follows:... |
|
shl(1) -- shell layer manager
|
|
shl provides a means for interacting with more than one shell from a single terminal by using shell layers. A layer is a shell that is bound to a virtual device. The virtual device can be manipulated like an actual terminal by using stty and ioctl() (see stty(1) and ioctl(2)). Each layer has its own process group ID. The user controls these layers by using the commands described below. The current... |
|
show(1m) -- Displays current information about the DTS entity
|
|
The show command displays the names and values of the specified attributes or attribute groups. For attribute groups, if you do not supply a group name with the all argument, all characteristics and their values are displayed. The following sections list names of individual attributes, categorized by group. Note that the attributes displayed by the show command might be different, depending upon w... |
|
showmount(1m) -- show all remote mounts
|
|
showmount lists all clients that have remotely mounted a filesystem from host. This information is maintained by the mountd server on host (see mountd(1M)). The default value for host is the value returned by hostname (see hostname(1)). |
|
show_cached_clearinghouse(1m) -- Displays current information about the specified cached clearinghouse
|
|
The show cached clearinghouse command displays all the names and values of the attributes in the specified cached clearinghouse. The following are valid attributes: |
|
show_cached_server(1m) -- Displays address information of a server in the local clerk's cache
|
|
The show cached server command displays address information of a server in the local clerk's cache. The following list describes the valid attributes: Name The directory cell name Towers The protocol sequence and network address of the server node |
|
show_cdscp_confidence(1m) -- Displays the current confidence level of clerk calls resulting from CDS control program commands
|
|
The show cdscp confidence command displays the current confidence level of clerk calls. A low confidence level means the clerk obtains information from caches or the most convenient server. A medium level means the clerk obtains information directly from a server. A high level means the clerk obtains information only at master replicas. You must use this command within the CDS control program. Exi... |
|
show_cdscp_preferred_clearinghouse(1m) -- Displays the preferred clearinghouse for satisfying read requests that result from CDS control program command
|
|
The show cdscp preferred clearinghouse command displays the preferred clearinghouse for satisfying read requests that result from CDS control program commands. You can only read attribute values for entries stored in the specified clearinghouse. You must use this command within the CDS control program. Exiting from the CDS control program removes the preferred clearinghouse setting. You must reset... |
|
show_cell(1m) -- Displays the information you need to create a cell entry in either DNS or GDS
|
|
The show cell command displays the information you need to create a cell entry in either the Domain Name System (DNS) or the Global Directory Service (GDS). DCE does not support cells registered simultaneously in GDS and DNS. If you want to define a cell in DNS, you can use this command to produce a preformatted set of resource records. You can then edit the appropriate DNS data file and copy the ... |
|
show_child(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the specified child pointer
|
|
The show child command displays the names and values of the attributes specified in attribute-name. You can use a combination of attributes in a single command. Use a space to separate multiple attributes. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to child pointers whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede and follow the ... |
|
show_clearinghouse(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the specified clearinghouse
|
|
The show clearinghouse command displays the names and values of the attributes specified in attribute-name. You can use a combination of attributes in any sequence in a single command. Use a space to separate multiple attributes. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to clearinghouses whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must... |
|
show_clerk(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the CDS clerk on the local system
|
|
The show clerk command displays all the names and values of the clerk attributes on the local system. The clerk must be enabled when you use this command. The following are valid attributes: |
|
show_directory(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the specified directory
|
|
The show directory command displays the names and values of the attributes specified in attribute-name. You can use a combination of attributes in any sequence in a single command. Use a space to separate multiple attributes. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to directories whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must preced... |
|
show_link(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the specified soft link
|
|
The show link command displays the names and values of the attributes specified in attribute-name. You can use a combination of attributes in any sequence in a single command. Use a space to separate multiple attributes. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to soft links whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. A space must precede and ... |
|
show_object(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the specified object entry
|
|
The show object command displays the names and values of the attributes specified in attribute-name. You can use a combination of attributes in a single command. Use a space to separate multiple attributes. You can use a with attribute-name = attribute-value clause to limit output only to object entries whose attributes have values equal to the specified values. If you do not supply any attributes... |
|
show_replica(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the specified replica
|
|
The show replica command displays the directory-specific attributes as well as the per-replica attributes of the specified directory. If you do not supply any attributes, the command displays all attributes and their values; any application-defined attributes that might exist will be included in the output of this command. You can enter one or more of the following attributes: |
|
show_server(1m) -- Displays attribute information about the server running on the local system
|
|
The show server command displays all the names and values from the attributes named in this entity. The server must be enabled when you use this command. The following are valid attribute names: |
|
shutacct(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
shutdown(1m) -- terminate all processing
|
|
The shutdown command is part of the HP-UX system operation procedures. Its primary function is to terminate all currently running processes in an orderly and cautious manner. shutdown can be used to put the system in single-user mode for administrative purposes such as backup or file system consistency checks (see fsck(1M)), to halt or reboot the system, or to make the partition ready for reconfig... |
|
sig_named(1m) -- send signals to the domain name server
|
|
sig_named sends the appropriate signal to the domain name server /usr/sbin/named. The process ID is obtained from /var/run/named.pid or from ps(1) if /var/run/named.pid does not exist. |
|
size(1) -- print section sizes of object files
|
|
size produces section size information for each section in the object files. The size of the text, data and bss (uninitialized data) sections are printed along with the total size of the object file. If an archive file is input to the size command, the information for all archive members is displayed. |
|
sleep(1) -- suspend execution for an interval
|
|
sleep suspends execution for time seconds. It is used to execute a command after a certain amount of time, as in: (sleep 105; command)& or to execute a command periodically, as in: )& or to execute a command periodically, as in: while true do command sleep 37 done |
|
slip(1) -- PPP daemon
|
|
pppd is a daemon process used in UNIX systems to manage connections to other hosts using PPP (Point to Point Protocol) or SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol). It uses the UNIX host's native serial ports. It communicates with the UNIX kernel's own TCP/IP implementation via the HP IP tunnel driver. The functionality supplied by this daemon supersedes that provided by ppl(1) in HP-UX prior to Rele... |
|
slp(1) -- set printing options for a non-serial printer
|
|
slp sets printer formatting options such as the number of lines per page, number of characters per line, and indentation. These characteristics are controlled by the printer driver as described in lp(7). slp acts on the current standard output. |
|
slpd(1m) -- Service Location Protocol Daemon
|
|
The slpd daemon provides the functionality of the Directory Agent and Service Agent for the Service Location Protocol ("SLP") version 2. SLP provides a scalable framework that allows the networking applications to discover the existence, location and configuration of networked services in the enterprise networks. slpd provides the functionality of the following services: |
|
slpdc(1m) -- send signals to the SLP daemon or starts slpd
|
|
slpdc sends the appropriate signal to the SLP daemon or starts slpd /usr/sbin/slpd. The process ID is obtained from /var/run/slpd.pid or from the ps command if /var/run/slpd.pid does not exist (see ps(1)). |
|
slweb(1m) -- start the HP-UX hardware event viewer tool (a Web interface)
|
|
The HP-UX hardware event viewer tool (slweb) can be used to display hardware events from log files or raw hexadecimal word pairs. The slweb command starts the user interface. Once started the help facility of slweb is available and can be used to learn more about slweb by clicking on field labels or column headings. The HP-UX hardware event viewer tool user interface uses a Web browser. Executing ... |
|
smrsh(1m) -- restricted shell for sendmail
|
|
The smrsh program is intended as a replacement for sh for use in the prog mailer in sendmail configuration files. It sharply limits the commands that can be run using the |program syntax of sendmail in order to improve the overall security of your system. Briefly, even if a ``bad guy'' can get sendmail to run a program without going through an alias or forward file, smrsh limits the set of progr... |
|
snmpd(1m) -- Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) process
|
|
The master SNMP agent (snmpdm) and the collection of subagents (/usr/sbin/*agt) that have attached to the master agent, collectively form a single SNMP agent. The SNMP agent accepts SNMP Get, GetNext and Set requests from an SNMP Manager which cause it to read or write the Management Information Base (MIB). The MIB objects are instrumented by the subagents. The master agent can bind to separate pr... |
|
snmpd.ipv6(1m) -- Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) process
|
|
The master SNMP agent (snmpdm) and the collection of subagents (/usr/sbin/*agt) that have attached to the master agent, collectively form a single SNMP agent. The SNMP agent accepts SNMP Get, GetNext and Set requests from an SNMP Manager which cause it to read or write the Management Information Base (MIB). The MIB objects are instrumented by the subagents. The master agent can bind to separate pr... |
|
snmpdm(1m) -- Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) process
|
|
The master SNMP agent (snmpdm) and the collection of subagents (/usr/sbin/*agt) that have attached to the master agent, collectively form a single SNMP agent. The SNMP agent accepts SNMP Get, GetNext and Set requests from an SNMP Manager which cause it to read or write the Management Information Base (MIB). The MIB objects are instrumented by the subagents. The master agent can bind to separate pr... |
|
soelim(1) -- eliminate .so's from nroff input
|
|
soelim reads the specified files or the standard input and performs the textual inclusion implied by nroff directives of the form .so some_file when they appear at the beginning of input lines. This is useful when using programs such as tbl(1) that do not normally do this, allowing placement of individual tables or other text objects in separate files to be run as a part of a large document. An ar... |
|
softpower(1m) -- determine if softpower hardware is installed on the system
|
|
The softpower command determines whether a software controlled power switch is installed on the system. |
|
sort(1) -- sort or merge files
|
|
sort performs one of the following functions: 1. Sorts lines of all the named files together and writes the result to the specified output. 2. Merges lines of all the named (presorted) files together and writes the result to the specified output. 3. Checks that a single input file is correctly presorted. The standard input is read if - is used as a file name or no input files are specified. Compar... |
|
spell(1) -- find spelling errors
|
|
The spell command collects words from the named files and looks them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes, and/or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no files are named, words are collected from the standard input. The spell command ignores most troff, tbl, and eqn constructio... |
|
spellin(1) -- find spelling errors
|
|
The spell command collects words from the named files and looks them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes, and/or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no files are named, words are collected from the standard input. The spell command ignores most troff, tbl, and eqn constructio... |
|
split(1) -- split a file into pieces
|
|
split reads file and writes it in pieces (default 1000 lines) onto a set of output files. The name of the first output file is name with aa appended, and so on lexicographically, up to zz (only ASCII letters are used, a maximum of 676 files). If no output name is given, x is the default. If no input file is given, or if - is given instead, the standard input file is used. |
|
spray(1m) -- spray packets
|
|
spray sends a one-way stream of packets to host using RPC, then reports how many were received by host and what the transfer rate was. The host name can be either a name or an internet address. |
|
sprayd(1m) -- spray server
|
|
sprayd is an RPC server that records the packets sent by spray from another system (see spray(1M)). inetd invokes sprayd through /etc/inetd.conf (see inetd(1M)). |
|
sptr(1) -- terminal print utility
|
|
sptr is a printer utility which support two method -- First Method is LOG PRINT - display the file on the screen then print it out. Second Method is TRANSPARENT PRINT MODE - just print file and non-display. And terminal must be HP or VT mode terminal, printer must be ESC/P printer. |
|
ssp(1) -- remove multiple line-feeds from output
|
|
ssp (single-space) removes redundant blank lines from the standard input and sends the result to the standard output. All blank lines at the beginning of a file are removed, and all multiple blank lines elsewhere in the file (including end-of-file) are reduced to a single blank line. ssp is typically used in pipelines such as nroff -ms file1 | ssp ssp is equivalent to the 4.2BSD cat -s command. To... |
|
st(1m) -- shared tape administration
|
|
The st command provides users with a command-line interface to check the status of a shared tape device or to reclaim a shared tape device from a host system that has failed while holding a reservation on the shared tape device. The st command can also be used for the same purpose on shared library robotic devices. To use the st command you must have root user id. Please see examples below for usa... |
|
startup(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
statd(1m) -- network status monitor
|
|
statd is an RPC server. It interacts with lockd to provide crash and recovery functions for the locking services on NFS (see lockd(1M)). |
|
stconv(1) -- Utility to convert scalable type symbol set map formats
|
|
Intellifont font technology has been obsoleted on HP's X Window System. Support for it will be removed in a future release. This utility will be removed at that time. The stconv utility is used to convert scalable typeface symbol set maps (.sym files) for Intellifont fonts from one symbol list numbering format to another. The installation default symbol sets map their respective symbols into appr... |
|
stlicense(1) -- server access control program for X
|
|
The stlicense program is run interactively by the font administrator to give devices attached to hosts on the network, netdevs, access to typefaces. Responsibility for maintaining security rests with users root, bin, and the owners of the font directories. |
|
stload(1) -- Utility to load Scalable Type outlines
|
|
Intellifont font technology has been obsoleted on HP's X Window System. Support for it will be removed in a future release. This utility will be removed at that time. The stload utility creates scalable typeface libraries (.ifo files) from Agfa Compugraphic Font Access and Interchange Standard (CG/FAIS) data. (An FAIS library on floppy disk or CD-ROM media is the common means of distribution for ... |
|
stm(1m) -- Support Tools Manager
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) provides three interfaces that allow a user access to an underlying toolset, consisting of information modules, firmware update tools, verifiers, diagnostics, exercisers, expert tools, and utilities: XSTM - the graphical interface (for X11-based graphics terminals) MSTM - the menu-based interface (for non-X11-based, non-graphics terminals) CSTM - the command line in... |
|
stmkdirs(1) -- Utility to build Scalable Type fonts.dir and charsets.dir files
|
|
The stmkdirs utility is used to support TrueType, Type1 and Intellifont scalable fonts. It creates the fonts.dir, and charsets.dir files used by the Font Server and Scalable Type subsystem. Intellifont scalable fonts are being obsoleted and will not be supported on a future release of the operating system. Stmkdirs supports scalable typefaces as follows: |
|
stmkfont(1) -- Scalable Typeface font compiler to create X and PCL fonts
|
|
The stmkfont utility is obsolete and will not be supported in future releases. It has been replaced by the fstobdf utility. The stmkfont utility is a bit-mapped font generator for creating X and PCL fonts from Intellifont scalable typeface data. By specifying desired font characteristics via an X Logical Font Description (XLFD) name, the user can instruct stmkfont to generate an almost limitless v... |
|
strace(1m) -- write STREAMS event trace messages to standard output
|
|
strace gets STREAMS event trace messages from STREAMS drivers and modules via the STREAMS log driver (strlog(7)), and writes these messages to standard output. By default, strace without arguments writes all STREAMS trace messages from all drivers and modules. strace with command-line arguments limits the trace messages received. The arguments, which must be specified in groups of three, are: mod ... |
|
strchg(1m) -- change or query stream configuration
|
|
The strchg and strconf commands are used to change or query the configuration of the stream associated with the user's standard input. The strchg command pushes modules on and/or pops modules off the stream. The strconf command queries the configuration of the stream. Only the superuser or owner of a STREAMS device may alter the configuration of that stream. strchg Options The strchg command uses... |
|
strclean(1m) -- remove outdated STREAMS error log files
|
|
strclean cleans the STREAMS error logger directory of log files (error.mm-mm-dd) that contain error messages sent by the STREAMS log driver, strlog(7). If the -d option is not used to specify another directory, strclean removes error log files in the /var/adm/streams directory. If the -a option is not used to specify another age, strclean removes error log files that have not been modified in thre... |
|
strconf(1m) -- change or query stream configuration
|
|
The strchg and strconf commands are used to change or query the configuration of the stream associated with the user's standard input. The strchg command pushes modules on and/or pops modules off the stream. The strconf command queries the configuration of the stream. Only the superuser or owner of a STREAMS device may alter the configuration of that stream. strchg Options The strchg command uses... |
|
strerr(1m) -- receive error messages from the STREAMS log driver
|
|
The strerr daemon receives error messages from the STREAMS log driver (strlog(7)) for addition to the STREAMS error log files (error.mm-mm-dd) in the STREAMS error logger directory (/var/adm/streams by default). When first called, strerr creates the log file error.mm-mm-dd. This is a daily log file, where mm indicates the month and dd indicates the day of the logged messages. strerr then appends e... |
|
strings(1) -- find the printable strings in an object or other binary file
|
|
strings looks for ASCII strings in a file. If no file is specified, standard input is used. A string is any sequence of four or more printing characters ending with a newline or null character. strings is useful for identifying random object files and many other things. |
|
strip(1) -- strip symbol and line number information from an object file
|
|
strip removes the symbol table and line number information from object files, including archives. Thereafter, no symbolic debugging access is available for that file; thus, this command is normally run only on production modules that have been debugged and tested. The effect is nearly identical to using the -s option of ld. |
|
strvf(1m) -- STREAMS verification tool
|
|
strvf executes a series of subcommands that verify whether or not STREAMS is currently installed and configured on your system. All output is sent to stdout. Verbose output is always sent to the logfile /var/adm/streams/strvf.log. These subcommands make sure that the STREAMS kernel daemons are running and that open(), putmsg(), getmsg(), ioctl(), and close() can be performed on /dev/echo. |
|
stty(1) -- set the options for a terminal port
|
|
stty sets or reports current settings of certain terminal I/O options for the device that is the current standard input. The command takes four forms: stty Report the settings of a system-defined set of options; stty -a Report all of current option settings; stty -g Report current settings in a form that can be used as an argument to another stty command. stty options Set terminal I/O options as d... |
|
su(1m) -- 1 -OSF DCE 1.1/HP DCE 1.8 PHSS_26394-96
|
|
|
|
su(1) -- switch user
|
|
The su (set user or superuser) command allows one user to become another user without logging out. username is the name of a user defined in the /etc/passwd file (see passwd(4)). The default name is root (that is, superuser). To use su, the appropriate password must be supplied unless the current user is superuser and is not using the -d option. If a valid password is entered, su executes a new sh... |
|
sum(1) -- print checksum and block or byte count of file(s)
|
|
sum calculates and prints to standard output a checksum for each named file, and also prints the size of the file in 512 byte blocks, rounded up. The default algorithm is a 16-bit sum of the bytes in which overflow is ignored. Alternate algorithms can be selected with the -r and -p options. Standard input is used if no file names are given. sum is typically used to verify data integrity when copyi... |
|
svcdumplog(1) -- Prints contents of a binary serviceability log file
|
|
The svcdumplog program will print the contents of a binary log file. DCE components log important information about their activities and state via the DCE serviceability interface. The log messages can be routed as desired via the dcecp log object. The messages can also be written in either binary or in text format (information about specifying message format can be found in svcroute(5)). When bin... |
|
swacl(1m) -- view or modify the Access Control Lists (ACLs) which protect software products
|
|
The swacl command displays or modifies the Access Control Lists (ACLs) which: + Protect the specified target_selections (hosts, software depots or root filesystems). + Protect the specified software_selections on each of the specified target_selections (software depots only). All root filesystems, software depots, and products in software depots are protected by ACLs. The SD commands permit or pre... |
|
swagent(1m) -- serve local or remote SD software management tasks, daemon that invokes swagent, respectively
|
|
The roles of UNIX target and source systems require two processes known as the daemon and agent. For most purposes, the distinction between these two processes is invisible to the user and they can be viewed as a single process. Each SD command interacts with the daemon and agent to perform its requested tasks. The swagentd daemon process must be scheduled before a UNIX system is available as a ta... |
|
swagentd(1m) -- serve local or remote SD software management tasks, daemon that invokes swagent, respectively
|
|
The roles of UNIX target and source systems require two processes known as the daemon and agent. For most purposes, the distinction between these two processes is invisible to the user and they can be viewed as a single process. Each SD command interacts with the daemon and agent to perform its requested tasks. The swagentd daemon process must be scheduled before a UNIX system is available as a ta... |
|
swapinfo(1m) -- system paging space information
|
|
swapinfo prints information about device and file system paging space. (Note: the term `swap' refers to an obsolete implementation of virtual memory; HP-UX actually implements virtual memory by way of paging rather than swapping. This command and others retain names derived from `swap' for historical reasons.) By default, swapinfo prints to standard output a two line header as shown here, follow... |
|
swapon(1m) -- enable device or file system for paging
|
|
The swapon command enables devices or file systems on which paging is to take place. (NOTE: the term `swap' refers to an obsolete implementation of virtual memory; HP-UX actually implements virtual memory by way of paging rather than swapping. This command and others retain names derived from `swap' for historical reasons.) By enabling a device for paging, the device can be accessed directly (wi... |
|
swask(1m) -- ask for user response
|
|
The swask command runs interactive software request scripts for the software objects selected to one or more targets specified by target_selections. These scripts store the responses in a response file (named response) for later use by the swinstall and swconfig commands. The swinstall and swconfig commands can also run the interactive request scripts directly, using the ask option. If the -s opti... |
|
swconfig(1m) -- configure, unconfigure, or reconfigure installed software
|
|
The swconfig command configures, unconfigures, or reconfigures installed software products for execution on the specified targets. The swconfig command transitions software between INSTALLED and CONFIGURED states. Although software is automatically configured as part of the swinstall command and unconfigured as part of the swremove command, swconfig lets you configure or unconfigure software indep... |
|
swcopy(1m) -- install and configure software products; software products for subsequent installation or distribution; respec
|
|
The swinstall command installs the software_selections from a software source to either the local host or, in the case of the HP OpenView Software Distributor product, to one or more target_selections (root filesystems). By default, the software is configured for use on the target after it is installed. (The software is not configured when installed into an alternate root directory.) The swcopy co... |
|
swinstall(1m) -- install and configure software products; software products for subsequent installation or distribution; respec
|
|
The swinstall command installs the software_selections from a software source to either the local host or, in the case of the HP OpenView Software Distributor product, to one or more target_selections (root filesystems). By default, the software is configured for use on the target after it is installed. (The software is not configured when installed into an alternate root directory.) The swcopy co... |
|
swjob(1m) -- display and monitor job information and create and remove jobs; invoke graphical user interface to display and
|
|
The swjob command displays job information and removes jobs. It supports these features: + Display the current install jobs, copy jobs, and other SD jobs initiated by the SD commands. + Specify a specific job to list or remove. + Display the command logfile for a specific job. + Display the target logfile for a specific target. |
|
swlist(1m) -- display information about software products
|
|
The swlist command displays information about software products installed at or available from the specified target_selections. It supports these features: + Specify bundles, products, subproducts, and/or filesets to list. + Display the files contained in each fileset. + Display a table of contents from a software source. + Specify the attributes to display for each software object. + Display all ... |
|
swmodify(1m) -- modify software products in a target root or depot
|
|
The swmodify command modifies the definitions of software objects installed into a primary or alternate root, or available from a software depot. It supports the following features: + adding new objects - The user can add new bundles, products, subproducts, filesets, control files, and files to existing objects (which will contain them). + deleting existing objects - The user can delete existing b... |
|
swpackage(1m) -- package software products into a target depot or tape
|
|
The swpackage command is not distributed; it only operates on the local host. It packages software products into: + a distribution directory (which can be accessed directly or copied onto a CD-ROM), + a distribution tape, such as DDS, nine-track or cartridge tapes. A software product is organized into a three-level hierarchy: products, subproducts, and filesets. The actual files that make up a pro... |
|
swreg(1m) -- register or unregister depots and roots
|
|
The swreg command controls the visibility of depots and roots to users who are performing software management tasks. It must be used to register depots created by swpackage. By default, the swcopy command registers newly created depots. By default, the swinstall command registers newly created alternate roots (the root, "/", is not automatically registered). The swremove command unregisters a de... |
|
swremove(1m) -- unconfigure and remove software products
|
|
The swremove command removes software_selections from target_selections (e.g. root file systems). When removing installed software, swremove also unconfigures the software before it is removed. The software is not unconfigured when removed from an alternate root directory since it was not configured during installation. When removing available software (within a depot), swremove also does not perf... |
|
swverify(1m) -- verify software products
|
|
The swverify command verifies the software_selections at one or more target_selections (e.g. root filesystems). When verifying installed software, swverify checks software states, dependency relationships, file existence and integrity, in addition to executing vendor-supplied verification scripts. The swverify command also verifies software_selections at one or more target depots. For target depot... |
|
sync(1m) -- synchronize file systems
|
|
sync executes the sync() system call (see sync(2)). If the system is to be stopped, the sync command must be called to ensure file system integrity. sync flushes all previously unwritten system buffers including modified super blocks, modified inodes, and delayed block I/O out to disk. This ensures that all file modifications are properly saved before performing a critical operation such as a syst... |
|
syncer(1m) -- periodically sync for file system integrity
|
|
syncer is a program that periodically executes sync() at an interval determined by the input argument seconds (see sync(2)). If seconds is not specified, the default interval is every 30 seconds. This ensures that the file system is fairly up-to-date in case of a crash. This command should not be executed directly, but should be executed at system boot time via startup script /sbin/init.d/syncer. ... |
|
synchronize(1m) -- Causes the DTS entity to synchronize the clock on the system where the command is entered.
|
|
The synchronize command causes the DTS clerk or server to solicit time intervals from servers, compute the intersection of the time intervals, and adjust the system clock to the midpoint of the computed time interval. This command overrides the functions of the synchronization hold down characteristic. |
|
sysdef(1m) -- display system definition
|
|
Note: sysdef will not be supported in future releases of HP-UX (refer to WARNINGS section below). So users are advised to use the kctune(1M) utility which provides additional information on kernel tunable parameters. The command sysdef analyzes the currently running system and reports on its tunable configuration parameters. kernel and master are not used, but can be specified for standards compli... |
|
syslogd(1m) -- log system messages
|
|
The syslogd command reads and logs messages into a set of files described by the configuration file /etc/syslog.conf. |
|
tabs(1) -- set tabs on a terminal
|
|
tabs sets the tab stops on the user's terminal according to the tab specification tabspec, after clearing any previous settings. The user's terminal must have remotely-settable hardware tabs. If you are using a non-HP terminal, you should keep in mind that behavior will vary for some tab settings. Four types of tab specification are accepted for tabspec: ``canned'', repetitive, arbitrary, and ... |
|
tail(1) -- deliver the last part of a file
|
|
tail copies the named file to the standard output beginning at a designated place. If no file is named, standard input is used. |
|
talk(1) -- talk to another user
|
|
The talk utility is a two-way, screen-oriented communication program. The command argument talk_party can take one the following forms: user user@host @host host host!user !user user host:user :user user host.user where .user where user where user is a login name and host is a host name. The optional command argument, ttyname, can be used to specify the terminal to be used when contacting a user w... |
|
talkd(1m) -- remote user communication server
|
|
Talkd is the server that notifies a user that someone wants to initiate a conversation. It acts as a repository of invitations, responding to requests by clients wishing to initiate a conversation. To initiate a conversation, the client (the talk command) sends a message of type LOOK_UP to the server (see /usr/include/protocols/talkd.h). This causes the server to search its invitation table to che... |
|
tar(1) -- tape file archiver
|
|
The tar command saves and restores archives of files on a magnetic tape, a flexible disk, or a regular file. The default archive file is /dev/rmt/0m. See the -f option below. Its actions are controlled by the key argument. |
|
tbl(1) -- format tables for nroff
|
|
tbl is a preprocessor that formats tables for nroff(1). The input files are copied to the standard output, except for lines between .TS and .TE command lines, which are assumed to describe tables and are re-formatted by tbl. (The .TS and .TE command lines are not altered by tbl). .TS is followed by global options. The available global options are: center center the table (default is left-adjust); ... |
|
tconv(1) -- HP 9000 Traditional-Chinese code converter
|
|
tconv is a code converter to do code conversion from CCDC/Big5/EUCCNS(locale: zh_TW.ccdc/zh_TW.big5/zh_TW.eucTW) internal code to another local Taiwanese 2-byte or 3-byte Traditional-Chinese internal code, or to Unicode in UCS2 or UTF8 format; as well the conversion of Big5 code(Traditional-Chinese) to GB code(Simplified-Chinese) (locale:zh_CN.hp15CN) or GBK code. It provides fourteen processing m... |
|
tcpd(1m) -- access control facility for internet services
|
|
The tcpd program can be set up to monitor the incoming requests for telnet, finger, ftp, exec, rsh, rlogin, tftp, talk, and other services that have a one-to-one mapping onto executable files. The program supports both 4.3BSD-style sockets and System V.4-style TLI. The functionality may be limited when the protocol underneath TLI is not an internet protocol. The operation is as follows: Whenever a... |
|
tcpdchk(1) -- check tcp wrapper configuration
|
|
tcpdchk examines the tcp wrapper configuration and reports all potential and real problems it can encounter. The command examines the tcpd access control files (by default, these are /etc/hosts.allow and /etc/hosts.deny), and compares the entries in these files against entries in the inetd configuration file. tcpdchk reports the following types of problems: non-existent pathnames, services that ap... |
|
tcpdmatch(1) -- evaluate tcp wrapper service requests
|
|
tcpdmatch predicts how the tcp wrapper would handle a specific request for service. Examples are given below. The program examines the tcpd access control tables (default /etc/hosts.allow and /etc/hosts.deny) and prints its conclusion. For maximum accuracy, it extracts additional information from the inetd configuration file. When tcpdmatch finds a match in the access control tables, it identifies... |
|
tee(1) -- pipe fitting
|
|
The tee command transcribes the standard input to the standard output and makes copies in the files. |
|
telnet(1) -- user interface to the TELNET protocol
|
|
telnet is used to communicate with another host using the TELNET protocol. If telnet is invoked without arguments, it enters command mode, indicated by its prompt (telnet>). In this mode, it accepts and executes the commands listed below. If telnet is invoked with arguments, it performs an open command (see below) with those arguments. Once a connection has been opened, telnet enters an input mode... |
|
telnetd(1m) -- TELNET protocol server
|
|
The telnetd daemon executes a server that supports the DARPA standard TELNET virtual terminal protocol. The Internet daemon (inetd) executes telnetd when it receives a service request at the port listed in the services database for telnet using the tcp protocol (see inetd(1M) and services(4)). telnetd operates by allocating a Telnet pseudo-terminal device (see tels(7)) for a client, then creating ... |
|
test(1) -- condition evaluation command
|
|
The test command evaluates the expression expr and, if its value is True, returns a zero (true) exit status; otherwise, a nonzero (false) exit status is returned. test also returns a nonzero exit status if there are no arguments. The following primitives are used to construct expr: -r file True if file exists and is readable. -w file True if file exists and is writable. -x file True if file exists... |
|
tftp(1) -- trivial file transfer program
|
|
tftp is the user interface to the Internet TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol), that allows users to transfer files to and from a remote machine. The remote host can be specified on the command line, in which case tftp uses host as the default host for future transfers (see the connect command below). |
|
tftpd(1m) -- trivial file transfer protocol server
|
|
tftpd is a server that supports the Internet Trivial File Transfer Protocol (RFC783). The TFTP server operates at the port indicated in the tftp service description (see services(4)). The server is normally started by inetd using the /etc/inetd.conf file (see inetd(1M) and inetd.conf(4)). |
|
tic(1m) -- terminfo compiler
|
|
tic translates terminfo files from source format into the compiled format. Results are placed in the directory /usr/share/lib/terminfo. -vn Specifies that (verbose) output be written to standard error trace information showing tic's progress. The optional integer n is a number from 1 to 10, inclusive, indicating the desired level of detail of information. If n is omitted, the default level is 1. ... |
|
time(1) -- time a command
|
|
command is executed. Upon completion, time prints the elapsed time during the command, the time spent in the system, and the time spent executing the command. Times are reported in seconds. Execution time can depend on the performance of the memory in which the program is running. The times are printed on standard error. Note that the shell also has a keyword time that times an entire pipeline if ... |
|
timex(1) -- time a command; report process data and system activity
|
|
timex reports in seconds the elapsed time, user time, and system time spent in execution of the given command. Optionally, process accounting data for command and all its children can be listed or summarized, and total system activity during the execution interval can be reported. The output of timex is written on the standard error. Timex returns an exit status of 1 if it is used incorrectly, if ... |
|
top(1) -- display and update information about the top processes on the system
|
|
top displays the top processes on the system and periodically updates the information. Raw CPU percentage is used to rank the processes. On a PA-RISC, hard-partitionable platform, top issues a warning that it reports only for the current partition and it has to be run on other partitions if their status is required. |
|
touch(1) -- update access, modification, and/or change times of file
|
|
touch updates the access, modification, and last-change times of each argument. The file name is created if it does not exist. If no time is specified (see date(1)) the current time is used. The -r and -t options are mutually exclusive. |
|
tput(1) -- query terminfo database
|
|
The tput command uses the terminfo database to make terminal-dependent capabilities and information available to the shell (see terminfo(4)). The tput command outputs a string if the attribute (capname) is of type string, or an integer if the attribute is of type integer. If the attribute is of type boolean, tput simply sets the exit code (0 for TRUE, 1 for FALSE), and produces no output. |
|
tr(1) -- translate characters
|
|
tr copies the standard input to the standard output with substitution or deletion of selected characters. Input characters from string1 are replaced with the corresponding characters in string2. If necessary, string1 and string2 can be quoted to avoid pattern matching by the shell. tr recognizes the following command line options: -A Translates on a byte-by-byte basis. When this flag is specified ... |
|
true(1) -- return exit status zero or one respectively
|
|
The command true does nothing, and returns exit code zero. The command false does nothing, and returns exit code one. They are typically used to construct command procedures. |
|
tryfrom(1) -- utility programs for TCP Wrappers
|
|
tryfrom This program identifies the end-point details related to a connection. This program must be called via a remote shell command as shown below. It is used to find out if the hostname and the address are properly recognized, and also if the username lookup works properly. # remsh host /usr/bin/tryfrom tryfrom prints the following output when it is invoked: client address (%a): client hostname... |
|
tset(1) -- terminal-dependent initialization
|
|
tset sets up the terminal when logging in on an HP-UX system. It does terminal-dependent processing, such as setting erase and kill characters, setting or resetting delays, and sending any sequences needed to properly initialize the terminal. It first determines the type of terminal involved, then does the necessary initializations and mode settings. The type of terminal attached to each HP-UX por... |
|
tsm(1) -- Terminal Session Manager
|
|
tsm allows a user to interact with more than one shell or application (session) from a single terminal. Each session is bound to a virtual device emulating the physical terminal. The emulation includes maintaining display state, softkeys, and terminal modes for each session. The virtual device can be manipulated like the actual terminal by using stty and ioctl (see stty(1) and ioctl(2)). Additiona... |
|
tsm.command(1) -- send commands to the Terminal Session Manager (TSM)
|
|
tsm.command is used to send a command string programmaticly to the Terminal Session Manager (TSM), as if the string were typed on the TSM command line. tsm.command fails unless it is run from inside a TSM session. Actions caused by tsm.command affect only the instance of TSM that tsm.command is run under. command can have any value that is a valid key sequence for the TSM command line. The sequenc... |
|
tsm.info(1) -- get Terminal Session Manager state information
|
|
tsm.info is used to obtain information about TSM. When run from inside a TSM session it returns valid information; otherwise it fails with a nonzero error code. Information returned is written to standard output. request can have any of the following values: is_a_window Successful (returns zero) if executed from a TSM session, nonzero error code otherwise. session_number Writes the session number ... |
|
tsm.lpadmin(1m) -- add or remove a printer for use with tsm(1)
|
|
tsm.lpadmin is used to add (or remove) a printer to the LP spooling system when the printer is connected to the system through a terminal running the Terminal Session Manager (see tsm(1)). tsm.lpadmin is a shell script that uses lpadmin in the normal way but also creates a named pipe to which LP output is directed (see lpadmin(1)). This named pipe is opened by TSM and data flowing from it is sent ... |
|
tsort(1) -- topological sort
|
|
tsort produces on the standard output a totally ordered list of items consistent with a partial ordering of items mentioned in the input text file. If no file is specified, the standard input is understood. tsort is generally used in conjunction with the lorder command to sort the objects to be installed in a library by ar (see lorder(1) and ar(1)). The input consists of pairs of text items (nonem... |
|
ttsyncd(1m) -- Daemon to maintain the nis+ password table in sync with the nis+ trusted table.
|
|
ttsyncd checks that each login name in the nis+ password (passwd) table appears in the nis+ trusted table. It will create a user entry in the trusted table for every user that exists in the password table and NOT in the trusted table. Each nis+ user can potentially log in to an HP trusted system; thus, ttsyncd aids trusted systems by creating an entry in the trusted table before the nis+ user logs... |
|
tty(1) -- get the name of the terminal
|
|
tty and pty print the path name of the user's terminal. The -s option inhibits printing of the terminal path name and any diagnostics, providing a means to test only the exit code. |
|
ttytype(1) -- terminal identification program
|
|
ttytype automatically identifies the current terminal type by sending an identification request sequence to the terminal. This method works for local, modem, and remote terminal connections, as well as for the hpterm and xterm terminal emulators. Once the terminal has been identified, ttytype prints the terminal's type to the standard output (see terminfo(4)). This string is usually used as the v... |
|
tunefs(1m) -- tune up an existing HFS file system
|
|
The tunefs command is used to alter dynamic parameters that affect HFS file system layout policies. Parameters to be altered are specified by the options and arguments provided on the command line as described below. tunefs affects how the file system blocks are laid out on the disk. The default rotdelay value set by the newfs and mkfs commands (see newf ) is 0 milliseconds, causing file system bl... |
|
tunefs_hfs(1m) -- tune up an existing HFS file system
|
|
The tunefs command is used to alter dynamic parameters that affect HFS file system layout policies. Parameters to be altered are specified by the options and arguments provided on the command line as described below. tunefs affects how the file system blocks are laid out on the disk. The default rotdelay value set by the newfs and mkfs commands (see newf ) is 0 milliseconds, causing file system bl... |
|
turnacct(1m) -- shell procedures for accounting
|
|
chargefee Can be invoked to charge a number of units to login- name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records during the night. ckpacct Should be initiated via cron(1M). It periodically checks the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked with argument switch. If the number of free disk blocks in the /var file sy... |
|
u370(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
u3b(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
u3b10(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
u3b2(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
u3b5(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
udcc(1) -- user-defined character raster font compiler
|
|
udcc compiles udc_file in UDC raster font format, and merges it with font_file. Font file specified by font_file must be in PCF (Portable Compiled Format) . The merged file is written to the dest_file in PCF. If udc_file is omitted, the standard input is read. If dest_file is not specified, the standard output is used. |
|
udpublickey(1m) -- update the publickey database file and the NIS map
|
|
udpublickey is executed from the updaters(1M) makefile when either newkey or rpc.ypupdated updates the /etc/publickey database file. udpublickey receives the following information from newkey or rpc.ypupdated: Requestor's name (a string) Type of update Number of bytes in key Key Number of bytes in data Data After receiving this information, udpublickey attempts to update the publickey database fi... |
|
ul(1) -- do underlining
|
|
ul reads the named files (or standard input if none are given) and translates occurrences of underscores to the sequence which indicates underlining for the terminal in use, as specified by the environment variable TERM. The -t option overrides the terminal type specified in the environment. The terminfo(4) file corresponding to TERM is read to determine the appropriate sequences for underlining. ... |
|
umask(1) -- set or display the file mode creation mask
|
|
The umask command sets the value of the file mode creation mask or displays the current one. The mask affects the initial value of the file mode (permission) bits for subsequently created files. |
|
umodem(1) -- XMODEM-protocol file transfer program
|
|
umodem is a file transfer program that incorporates the well-known XMODEM protocol used on CP/M systems and on the HP 110 portable computer. |
|
umount(1m) -- mount and unmount file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. directory, which must already exist, will become the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. special and directory must be given as absolute path na... |
|
umountall(1m) -- mount and unmount multiple file systems
|
|
mountall is used to mount file systems according to file_system_table. By default, /etc/fstab is the file_system_table. If a dash (-) is specified, mountall reads file_system_table from the standard input; the standard input must be in the same format as the /etc/fstab. Before each file system is mounted, a check is done using fsck (see fsck(1M)) to ensure that the file system is mountable. If the... |
|
umount_cdfs(1m) -- mount and unmount CDFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. directory, which must already exist, will become the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. special and directory must be given as absolute path na... |
|
umount_hfs(1m) -- mount and unmount HFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. directory, which must already exist, will become the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. special and directory must be given as absolute path na... |
|
umount_lofs(1m) -- mount and unmount LOFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts LOFS file systems. Only superuser can mount LOFS file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. mount, attaches special_directory, a directory from one of the mounted file systems, to directory, an another directory in one of the mounted file systems. This enables new file systems to be created, which provide access to existing directories or file sy... |
|
umount_nfs(1m) -- mount and unmount NFS file systems
|
|
The mount command mounts file systems. Only a superuser can mount file systems. Other users can use mount to list mounted file systems. The mount command attaches host:path to :path to path to directory. host is a remote system, path is a directory on this remote system and directory is a directory on the local file tree. directory must already exist, be given as an absolute path name and will bec... |
|
umount_vxfs(1m) -- mount and unmount VxFS file systems
|
|
mount attaches special, a removable file system, to directory, a directory on the file tree. (This directory is also known as the mount point). directory, which must already exist, becomes the name of the root of the newly mounted file system. If you omit either special or directory, mount attempts to determine the missing value from an entry in /etc/fstab. mount can be invoked on any removable fi... |
|
unadvertise(1m) -- Removes the global server entry from the cell profile
|
|
The unadvertise command causes DTS to remove the server's name from the cell profile and binding from the related CDS entry, deleting the server's global status. |
|
unalias(1) -- standard and restricted POSIX.2-conformant command shells
|
|
Shell Invocation Tilde Substitution Environment Options Command Substitution Functions rsh Restrictions Parameter Substitution Jobs Definitions Blank Interpretation Signals Commands File Name Generation Execution Simple Commands Quoting Command Reentry Compound Commands Arithmetic Evaluation Command Line Editing Special Commands Prompting emacs/gmacs Editing Mode Comments Conditional Expressions v... |
|
uname(1) -- display information about computer system; set node name (system name)
|
|
In the first form above, the uname command displays selected information about the current computer system, derived from the utsname structure (see uname(2)). In the second form, uname sets the node name (system name) that is used in the utsname structure. |
|
uncompact(1) -- compact and uncompact files, and cat them
|
|
compact compresses the named files using an adaptive Huffman code. If no file names are given, standard input is compacted and sent to the standard output. compact operates as an on-line algorithm. Each time a byte is read, it is encoded immediately according to the current prefix code. This code is an optimal Huffman code for the set of frequencies seen so far. It is unnecessary to attach a decod... |
|
uncompress(1) -- compress and expand data
|
|
The following commands compress and uncompress files and directory subtrees as indicated: compress Reduce the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. If reduction is possible, each file is replaced by a new file of the same name with the suffix .Z added to indicate that it is a compressed file. Original ownership, modes, access, and modification times are preserved. If no file is... |
|
uncompressd(1) -- compress and expand data
|
|
The following commands compress and uncompress files and directory subtrees as indicated: compress Reduce the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. If reduction is possible, each file is replaced by a new file of the same name with the suffix .Z added to indicate that it is a compressed file. Original ownership, modes, access, and modification times are preserved. If no file is... |
|
unexpand(1) -- expand tabs to spaces, and vice versa
|
|
expand processes the named files or the standard input and writes to the standard output with tabs changed into spaces. Backspace characters are preserved in the output, and the column count is decreased by one column for tab calculations. For proper tab calculation, if a multi-column character is to be "backspace'd", it should be followed by multiple backspace characters which equal to it's c... |
|
unget(1) -- undo a previous get of an SCCS file
|
|
The unget command undoes the effect of a get -e done prior to creating the intended new delta. If file is a directory name, unget treats each file in the directory as a file to be processed, except that non-SCCS files and unreadable files are silently ignored. If - is specified for file, the standard input is read with each line being taken as the name of an SCCS file to be processed. Refer to sac... |
|
unifdef(1) -- remove preprocessor lines
|
|
unifdef simulates some of the actions of cpp in interpreting C language preprocessor command lines (see cpp(1)). For unifdef, a valid preprocessor command line contains as its first character a # and one of the following keywords: ifdef, ifndef, if, else, or endif. The # character and its associated keyword must appear on the same line, but they can be separated by spaces, tabs, and commented text... |
|
uniq(1) -- report repeated lines in a file
|
|
uniq reads the input text file input_file, comparing adjacent lines, and copies the result to output_file. If input_file is not specified, the standard input and standard output are used. If input_file is specified, but output_file is not, results are printed to standard output. input_file and output_file must not be the same file. |
|
units(1) -- conversion program
|
|
units converts quantities expressed in various standard scales to their equivalents in other scales. It works interactively as follows: System Prompt User Response You have: inch You want: cm The system responds with two factors; one used if multiplying (preceded by *), the other if dividing (preceded by /): * 2.540000e+00 / 3.937008e-01 After providing the conversion factors, units prompts for th... |
|
unlink(1m) -- execute link() and unlink() system calls without error checking
|
|
The link and unlink commands perform their respective system calls (link() or unlink()) on their arguments, abandoning most error checking. These commands can be executed only by users who have appropriate privileges. |
|
unpack(1) -- compress and expand files
|
|
pack attempts to store the specified files in a compressed form. Wherever possible, each input file name is replaced by a packed file name.z with the same ownership, modes, and access and modification times. The .z with the same ownership, modes, and access and modification times. The -f option forces packing of name. This is useful for causing an entire directory to be packed even if some of the ... |
|
untic(1m) -- terminfo de-compiler
|
|
untic translates a terminfo file from the compiled format into the source format. If the environment variable TERMINFO is set to a path name, untic checks for a compiled terminfo description of the terminal under the path specified by TERMINFO before checking /usr/share/lib/terminfo. Otherwise, only /usr/share/lib/terminfo is checked. Normally untic uses the terminal type obtained from the TERM en... |
|
update-ux(1m) -- updates the HP-UX operating system from new HP-UX media
|
|
The update-ux command updates the HP-UX operating system to a newer version. Use update-ux when updating the operating system (OS), and installing or changing operating environments (OEs). update-ux works only with source depots containing the OS and OEs such as HP-UX 11i OE DVDs. When using other media as source, use swinstall(1M) instead. update-ux will always attempt to update the OS. These bun... |
|
updaters(1m) -- configuration file for NIS updating
|
|
updaters is a makefile used for updating the Network Information Service (NIS) databases. Databases can be updated only if the network is secure, that is, only if there is a NIS publickey database ( publickey.byname). The default updaters script will update only the publickey.byname map. An entry in the file is a make target for a particular NIS database. For example, if you wanted to add passwd.b... |
|
ups_mond(1m) -- HP PowerTrust Uninterruptible Power System monitor daemon
|
|
When it detects a loss of AC power for a period of time exceeding a configured limit, ups_mond ensures file system integrity by shutting down HP-UX. To do this, ups_mond uses the device special files specified in its configuration file (/etc/ups_conf by default) to monitor the state of each HP PowerTrust Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) attached to the system. Use the -f option to specify a conf... |
|
uptime(1) -- show how long system has been up, and/or who is logged in and what they are doing
|
|
uptime prints the current time, the length of time the system has been up, the number of users logged on to the system, and the average number of jobs in the run queue over the last 1, 5, and 15 minutes for the active processors. w is linked to uptime and prints the same output as uptime -w, displaying a summary of the current activity on the system. |
|
useradd(1m) -- add a new user login to the system
|
|
The useradd command creates a user login on the system by adding the appropriate entry to the /etc/passwd file and any security files, modifying the /etc/group file as necessary, creating a home directory, and copying the appropriate default files into the home directory depending on the command line options. The new login remains locked until the passwd (see passwd(1)) command is invoked. |
|
userdel(1m) -- delete a user login from the system
|
|
The userdel command deletes a user login from the system by modifying the appropriate login related files. The userdel command requires the login argument. login is the name to be deleted, specified as a string of printable characters. It may not contain a colon (:) or a newline (\n). |
|
usermod(1m) -- modify a user login on the system
|
|
The usermod command modifies a user login on the system by changing the appropriate login related files. The usermod command requires the login argument. login is a new login name, specified as a string of printable characters. It may not contain a colon (:) or a newline (\n). |
|
users(1) -- compact list of users who are on the system
|
|
users lists the login names of the users currently on the system in a compact, one-line format. The login names are sorted in ascending collation order (see Environment Variables below). |
|
utmp2wtmp(1m) -- overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
|
|
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. The shell procedures, described in acctsh(1M), are built on top of the C programs. Connect time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into the utmps database. The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file into sessio... |
|
utmpd(1m) -- user accounting database daemon
|
|
utmpd, user accounting database daemon, manages the user accounting database which is the database of currently logged-in users. This was previously maintained by /etc/utmp and /etc/utmpx files on HP-UX. Upon startup, utmpd writes its pid to the file /etc/useracct/utmpd_pid. Applications can add, update, or query entries into the database using the getuts() APIs. See the getuts(3C) manual page for... |
|
uucheck(1m) -- check the uucp directories and permissions file
|
|
The uucp commands, including uucheck, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uucheck checks for the presence of the files and directories required by uucp (see uucp(1)). uucheck is executed from the UUCP makefile before the installation occurs. uucheck also checks for various obvious errors in the /etc/uucp/Permissions file. |
|
uucico(1m) -- transfer files for the uucp system
|
|
The uucp commands, including uucico, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uucico scans the /var/spool/uucp directories for work files. If such files exist, a connection to a remote system is attempted using the line protocol for the remote system specified in file /etc/uucp/Systems. uucico then executes all requests for work and logs the results. |
|
uuclean(1m) -- uucp spool directory clean-up
|
|
The uucp commands, including uuclean, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uuclean scans the spool directories for files with the specified prefix and deletes all those that are older than the specified number of hours. |
|
uucleanup(1m) -- uucp spool directory clean-up
|
|
The uucp commands, including uucleanup, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uucleanup scans the spool directories for old files and takes appropriate action to remove them. Depending on the options selected, uucleanup performs the following: + Informs the requestor of send and/or receive requests for systems that cannot be reached. + Returns mail that cannot be delivered t... |
|
uucp(1) -- UNIX system to UNIX system copy
|
|
uucp copies files named by the source_files argument to the destination identified by the destination_file argument. When copying files to or from a remote system, source_files and destination_file can be a path name on the local system, or have the form: system_name!path_!path_path_name where system_name is the name of a remote system in a list of system names known to uucp. When copying files to... |
|
uucpd(1m) -- UUCP over TCP/IP server daemon
|
|
The uucp commands, including uucpd, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uucpd is the server for supporting UUCP connections over TCP/IP networks. uucpd is invoked by inetd(1M) when a UUCP connection is established (that is, a connection to the port indicated in the "uucp" service specification; see services(4)), and executes the following protocol: 1) The server prompts ... |
|
uudecode(1) -- encode/decode a binary file for transmission by mailer
|
|
uuencode and uudecode can be used to send a binary file to another machine by means of such services as elm(1), mailx(1), or uucp(1) (see elm(1), mailx(1), and uucp(1)). uuencode takes the named source file (default standard input) and produces an encoded version on the standard output. The encoding uses only printing ASCII characters, includes the original mode of the input file, and preserves th... |
|
uuencode(1) -- encode/decode a binary file for transmission by mailer
|
|
uuencode and uudecode can be used to send a binary file to another machine by means of such services as elm(1), mailx(1), or uucp(1) (see elm(1), mailx(1), and uucp(1)). uuencode takes the named source file (default standard input) and produces an encoded version on the standard output. The encoding uses only printing ASCII characters, includes the original mode of the input file, and preserves th... |
|
uugetty(1m) -- set terminal type, modes, speed and line discipline
|
|
The uucp commands, including uugetty, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uugetty sets terminal type, modes, speed and line discipline. It is similar to getty, except that uugetty supports using the line in both directions (see getty(1M)). This allows users to log in, but, if the line is free, uucico, cu, and ct can dial out (see uucico(1), cu(1), and ct(1)). When devices ... |
|
uuidgen(1) -- Generates a Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)
|
|
The uuidgen command creates a UUID string that you assign to an object to uniquely identify it. One such use is in the UUID interface attribute of an IDL interface definition. The format for representing a UUID string consists of eight hexadecimal digits followed by a dash, followed by three groups of four hexadecimal digits separated by dashes, followed by a dash and twelve hexadecimal digits: 01... |
|
uulog(1) -- UNIX system to UNIX system copy
|
|
uucp copies files named by the source_files argument to the destination identified by the destination_file argument. When copying files to or from a remote system, source_files and destination_file can be a path name on the local system, or have the form: system_name!path_!path_path_name where system_name is the name of a remote system in a list of system names known to uucp. When copying files to... |
|
uuls(1m) -- list spooled uucp transactions grouped by transaction
|
|
The uucp commands, including uuls, are targeted for removal from HPUX; see the WARNINGS below. This command lists the contents of UUCP spool directories (default /var/spool/uucp/*) with the files in each directory grouped into three categories: + Transactions, + Orphans, and + Others. |
|
uuname(1) -- UNIX system to UNIX system copy
|
|
uucp copies files named by the source_files argument to the destination identified by the destination_file argument. When copying files to or from a remote system, source_files and destination_file can be a path name on the local system, or have the form: system_name!path_!path_path_name where system_name is the name of a remote system in a list of system names known to uucp. When copying files to... |
|
uupath(1) -- access and manage the pathalias database
|
|
The uucp commands, including uupath and mkuupath, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uupath provides electronic message routing by expanding a simple UUCP address into a full UUCP path (see uucp(1)). For example, host!user could be expanded into !user could be expanded into user could be expanded into hostA!hostB!host!user. !hostB!host!user. hostB!host!user. !host!user. h... |
|
uupick(1) -- public UNIX system to UNIX system file copy
|
|
uuto sends source-files to destination. uuto uses the uucp facility to send files (see uucp(1)), while allowing the local system to control the file access. A source-file name is a path name on your machine. Destination has the form: system!user where !user where user where system is taken from a list of system names that uucp knows about (see uuname in uucp(1) manual entry). user is the login nam... |
|
uusched(1m) -- schedule uucp transport files
|
|
The uucp commands, including uusched, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uusched is the UUCP file transport scheduler. It is usually started by the daemon uudemon.hour, which is started by cron (see cron(1M)) from the following entry in /var/spool/cron: 39 * * * * /usr/bin/su uucp -c */usr/lbin/uucp/uudemon.hour > /dev/null* |
|
uusnap(1m) -- show snapshot of the UUCP system
|
|
The uucp commands, including uusnap, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uusnap displays in tabular format a synopsis of the current UUCP situation. The format of each line is as follows: site N Cmds N Data N Xqts Message Where site is the name of the site with work, N is a count of each of the three possible types of work (command, data, or remote execute), and Message is... |
|
uusnaps(1m) -- sort and embellish uusnap output
|
|
The uucp commands, including uusnaps, are targeted for removal from HP-UX; see the WARNINGS below. uusnaps runs uusnap (see uusnap(1M)) and post-processes the output into a more useful form. It sorts output lines in ``Pareto-style'', showing first those remote systems with the greatest number of Cmds files, next Data files, and then Xqts files. uusnaps inserts a * after the number of Xqts files ... |
|
uustat(1) -- uucp status inquiry and job control
|
|
uustat displays the status of, or cancels, previously specified uucp commands, or provide general status on uucp connections to other systems (see uucp(1)). Only one of the following options can be specified with uustat per command execution: -a Output all jobs in queue. -m Report the status of accessibility of all machines. -p Execute a ps -flp for all the process IDs that are in the lock files. ... |
|
uusub(1m) -- monitor uucp network
|
|
The uucp commands, including uusub, are targeted for removal from HPUX; see the WARNINGS below. uusub defines a uucp subnetwork and monitors the connection and traffic among the members of the subnetwork. |
|
uuto(1) -- public UNIX system to UNIX system file copy
|
|
uuto sends source-files to destination. uuto uses the uucp facility to send files (see uucp(1)), while allowing the local system to control the file access. A source-file name is a path name on your machine. Destination has the form: system!user where !user where user where system is taken from a list of system names that uucp knows about (see uuname in uucp(1) manual entry). user is the login nam... |
|
uutry(1) -- UNIX system to UNIX system copy
|
|
uucp copies files named by the source_files argument to the destination identified by the destination_file argument. When copying files to or from a remote system, source_files and destination_file can be a path name on the local system, or have the form: system_name!path_!path_path_name where system_name is the name of a remote system in a list of system names known to uucp. When copying files to... |
|
uux(1) -- UNIX system to UNIX system command execution
|
|
uux gathers zero or more files from various systems, executes a command on a specified system, then sends standard output to a file on a specified system. Note that, for security reasons, many installations limit the list of commands executable on behalf of an incoming request from uux. Many sites will permit little more than the receipt of mail (see mail(1), mailx(1), and elm(1)) via uux. The com... |
|
uuxqt(1m) -- execute remote uucp or uux command requests
|
|
The uucp commands, including uuxqt, are targeted for removal from HPUX; see the WARNINGS below. uuxqt executes remote job requests generated by use of the uux command (see uux(1)). uux generates X. files and places them in the spool directory, where uuxqt searches for them. For each X. file, uuxqt determines whether the required data files are available and accessible, and if file commands are per... |
|
ux2dos(1) -- convert ASCII file format
|
|
dos2ux and ux2dos read each specified file in sequence and write it to standard output, converting to HP-UX format or to DOS format, respectively. Each file can be either DOS format or HP-UX format for either command. A DOS file name is recognized by the presence of an embedded colon (:) delimiter; see dosif(4) for DOS file naming conventions. If no input file is given or if the argument - is enco... |
|
vacation(1) -- return ``I am not here'' indication
|
|
The vacation program returns a message to the sender of a message telling them that you are currently not reading your mail. The intended use is in a .forward file in $HOME. For example, your .forward file might contain: \eric, "|/usr/bin/vacation -a allman eric" which would send messages to you (assuming your login name was eric) and reply to any messages for eric or allman. The \ preceding e... |
|
val(1) -- validate SCCS file
|
|
The val command reads one or more files to determine whether each file read is an SCCS file meeting the characteristics specified by the optional argument list. Command-line options may appear in any order, and are described below. |
|
vax(1) -- provide truth value about processor type
|
|
The following commands return a true value (exit code 0) if the a processor type matches the command name. Otherwise a false value (exit code non-zero) is returned. These commands are commonly used within make makefiles and shell procedures to improve portability of applications (see make(1)). ___________________________________________________________________________ | Command | True for: ||Comma... |
|
vc(1) -- substitutes assigned values in place of identification keywords.
|
|
The vc, or version control command copies lines from the standard input to the standard output under control of command line arguments and control statements encountered in the standard input. In the process of performing the copy operation, user declared keywords can be replaced by their string value when they appear in plain text and/or control statements. The copying of lines from the standard ... |
|
vedit(1) -- screen-oriented (visual) text editor
|
|
The vi (visual) program is a display-oriented text editor that is based on the underlying ex line editor (see ex(1)). It is possible to switch back and forth between the two and to execute ex commands from within vi. The line-editor commands and the editor options are described in ex(1). Only the visual mode commands are described here. The view program is identical to vi except that the readonly ... |
|
vgcfgbackup(1m) -- create or update LVM volume group configuration backup file
|
|
The vgcfgbackup command saves the LVM configuration for a volume group in a default or alternate configuration backup file (see the -f option). By default, vgcfgbackup runs automatically each time an LVM command changes the LVM configuration. In this case, it always uses the default configuration backup file. An existing default configuration backup file is renamed with an extension of .old. |
|
vgcfgrestor(1m) -- display or restore LVM volume group configuration from backup file
|
|
The vgcfgrestore command restores the LVM configuration data from a default (-n option) or alternate (-f option) configuration backup file to the physical volume named by pv_path. Or, it displays the configuration data on standard output (-l option). The configuration stored for one physical volume, old_pv_path, can be copied to another physical volume pv_path (-o option). |
|
vgchange(1m) -- set LVM volume group availability
|
|
The vgchange command with the -a option activates or deactivates one or more volume groups. The vgchange command with the -c option controls the membership of one or more volume groups in a high availability cluster. The vgchange command with the -c and -S options control the membership of a volume group and mark it sharable. The vgchange command without the -P resync_daemon_count option (default)... |
|
vgchgid(1m) -- modify the Volume Group ID (VGID) on a given set of physical devices
|
|
The vgchgid command is designed to change the LVM Volume Group ID (VGID) on a supplied set of disks. vgchgid will work with any type of storage, but it is primarily targeted at disk arrays that are able to create "snapshots" or "clones" of mirrored LUNs. vgchgid accepts a set of raw physical devices and checks the following criteria before it alters the VGID: + All raw physical volume devices ... |
|
vgcreate(1m) -- create LVM volume group
|
|
The vgcreate command creates a new volume group. vg_name is a symbolic name for the volume group and must be used in all references to it. vg_name is the path to a directory entry under /dev that must contain a character special file named group. Except for the group entry, the vg_name directory should be empty. The vg_name directory and the group file have to be created by the user (see lvm(7)). ... |
|
vgdisplay(1m) -- display information about LVM volume groups
|
|
The vgdisplay command displays information about volume groups. For each vg_name specified, vgdisplay displays information for that volume group only. If no vg_name is specified, vgdisplay displays names and corresponding information for all defined volume groups. The volume group must be activated (see vgchange(1M)) before it can be displayed. |
|
vgexport(1m) -- export an LVM volume group and its associated logical volumes
|
|
Using the format of the first command line of the SYNOPSIS above, the vgexport command can be used to remove a volume group from the system. The volume group will be removed without modifying the logical volume information found on the physical volumes. The volume group identified by vg_name is removed from the /etc/lvmtab file, and the associated device files including the vg_name directory and g... |
|
vgextend(1m) -- extend an LVM volume group by adding physical volumes
|
|
The vgextend command assigns additional physical volumes to volume group vg_name. The volume group must be active. Volume groups are extended by adding one or more physical volumes specified by pv_path ... After the physical volumes have been successfully added to the volume group, the disk space they contain can be allocated to logical volumes. Before assigning an additional physical volume to a ... |
|
vgimport(1m) -- import an LVM volume group onto the system
|
|
The vgimport command adds the specified volume group to the system. The physical volumes, specified as pv_path ..., are scanned to obtain the volume group information and logical volume information. This command works much like vgcreate by requiring that the volume group device directory and the group special file be created before the command is executed (see vgcreate(1M)). The vg_name is added f... |
|
vgreduce(1m) -- remove physical volumes from an LVM volume group
|
|
The vgreduce command removes each physical volume specified by a pv_path argument from volume group vg_name. The vgreduce command with -f option removes all missing physical volume from the volume group. All but one physical volume can be removed. The last physical volume must remain in the volume group so that the logical volume driver can continue to operate. The last physical volume in the volu... |
|
vgremove(1m) -- remove LVM volume group definition from the system
|
|
The vgremove command removes from the system the last physical volume of the volume group and the definition of the volume group or groups specified by vg_name .... Since all system knowledge of the volume group and its contents are removed, the volume group can no longer be accessed. To move a volume group from one system to another, use the vgexport command instead (see vgexport(1M)). Before exe... |
|
vgrestore(1m) -- restore a VxVM disk group back to an LVM volume group
|
|
The vgrestore command restores a Logical Volume Manager (LVM) volume group that was previously converted to a VxVM disk group by the vxvmconvert utility. |
|
vgscan(1m) -- scan physical volumes for LVM volume groups
|
|
The vgscan command allows the re-creation of the /etc/lvmtab file and possibly the associated volume group device files. This command should be run only in the event of a catastrophic error such as the deletion of the /etc/lvmtab file or the mismatch of names of the physical volumes in the /etc/lvmtab file to the actual physical volume path configuration. If the /etc/lvmtab file exists, the inform... |
|
vgsync(1m) -- synchronize stale logical volume mirrors in LVM volume groups
|
|
The vgsync command synchronizes the physical extents of each mirrored logical volume in the volume group specified by vg_name .... Synchronization occurs only on the physical extents that are stale mirrors of the original logical extent. The synchronization process can be time consuming, depending on the hardware characteristics and the amount of data. Unless disabled, the mirrors within a volume ... |
|
vi(1) -- screen-oriented (visual) text editor
|
|
The vi (visual) program is a display-oriented text editor that is based on the underlying ex line editor (see ex(1)). It is possible to switch back and forth between the two and to execute ex commands from within vi. The line-editor commands and the editor options are described in ex(1). Only the visual mode commands are described here. The view program is identical to vi except that the readonly ... |
|
view(1) -- screen-oriented (visual) text editor
|
|
The vi (visual) program is a display-oriented text editor that is based on the underlying ex line editor (see ex(1)). It is possible to switch back and forth between the two and to execute ex commands from within vi. The line-editor commands and the editor options are described in ex(1). Only the visual mode commands are described here. The view program is identical to vi except that the readonly ... |
|
vipw(1m) -- edit the password file
|
|
vipw edits the password file while setting the appropriate locks, and does any necessary processing after the password file is unlocked. If the password file is already being edited, you will be told to try again later. The vi editor is used unless the environment variable EDITOR indicates an alternate editor. vipw performs a number of consistency checks on the password entry for root, and does no... |
|
vis(1) -- make unprintable and non-ASCII characters in a file visible or invisible
|
|
vis reads characters from each file in sequence and writes them to the standard output, converting those that are not printable or not ASCII into a visible form. inv performs the inverse function, reading printable characters from each file, returning them to non-printable or non-ASCII form, if appropriate, then writing them to standard output; Non-printable ASCII characters are represented using ... |
|
vmstat(1) -- report virtual memory statistics
|
|
The vmstat command reports certain statistics kept about process, virtual memory, trap, and CPU activity. It also can clear the accumulators in the kernel sum structure. |
|
volcopy(1m) -- copy a file system with label checking
|
|
The volcopy command makes a literal copy of the file system using a block size matched to the device. |
|
volcopy_hfs(1m) -- copy an HFS file system with label checking
|
|
The volcopy command makes a literal copy of an HFS file system using a block size matched to the device. |
|
volcopy_vxfs(1m) -- copy a VxFS file system with label checking
|
|
volcopy makes a literal copy of a VxFS file system using a block size matched to the device. |
|
vradmin(1m) -- administer VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR) in a distributed environment
|
|
The vradmin utility performs administrative tasks on a Replicated Data Set (RDS) in a VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR) environment. Tasks available in vradmin include configuring, administering and displaying Replicated Data Sets, synchronizing remote volumes, and migrating or taking over the Primary role in the RDS. Note: vradmin is a VVR-specific utility and requires a valid VVR license. A Replic... |
|
vrnotify(1m) -- display VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR) events
|
|
The vrnotify utility displays events related to VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR) as managed by Volume Replicator Administrative Services (VRAS) daemon, vradmind. The vrnotify command is a VVRspecific utility and requires a valid VVR license. A Replicated Data Set (RDS) is comprised of a Replicated Volume Group (RVG) on the Primary host and its counterparts on the Secondary hosts. Note: An RDS is a ... |
|
vrport(1m) -- VERITAS Volume Replicator port management utility
|
|
The vrport utility manages the various UDP and TCP ports used by VERITAS Volume Replicator(VVR). VVR uses the UDP and TCP transport protocols to communicate between the Primary and Secondary. VVR exchanges three types of message between the Primary and Secondary - heartbeat, data and administrative control. The heartbeat messages are transmitted using the UDP protocol on the IANA approved 4145 UDP... |
|
vt(1) -- log into another system over lan
|
|
vt enables a user to log into another HP 9000 system (nodename) over an HP local area network. The -p option causes vt to send a poll request over the local area network to find out what systems currently have vtdaemon running (see vtdaemon(1M)). An asterisk (*) following a nodename in the response indicates that the system is a vt gateway. Plus signs (+) following the nodename indicate how many v... |
|
vtdaemon(1m) -- respond to vt requests
|
|
vtdaemon responds to requests from other systems (via local area network) made by vt (see vt(1)). vtdaemon spawns a server to respond to each request that it receives. |
|
vxassist(1m) -- create, relayout, convert, mirror, backup, grow, shrink, delete, and move volumes
|
|
The vxassist utility is a command-line interface to the VERITAS Volume - 1 - Formatted: January 24, 2005 vxassist(1M) VxVM 3.5 vxassist(1M) 1 Jun 2002 Manager (VxVM) that: + Finds space for and creates volumes + Performs volume conversion + Adds mirrors and logs to existing volumes + Extends and shrinks existing volumes + Migrates data from a specified set of disks + Provides facilities for the on... |
|
vxbootsetup(1m) -- set up system boot information on a VERITAS Volume Manager disk
|
|
The vxbootsetup utility configures physical disks so that they can be used to boot the system. Before vxbootsetup is called to configure a disk, the required volumes, standvol, rootvol and swapvol (and optionally, dumpvol) must be created on the disk. All of these volumes must be contiguous with only one subdisk. If no medianame arguments are specified, all disks that contain usable mirrors of the... |
|
vxclustadm(1m) -- start, stop, and reconfigure a cluster
|
|
The vxclustadm utility activates and deactivates cluster functionality on a node in a cluster. vxclustadm provides an interface to the clustering functionality of VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) in the absence of a cluster monitor. Caution: If there is no cluster monitor or if GAB is used as the cluster monitor, ensure that you completely understand the functionality of this command. Otherwise, clus... |
|
vxconfigd(1m) -- VERITAS Volume Manager configuration daemon
|
|
The VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) configuration daemon, vxconfigd, maintains disk configurations and disk groups in VxVM. vxconfigd takes requests from other utilities for configuration changes, and communicates those changes to the kernel and modifies configuration information stored on disk. vxconfigd also initializes VxVM when the system is booted. |
|
vxcp_lvmroot(1m) -- copy LVM root disk onto new VERITAS Volume Manager root disk
|
|
The vxcp_lvmroot command copies (or "clones") the volumes associated with an LVM root volume group to volumes of equal size (unless the -R option is specified) on a VxVM root disk group. VxVM rootability means that VxVM controls the disk containing the root file system. The vxcp_lvmroot command provides a means of achieving VxVM rootability when upgrading from a prior release of HP-UX without ha... |
|
vxdco(1m) -- perform operations on DCO objects and DCO volumes
|
|
The vxdco command is used to manipulate data change objects (DCO objects or DCOs) and DCO volumes that allow the use of Persistent FastResync with volumes. The att operation attaches a DCO object, dco, to a volume, volume. If the DCO object has an associated DCO volume, you can use the command vxvol set fmr=on volume to enable Persistent FastResync on the volume after the attP operation has comple... |
|
vxdctl(1m) -- control the volume configuration daemon
|
|
The vxdctl utility manages aspects of the state of the volume configuration daemon, vxconfigd, and also manages aspects of configuration for bootstrapping the rootdg disk group. The volboot file forms a key element in managing the state of vxconfigd and bootstrapping the rootdg disk group. This file contains a host ID that VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) uses to establish ownership of physical disks... |
|
vxddladm(1m) -- Device Discovery Layer subsystem administration
|
|
The vxddladm utility is an administrative interface to the dynamic array support facility of the Device Discovery Layer(DDL). This utility lists the types of arrays supported, adds or removes array support from DDL, and allows dynamic addition of JBOD support for disks from different vendors. It additionally lists supported JBODs, and allows addition or removal of JBOD support. The vxddladm utilit... |
|
vxdestroy_lvmroot(1m) -- remove LVM root disk and associated LVM volume group
|
|
The vxdestroy_lvmroot command tears down and removes the LVM volume group associated with the specified physical disk. This is done by removing the volumes in the volume group and then removing the volume group. |
|
vxdg(1m) -- manage VERITAS Volume Manager disk groups
|
|
The vxdg utility performs basic administrative operations on disk groups. Operations include the creation of disk groups, the addition of disks to a disk group, disk group split/join, and disk group imports and deports. Note: A license is necessary to use the Disk Group Split/Join feature. The behavior of the vxdg utility depends upon the keyword specified as the first operand. A diskgroup argumen... |
|
vxdisk(1m) -- define and manage VERITAS Volume Manager disks
|
|
The vxdisk utility performs basic administrative operations on disks. Operations include initializing and replacing disks, as well as taking care of some book-keeping necessary for the disk model presented by VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM). accessname refers to the disk access name, while disk represents the disk media name. vxdisk accesses disks based on disk access names, which are system-specifi... |
|
vxdiskadd(1m) -- add one or more disks for use with VERITAS Volume Manager
|
|
The vxdiskadd utility configures disks for use by VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM). Disks must already have been formatted. vxdiskadd prompts the user for a disk group name and disk name for the disks. If no disk group name specified, the disks will be left as unassigned replacement disks for future use. A new disk group may be created that will become the disks' disk group. If a disk group is speci... |
|
vxdiskadm(1m) -- menu-driven VERITAS Volume Manager disk administrator
|
|
vxdiskadm provides a menu-driven interface to perform common VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) disk administration tasks. The vxdiskadm script is interactive and prompts you for responses, supplying defaults where appropriate. Help is available at every prompt by entering a question mark (?) to display a context-sensitive help message. To add disks, specify one or more disks with a disk-address-patter... |
|
vxdisksetup(1m) -- configure a disk for use with VERITAS Volume Manager
|
|
The vxdisksetup command configures the disk for use by VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM). vxdisksetup is called by the vxdiskadd command as part of initial disk configuration. It is not typically necessary to call this command directly. vxdisksetup creates a VERITAS Volume Manager private configuration region and public region for allocating subdisks. The vxdiskunsetup command reverses the configurati... |
|
vxdiskusg(1m) -- generate VxFS disk accounting data by user ID
|
|
vxdiskusg generates intermediate disk accounting information from data in file, or the standard input if the -s option is specified and file is omitted. vxdiskusg outputs lines on the standard output, one line per user, in the following format: uid login #blocks where: uid User's numerical user ID login User's login name #blocks Total number of disk blocks allocated to this user Without the -s o... |
|
vxdmpadm(1m) -- DMP subsystem administration
|
|
The vxdmpadm utility is an administrative interface to the VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) Dynamic Multipathing (DMP) facility. vxdmpadm lists the paths under a DMP device, gets the DMP device corresponding to a path, lists all the disk controllers on the system, lists all the paths through a host disk controller, lists all the DMP nodes through a disk array, and enables or disables a host disk cont... |
|
vxdump(1m) -- incremental VxFS file system dump, local or across network
|
|
vxdump copies to magnetic tape all files in the vxfs filesystem that have been changed after a certain date. This information is derived from the files /etc/fstab and a timestamp file, by default /etc/dumpdates. rvxdump copies the files to a tape drive on a remote system. rvxdump runs a process, /usr/sbin/rmt, on the remote machine to access the tape device. vxdump and rvxdump support both getopt(... |
|
vxedit(1m) -- create, remove, and modify VERITAS Volume Manager records
|
|
The vxedit utility sets and changes attributes for VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) configuration records that do not depend upon volume usage types. See vxvol(1M) for operations that can set attributes that are dependent upon usage types. In particular, setting the length and logging type for a volume requires use of the vxvol set operation. Each invocation can be applied to only one disk group at a... |
|
vxenablef(1m) -- enable VxFS DMAPI, OnLineJFS, or full VxFS functionality in the kernel
|
|
vxenablef enables VxFS DMAPI (Data Management Applications Programming Interface), OnLineJFS functionality, or full VxFS functionality in the kernel. If you have valid licenses for these features, vxenablef makes them available without rebuilding a new kernel and rebooting the system. If no argument is specified, vxenablef displays the available licensed features enabled in the kernel. |
|
vxevac(1m) -- evacuate all volumes from a disk
|
|
The vxevac utility moves subdisks off the specified VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) disk (medianame) to the specified destination disks (new_medianame...). If no new_medianame arguments are specified, any non-volatile, non-reserved disks can be used as destination disks. Subdisks that are part of unmirrored striped plexes are moved by moving the entire plex to a new location. Note: This operation as... |
|
vxfsconvert(1m) -- convert a file system to a vxfs file system or upgrade a VxFS disk layout version.
|
|
vxfsconvert converts a file system of a supported type to a vxfs file system with a Version 4 disk layout. Currently vxfsconvert only supports conversion of an hfs file system to a vxfs file system. Conversion of all file system block and fragment sizes is supported. After a file system is converted to vxfs, its block size is the value of the fragment size before conversion. vxfsconvert also conve... |
|
vxfsstat(1m) -- display VxFS file system statistics
|
|
vxfsstat is a statistical reporter to aid in performance tuning and determining performance anomalies. vxfsstat gathers buffer cache, inode cache, DNLC (directory name lookup cache), per-CPU statistics, per-file system statistics for local and cluster mounted file system, and global cluster file system counters. The mount_point specifies any VxFS file system mount point. mount_point is used as an ... |
|
vxibc(1m) -- perform VERITAS Volume Replicator In-Band Control Messaging operations
|
|
The vxibc utility is specific to VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR) and requires a valid license. The vxibc command-line utility performs In-Band Control Messaging (IBC) operations. It allows applications to inject user-defined control messages into the update stream of a Replicated Volume Group (RVG). An IBC message is delivered on the Secondary node in causal order with respect to other activity on... |
|
vximportdg(1m) -- import a disk group into the VERITAS Volume Manager configuration
|
|
The vximportdg utility performs a temporary import of the disk group contained on the disk device specified by daname to the disk group specified by new_dgname. As the persistent disk group information is not changed within the private partition of the affected disk, the import is only valid for the duration of the bootload or until a vxdg deport is performed. |
|
vxinfo(1m) -- print accessibility and usability of volumes
|
|
The vxinfo utility reports a usage-type-dependent condition on one or more volumes in a disk group. A report for each volume specified by the volume operand is written to the standard output. If no volume operands are given, then a volume condition report is provided for each volume in the selected disk group. Each invocation can be applied to only one disk group at a time. Any volume operands wil... |
|
vxinstall(1m) -- menu-driven VERITAS Volume Manager initial configuration procedure
|
|
The vxinstall utility provides a menu driven interface to configure VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM). After you install the VERITAS Volume Manager software package (VRTSvxvm), run vxinstall to configure VxVM for initial use on your system. You can use the files /etc/vx/cntrls.exclude, /etc/vx/disks.exclude and /etc/vx/enclr.exclude to automatically exclude controllers or disks from use by vxinstall s... |
|
vxintro(1m) -- introduction to the VERITAS Volume Manager utilities
|
|
The VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) utilities provide a shell-level interface for use by system administrators and high-level applications and scripts to query and manipulate objects managed through VxVM. |
|
vxiod(1m) -- start, stop, and report on VERITAS Volume Manager kernel daemons
|
|
The vxiod utility starts, stops, or reports on VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) I/O daemons. An I/O daemon provides a process context for performing I/O in VxVM. VERITAS Volume Manager I/O daemons are not required for correct operation, but not having I/O daemons can adversely affect system performance. When invoked with no arguments, vxiod prints the current number of volume I/O daemons on the stand... |
|
vxlicense(1m) -- VxFS and VxVM licensing key utility
|
|
vxlicense maintains the VxFS and VxVM license key files. |
|
vxmake(1m) -- create VERITAS Volume Manager configuration records
|
|
The vxmake utility creates subdisk, plex, and volume records for VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM). Records can be created entirely from parameters specified on the command line, or they can be created using a description file. vxmake can also create a data change object (DCO) that is used to implement Persistent FastResync on a volume. When the VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR) option is available, vxm... |
|
vxmemstat(1m) -- display memory statistics for VERITAS Volume Manager
|
|
The vxmemstat utility prints memory statistics information. This information is system-wide and not specific to a disk group, volume or any other Volume Manager object. |
|
vxmend(1m) -- mend simple problems in configuration records
|
|
The vxmend utility performs various VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) usage-type-specific operations on subdisk, plex, and volume records. The first operand is a keyword that determines the specific operation to perform. The remaining operands specify the configuration objects to which the operation is applied. Each invocation can be applied to only one disk group at a time. Any name operands will be ... |
|
vxmirror(1m) -- mirror volumes on a disk or control default mirroring
|
|
The vxmirror command provides a mechanism to mirror the contents of a specified disk, to mirror all currently un-mirrored volumes in the specified disk group, or to change or display the current defaults for mirroring. All volumes that have only a single plex (mirror copy), are mirrored by adding an additional plex. Volumes containing subdisks that reside on more than one disk are not mirrored by ... |
|
vxnotify(1m) -- display VERITAS Volume Manager configuration events
|
|
The vxnotify utility displays events related to disk and configuration changes, as managed by the VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) configuration daemon, vxconfigd. If vxnotify is running on a system where the VxVM cluster feature is active, it displays events related to changes in the cluster state of the system on which it is running. vxnotify displays requested event types until killed by a signal,... |
|
vxpfto(1m) -- set Powerfail Timeout (pfto)
|
|
Powerfail Timeout is an attribute of a SCSI disk connected to an HP-UX host (see the pfto(7) man page). The vxpfto command sets the Powerfail Timeout interval on a set of Volume Manager disks, either all disks in a disk group, or all disks underlying the volumes listed. The first form of the command sets the same PFTO value for all the disks in the specified VxVM diskgroup. In the second form, all... |
|
vxplex(1m) -- perform VERITAS Volume Manager operations on plexes
|
|
The vxplex utility performs VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) operations on plexes and on volume-and-plex combinations. The first operand is a keyword that determines the specific operation to perform. The remaining operands specify the configuration objects to which the operation is to be applied. Each operation can be applied to only one disk group at a time. Any volume or plex operands are used to ... |
|
vxprint(1m) -- display records from the VERITAS Volume Manager configuration
|
|
The vxprint utility displays complete or partial information from records in VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) disk group configurations. Records can be selected by name or with special search expressions. Selecting RVG and RLINK records via search expressions is not currently supported. Additionally, record association hierarchies can be displayed in an orderly fashion so that the structure of record... |
|
vxr5check(1m) -- verify RAID-5 volume parity
|
|
The vxr5check utility compares the parity of each stripe of a RAID-5 volume specified by volume. vxr5check reads the data for each stripe, generates the parity for this stripe, and compares this parity with the existing parity. vxr5check can be run against the entire RAID-5 volume, or incrementally on RAID-5 stripe boundaries, by specifying the -i option. |
|
vxreattach(1m) -- reattach disk drives that have once again become accessible
|
|
The vxreattach utility reattaches disks to the disk group they were in and retains the same media name. This operation may be necessary if a disk has a transient failure, or if VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) starts with some disk drivers unloaded and unloadable. Disks then enter the failed state. If the problem is fixed, vxreattach may be able to reattach the disks without plexes being flagged as s... |
|
vxrecover(1m) -- perform volume recovery operations
|
|
The vxrecover utility performs plex attach, RAID-5 subdisk recovery, and resynchronize operations for the named volumes, or for volumes residing on the specified disks medianame. If no medianame or volume is specified, the operation applies to all volumes, or to all volumes in the specified disk group. If -s is specified, disabled volumes are started. With -s and -n, volumes are started, but no ot... |
|
vxrelayout(1m) -- convert online storage from one layout to another
|
|
Online relayout is a process where storage in a volume or a plex is converted from one layout to another maintaining data availability at all times. You can convert any supported VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) layout to another and change the stripe width or the number columns. You can also perform only stripe width and column changes. The transformation of a volume or a plex must be initiated usin... |
|
vxrelocd(1m) -- monitor VERITAS Volume Manager for failure events and relocate failed subdisks
|
|
The vxrelocd command monitors VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) by analyzing the output of the vxnotify command, and waits for a failure. When a failure occurs, vxrelocd sends mail via mailx to root (by default) or to other specified users and relocates failed subdisks. After completing the relocation, vxrelocd sends more mail indicating the status of each subdisk replacement. The vxrecover utility is... |
|
vxresize(1m) -- change the length of a volume containing a file system
|
|
The vxresize command either grows or shrinks both the file system and its underlying volume to match the specified new volume length. The ability to grow or shrink is file system dependent. Some file system types may require that the file system be unmounted for the operation to succeed, as shown in the following table: ______________________________________________________________ | | Online JFS ... |
|
vxrestore(1m) -- restore file system incrementally, local or across network
|
|
vxrestore and rvxrestore read tapes previously dumped by the vxdump or rvxdump command (see vxdump(1M)). vxrestore restores from tape on the local system; rvxrestore restores from tape on a remote system. rvxrestore runs /usr/sbin/rmt on the remote machine to access the tape device. vxrestore and rvxrestore support both getopt(3C) and traditional restore command line invocations as shown above. Th... |
|
vxres_lvmroot(1m) -- restore LVM root disk from VERITAS Volume Manager root disk
|
|
The vxres_lvmroot command initializes the specified physical disks as a Logical Volume Manager (LVM) root disks under HP-UX. The resulting LVM root volume group is named vg## where ## is the first number starting at 00 that creates a unique LVM volume group name. The specified disks must have enough space to accommodate the total size of all of the volumes in the VxVM root disk group. The new LVM ... |
|
vxrlink(1m) -- perform VERITAS Volume Manager operations on RLINKs
|
|
The vxrlink utility performs VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) operations on RLINKs (rlinks). vxrlink is specific to VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR), which requires a valid license. The first operand is a keyword that determines the specific operation to perform. Each operation can be applied to only one disk group at a time. Any rlink and rvg operands are used to determine a default local disk group,... |
|
vxrootmir(1m) -- create a mirror of a VERITAS Volume Manager root disk
|
|
The vxrootmir command creates mirrors of all of the volumes on a VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) rootable boot disk, and makes the new disk bootable. The disk to be used as a mirror can be specified either by its VM disk name, dmname (disk media name), or by its device name, daname (disk access name). If a disk media name is specified, it is validated to make sure that it exists and that it has been... |
|
vxrvg(1m) -- perform VERITAS Volume Manager operations on RVGs
|
|
The vxrvg utility performs VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) operations on replicated volume groups (RVGs). vxrvg is specific to VERITAS Volume Replicator (VVR), which requires a valid license. The first operand is a keyword that determines the specific operation to perform. Each operation can be applied to only one diskgroup at a time. The rvg operand is used to determine a default local disk group, ... |
|
vxsd(1m) -- perform VERITAS Volume Manager operations on subdisks
|
|
The vxsd utility performs VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) operations on subdisks and on plex-and-subdisk combinations. The first operand is a keyword that determines the specific operation to perform. The remaining operands specify the configuration objects to which the operation is to be applied. Each operation can be applied to only one disk group at a time. Any plex or subdisk name operands will ... |
|
vxsparecheck(1m) -- monitor VERITAS Volume Manager for failure events and replace failed disks
|
|
The vxsparecheck command monitors VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) by analyzing the output of the vxnotify command, waiting for failures to occur. It then sends mail via mailx to the logins specified on the command line, or (by default) to root. It then replaces any failed disks. After an attempt at replacement is complete, mail will be sent indicating the status of each disk replacement. The mail no... |
|
vxstat(1m) -- VERITAS Volume Manager statistics management utility
|
|
The vxstat utility prints and resets statistics information on one or more volumes, plexes, subdisks, or disks. The vxstat utility reads statistics from the volume device files in the directory /dev/vx/rdsk and prints them to standard output. These statistics represent volume, plex, subdisk, and disk activity since boot time. If no object operands are given, then statistics from all volumes in the... |
|
vxtask(1m) -- list and administer VERITAS Volume Manager tasks
|
|
The vxtask utility performs basic administrative operations on VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) tasks that are running on the system. Operations include listing tasks (subject to filtering), modifying the state of a task (aborting, pausing, resuming), and modifying the rate of progress of a task. VERITAS Volume Manager tasks represent long-term operations in progress on the system. Every task provide... |
|
vxtrace(1m) -- trace operations on volumes
|
|
The vxtrace utility prints kernel error or I/O trace event records on the standard output or writes them to a file in binary format. Binary trace records written to a file can be read back and formatted by vxtrace as well. If no arguments are specified, vxtrace reports either all error trace data or all I/O trace data on all virtual disk devices. With error trace data, it is possible to select all... |
|
vxtunefs(1m) -- tune a VxFS File System
|
|
vxtunefs sets or prints tuneable I/O parameters of mounted file systems. vxtunefs can set parameters describing the I/O properties of the underlying device, parameters to indicate when to treat an I/O as direct I/O, or parameters to control the extent allocation policy for the specified file system. With no options specified, vxtunefs prints the existing VxFS parameters for the specified file syst... |
|
vxumount(1m) -- unmount a VxFS file system
|
|
vxumount unmounts a currently mounted VxFS file system, which you can specify either as a mount_point or as special, the device on which the file system resides. Note: Only a privileged user can unmount file systems. |
|
vxunreloc(1m) -- move a hot-relocated subdisk back to its original disk
|
|
The VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) hot-relocation feature can detect an I/O failure in a subdisk, relocate the subdisk, and recover the plex associated with the subdisk. vxunreloc lets you reverse the process and move the hot-relocated subdisks back onto a disk that was replaced after a disk failure. dm_name specifies the disk where the hot-relocated subdisks originally resided. The -n option moves... |
|
vxupgrade(1m) -- upgrade the disk layout of a VxFS file system
|
|
vxupgrade prints the current disk layout version number for a VxFS file system or upgrades the file system to a new disk layout. vxupgrade operates on file systems mounted for read/write access: mount_point must be a mounted VxFS file system. Only a privileged user can query or upgrade a VxFS file system. When invoked with the -n option, vxupgrade upgrades the disk layout to the specified version.... |
|
vxvmboot(1m) -- prepare VERITAS Volume Manager volume as a root, boot, primary swap or dump volume
|
|
The vxvmboot command updates information in the LABEL file for the lif disk specified by the pathname of its character (raw) device node, rawpath. The volume at the specified offset and length becomes the boot, root, primary swap or dump volume when the system is next booted. This command is normally invoked by the vxbootsetup utility. |
|
vxvmconvert(1m) -- convert LVM volume groups to VxVM disk groups
|
|
vxvmconvert is a menu-driven program to convert an HP Logical Volume Manger (LVM) configuration to a VERITAS Volume Manager configuration. This man page is a brief overview of vxvmconvert. Refer to the VERITAS Volume Manager Migration Guide for a detailed description before using the conversion procedure. The vxvmconvert script is interactive and prompts you for responses, supplying defaults where... |
|
vxvol(1m) -- perform VERITAS Volume Manager operations on volumes
|
|
The vxvol utility performs VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) operations on volumes. The first operand is a keyword that determines the specific operation to perform. The remaining operands specify configuration records to which the operation is to be applied. - 1 - Formatted: January 24, 2005 vxvol(1M) VxVM 3.5 vxvol(1M) 1 Jun 2002 Each operation can be applied to only one disk group at a time. Any vo... |
|
vx_emerg_start(1m) -- start VERITAS Volume Manager from recovery media
|
|
The vx_emerg_start utility can be used to start VERITAS Volume Manager (VxVM) when a system is booted from alternate media, or when a system has been booted into Emergency Mode Boot mode. This allows a rootable VxVM configuration to be repaired in the event of a catastrophic failure. vx_emerg_start verifies that the /etc/vx/volboot file exists, and checks the command-line arguments against the con... |
|
w(1) -- show how long system has been up, and/or who is logged in and what they are doing
|
|
uptime prints the current time, the length of time the system has been up, the number of users logged on to the system, and the average number of jobs in the run queue over the last 1, 5, and 15 minutes for the active processors. w is linked to uptime and prints the same output as uptime -w, displaying a summary of the current activity on the system. |
|
waconf(1m) -- display and configure web administration tool
|
|
The waconf command configures the behavior of the web administration server use by the kcweb and pdweb commands. If no options are specified, waconf displays the current configuration. Only the superuser can change the configuration. |
|
wait(1) -- await process completion
|
|
If no argument is specified, wait waits until all processes (started with &) of the current shell have completed, and reports on abnormal terminations. If a numeric argument pid is given and is the process ID of a background process, wait waits until that process has completed. Otherwise, if pid is not a background process, wait exits without waiting for any processes to complete. Because the wait... |
|
wall(1m) -- write message to all users
|
|
Without arguments, the wall command reads a message from standard input until end-of-file. Then it sends this message to all currently logged-in users preceded by: Broadcast Message from ... If the -ggroupname option is specified, groupname option is specified, wall sends the message to all currently logged-in groupname members (as specified in /etc/group) preceded by: Broadcast Message from ... t... |
|
wc(1) -- count words, lines, and bytes or characters in a file
|
|
The wc command counts lines, words, and bytes or characters in the named files, or in the standard input if no file names are specified. It also keeps a total count for all named files. A word is a string of characters delimited by spaces, tabs, or newlines. |
|
wdutil(1) -- manipulate Native Language I/O word dictionary
|
|
wdutil is used to manipulate the word dictionary used by Native Language I/O for phrase and word conversion. The word dictionary consists of a key entries block and a data entries block. The key entries block holds the designations, and the data entries block holds the words corresponding to each designation. wdutil also functions as a filter for transforming a word dictionary to a text file, and ... |
|
what(1) -- get SCCS identification information
|
|
The what command searches the given files for all occurrences of the pattern that get(1) substitutes for %Z% (currently @(#) at this printing) and prints out what follows until the first ", >, new-line, \, or null character. For example, if the C program in file f.c contains char ident[] = "@(#)identification information"; and f.c is compiled to yield f.o and a.out, the command what f.c f.o a.... |
|
whereis(1) -- locate source, binary, and/or manual for program
|
|
whereis locates source, binary, and manuals sections for specified files. The supplied names are first stripped of leading path name components and any (single) trailing extension of the form .ext (such as ext (such as .c). Prefixes of s. resulting from use of SCCS are also dealt with. whereis then attempts to locate the desired program in a list of standard places. |
|
which(1) -- locate a program file including aliases and paths
|
|
For each name given, which searches for the file that would be executed if name were given as a command, and displays the absolute path of that file. Each argument is expanded if it is aliased, and searched for along the user's path. Both aliases and path are determined by sourcing (executing) the user's .cshrc file. |
|
who(1) -- who is on the system
|
|
The who command can list the user's name, terminal line, login time, elapsed time since input activity occurred on the line, the user's host name, and the process-ID of the command interpreter (shell) for each current system user. It examines the utmps database to obtain the information. If file is given, that file is examined, file should be a utmp like file. The who command with the am i or am... |
|
whoami(1) -- print effective current user id
|
|
whoami prints your current user name, even if you have used su to change it since your initial login (see su(1)). The command who am i reports your initial login name because it uses /etc/utmp. |
|
whodo(1m) -- which users are doing what
|
|
The whodo command produces merged, reformatted, and dated output from the who, ps and acctcom commands (see who(1) , ps(1) and acctcom(1M)). If user is specified, output is restricted to all sessions pertaining to that user. The following options are available: -h Suppress the heading. -l Produce a long form of output. The fields displayed are: the user's login name, the name of the tty the user ... |
|
whois(1) -- Internet user name directory service
|
|
whois looks up records in the Network Information Center database. The operands specified to whois are concatenated together (separated by white-space) and presented to the whois server. The default action, unless directed otherwise with a special name, is to do a very broad search, looking for matches to name in all types of records and most fields (name, nicknames, hostname, net address, etc.) i... |
|
write(1) -- interactively write (talk) to another user
|
|
The write command copies lines from your terminal to that of another user. When first called, it sends the message: Message from yourname (yourterminal) [ yourterminal) [ ) [ date ] ... to the receiving user's terminal. When it has successfully completed the connection, it also sends two bells to your own terminal to indicate that what you are typing is being sent. To set up two-way communication... |
|
wtmpfix(1m) -- manipulate connect accounting records
|
|
fwtmp fwtmp reads from the standard input and writes to the standard output, converting binary records of the type found in wtmps to formatted ASCII records. The ASCII version is useful to enable editing, via ed(1), bad records or for general purpose maintenance of the file. The argument -ic is used to denote that input is in ASCII form, and output is to be written in binary form. The arguments i ... |
|
X(1) -- a portable, network-transparent window system
|
|
X Window System servers run on computers with bitmap displays. The server distributes user input to and accepts output requests from various client programs through a variety of different interprocess communication channels. Although the most common case is for the client programs to be running on the same machine as the server, clients can be run transparently from other machines (including machi... |
|
x11start(1) -- start the X11 window system
|
|
NOTE: Beginning with the next release of HP-UX, x11start and its components (xinit, sys.x11start, and sys.Xdefaults) will not be supported. vuelogin (an enhanced version of xdm) will perform all start-up tasks, regardless of whether or not HP-VUE is in use. See the HP Visual Environment User's Guide and the vuelogin man page for information on vuelogin. x11start is a shell script that provides a ... |
|
xargs(1) -- construct argument list(s) and execute command
|
|
xargs combines the fixed initial-arguments with arguments read from standard input to execute the specified command one or more times. The number of arguments read for each command invocation and the manner in which they are combined are determined by the options specified. command, which can be a shell file, is searched for, using the $PATH environment variable. If command is omitted, /usr/bin/ec... |
|
xauth(1) -- X authority file utility
|
|
The xauth program is used to edit and display the authorization information used in connecting to the X server. This program is usually used to extract authorization records from one machine and merge them in on another (as is the case when using remote logins or granting access to other users). Commands (described below) may be entered interactively, on the xauth command line, or in scripts. Note... |
|
xclock(1) -- analog / digital clock for X
|
|
The xclock program displays the time in analog or digital form. The time is continuously updated at a frequency which may be specified by the user. |
|
xcmsdb(1) -- Device Color Characterization utility for X Color Management System
|
|
xcmsdb is used to load, query, or remove Device Color Characterization data stored in properties on the root window of the screen as specified in section 7, Device Color Characterization, of the ICCCM. Device Color Characterization data (also called the Device Profile) is an integral part of Xlib's X Color Management System (Xcms), necessary for proper conversion of color specification between de... |
|
xd(1) -- octal and hexadecimal dump
|
|
od and xd concatenate one or more input files and write their contents to standard output in a user-specified format. If file is not specified, the standard input is used. |
|
Xf86(1) -- X Window System display server
|
|
Xf86 is name for the XFree86 Window System display server delivered by Hewlett Packard. |
|
xf86config_convert(1) -- convert XF86Config file format
|
|
|
|
xfs(1) -- X font server
|
|
Xfs is the X Window System font server. It supplies fonts to X Window System display servers. |
|
xhost(1) -- server access control program for X
|
|
The xhost program is used to add and delete host names or user names to the list allowed to make connections to the X server. In the case of hosts, this provides a rudimentary form of privacy control and security. It is only sufficient for a workstation (single user) environment, although it does limit the worst abuses. Environments which require more sophisticated measures should implement the us... |
|
Xhp(1) -- X Window System server
|
|
X is the generic name for the window system server. It is started by the dtlogin program which is typically run by init(1M). Alternatively it may be started from the xinit(1) program, which is called by x11start. The displaynumber argument is used by clients in their DISPLAY environment variables to indicate which server to contact (machines may have several displays attached). This number can be ... |
|
xjim(1) -- Japanese input server on X Window
|
|
xjim is a japanese input server which can connect with application programs through XIM (X Window System, Version11 Input Method) interface. Before starting xjim, Kana Kanji conversion server kks must be executed in advance. Normally, kks is invoked automatically at system boot time. |
|
xlsfonts(1) -- server font list displayer for X
|
|
Xlsfonts lists the fonts that match the given pattern. The wildcard character "*" may be used to match any sequence of characters (including none), and "?" to match any single character. If no pattern is given, "*" is assumed. The "*" and "?" characters must be quoted to prevent them from being expanded by the shell. |
|
xmbind(1) -- Configures virtual key bindings
|
|
xmbind is an X Window System client that configures the virtual key bindings for Motif applications. This action is performed by mwm at its startup, so the xmbind client is only needed when mwm is not in use, or when you want to change bindings without restarting mwm. If a file is specified, it's contents are used as the virtual key bindings. If a file is not specified, the file .motifbind in the... |
|
xmodmap(1) -- utility for modifying keymaps in X
|
|
The xmodmap program is used to edit and display the keyboard modifier map and keymap table that are used by client applications to convert event keycodes into keysyms. It is usually run from the user's session startup script to configure the keyboard according to personal tastes. |
|
xntpd(1m) -- Network Time Protocol daemon
|
|
xntpd is an operating system daemon which sets and maintains the system time-of-day in synchronism with Internet standard time servers. xntpd is a complete implementation of the Network Time Protocol (NTP) version 3, as defined by RFC-1305, but also retains compatibility with version 1 and 2 servers as defined by RFC-1059 and RFC-1119, respectively. xntpd does all computations in 64-bit fixed poin... |
|
xntpdc(1m) -- special NTP query program
|
|
xntpdc is used to query the xntpd daemon about its current state and to request changes in that state. The program may be run either in interactive mode or controlled mode using command line arguments. Extensive state and statistics information is available through the xntpdc interface. In addition, nearly all the configuration options which can be specified at start up using xntpd's configuratio... |
|
xrdb(1) -- X server resource database utility
|
|
Xrdb is used to get or set the contents of the RESOURCE_MANAGER property on the root window of screen 0, or the SCREEN_RESOURCES property on the root window of any or all screens, or everything combined. You would normally run this program from your X startup file. Most X clients use the RESOURCE_MANAGER and SCREEN_RESOURCES properties to get user preferences about color, fonts, and so on for appl... |
|
Xserver(1) -- X Window System display server dispatcher
|
|
|
|
xset(1) -- user preference utility for X
|
|
This program is used to set various user preference options of the display. |
|
xsetroot(1) -- root window parameter setting utility for X
|
|
The setroot program allows you to tailor the appearance of the background ("root") window on a workstation display running X. Normally, you experiment with xsetroot until you find a personalized look that you like, then put the xsetroot command that produces it into your X startup file. If no options are specified, or if -def is specified, the window is reset to its default state. The -def optio... |
|
xsim(1) -- Simplified Chinese input server on X Window
|
|
xsim is a Simplified Chinese input server which can connect with application programs through XIM (X Window System, Version11 Input Method) interface. |
|
xstm(1m) -- Support Tools Manager
|
|
The Support Tools Manager (STM) provides three interfaces that allow a user access to an underlying toolset, consisting of information modules, firmware update tools, verifiers, diagnostics, exercisers, expert tools, and utilities: XSTM - the graphical interface (for X11-based graphics terminals) MSTM - the menu-based interface (for non-X11-based, non-graphics terminals) CSTM - the command line in... |
|
xstr(1) -- extract strings from C programs to implement shared strings
|
|
xstr maintains a file strings into which strings in component parts of a large program are hashed. These strings are replaced with references to this common area. This serves to implement shared constant strings, which are most useful if they are also read-only. The command: xstr -c name extracts the strings from the C source in name, replacing string references with expressions of the form (&xstr... |
|
xterm(1) -- terminal emulator for X
|
|
The xterm program is a terminal emulator for the X Window System. It provides DEC VT102/VT220 (VTxxx) and Tektronix 4014 compatible terminals for programs that cannot use the window system directly. If the underlying operating system supports terminal resizing capabilities (for example, the SIGWINCH signal in systems derived from 4.3bsd), xterm will use the facilities to notify programs running in... |
|
xtim(1) -- Traditional Chinese input methods server on X Window
|
|
xtim is a Traditional Chinese input methods server which can connect with application programs through XIMP (X Window System, Version 11 Input Method Protocol) interface. |
|
xudced(1) -- user-defined character editor
|
|
xudced is an editor that creates, modifies, and deletes user-defined characters (UDC). It uses bitmap(1) to edit UDC character patterns. Character patterns from existing HP Asian fonts can be modified to create UDCs. xudced runs on the X Window System, Version 11. If udc_file is not specified, the file $HOME/.nlio_udc is read. WIDTHxHEIGHT sets the size of UDC pattern. This can be specified by the... |
|
xwd(1) -- dump an image of an X window
|
|
Xwd is an X Window System window dumping utility. Xwd allows X users to store window images in a specially formatted dump file. This file can then be read by various other X utilities for redisplay, printing, editing, formatting, archiving, image processing, etc. The target window is selected by clicking the pointer in the desired window. The keyboard bell is rung once at the beginning of the dump... |
|
xwud(1) -- image displayer for X
|
|
Xwud is an X Window System image undumping utility. Xwud allows X users to display in a window an image saved in a specially formatted dump file, such as produced by xwd(1). |
|
xzoom(1) -- 0 xzoom- magnify parts of the screen
|
|
The xzoom program displays in its window a magnified area of the X11 display. The user can interactively change the zoomed area, the window size, magnification (optionally different magnification for X and Y axes) or rotate or mirror the image. |
|
yes(1) -- be repetitively affirmative
|
|
yes repeatedly outputs y, or if expletive is given, the expletive is output repeatedly. Termination is by interrupt. |
|
ypbind(1m) -- Network Information Service (NIS) server, binder, and transfer processes
|
|
The Network Information Service (NIS) provides a simple network lookup service consisting of databases and processes. The databases are files in a directory tree rooted at /var/yp (see ypfiles(4)). The processes are /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypserv, the NIS database lookup server, and /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypbind, the NIS binder. Both ypserv and ypbind are daemon processes activated at system startup time w... |
|
ypcat(1) -- print all values in Network Information Service map
|
|
ypcat prints all values in a Network Information Service (NIS) map specified by mname, which can be either a mapname or a map nickname. A map nickname is a synonym by which a NIS map can be referenced. Values are listed, one per line. |
|
ypinit(1m) -- build and install Network Information Service databases
|
|
ypinit is a shell script that creates Network Information Service (NIS) databases on either a master or slave NIS server. ypinit asks a few self-explanatory questions, and reports success or failure to the terminal. For an overview of Network Information Service, see ypfiles(4) and ypserv(1M). |
|
ypmake(1m) -- create or rebuild Network Information Service databases
|
|
ypmake is a shell script that builds one or more Network Information Service (NIS) maps (databases) on a master NIS server. If no arguments are specified, ypmake either creates maps if they do not already exist or rebuilds maps that are not current. These maps are constructed from ASCII files. ypmake then executes yppush to notify slave NIS servers of the change and make the slave servers copy the... |
|
ypmatch(1) -- print values of selected keys in Network Information Service map
|
|
ypmatch prints the values associated with one or more keys in a Network Information Service (NIS) map specified by mname. The mname can be either a mapname or a map nickname. A map nickname is a synonym by which a NIS map can be referenced. If multiple keys are specified, the same map is searched for an occurrence of each key. A match is made only when the case and length of a key is the same as t... |
|
yppasswd(1) -- change login password in Network Information System (NIS)
|
|
yppasswd changes or installs a password associated with the login name in the Network Information System (NIS). The NIS password can be different from the one on your own machine. If name is omitted, it defaults to the name returned by getlogin() (see getlogin(3C)). yppasswd prompts for the old NIS password (even if it does not exist), then twice for the new one. The old password must be entered c... |
|
yppasswdd(1m) -- daemon for modifying Network Information Service passwd database
|
|
The yppasswdd daemon handles password change requests from yppasswd (see yppasswd(1)). It changes a password entry in passwd_file, which must be in the format defined by passwd(4). The change is made only if the old password provided by yppasswd matches the encrypted password of that entry. yppasswdd should be executed only on the master Network Information Service (NIS) server for the passwd data... |
|
yppoll(1m) -- query NIS server for information about NIS map
|
|
yppoll asks a Network Information Service (NIS) server process (see ypserv(1M)) to return the order number (the time in seconds when the map was built - time(2)) and master NIS server's host name for a NIS database named mapname. yppoll then writes them to standard output. If the server uses Version 1 NIS protocol, yppoll uses this older protocol to communicate with it. yppoll also prints the old... |
|
yppush(1m) -- force propagation of Network Information Service database
|
|
yppush copies a Network Information Service (NIS) map (database), mapname, from the map's master NIS server to each slave NIS server. It is usually executed only on the master NIS server by shell script ypmake which is run either after changes are made to one or more of the master's NIS databases or when the NIS databases are first created. See ypmake(1M) and ypinit(1M) for more information on t... |
|
ypserv(1m) -- Network Information Service (NIS) server, binder, and transfer processes
|
|
The Network Information Service (NIS) provides a simple network lookup service consisting of databases and processes. The databases are files in a directory tree rooted at /var/yp (see ypfiles(4)). The processes are /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypserv, the NIS database lookup server, and /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypbind, the NIS binder. Both ypserv and ypbind are daemon processes activated at system startup time w... |
|
ypset(1m) -- bind to particular Network Information Service server
|
|
ypset tells ypbind to get Network Information Service (NIS) services for the specified domain from the ypserv process running on server (see ypserv(1M) and ypbind(1M)). server is the NIS server that the NIS client binds to, and is specified as either a host name or an IP address. If server is down or is not running ypserv, this is not discovered until a local NIS client process tries to obtain a b... |
|
ypupdated(1m) -- server for changing NIS information
|
|
ypupdated is a daemon that updates information in the Network Information Service (NIS) databases. It is activated at system startup when the NIS_MASTER_SERVER variable is set to 1 in /etc/rc.config.d/namesvrs file on the NIS master server. ypupdated consults the file updaters in the directory /var/yp to determine which NIS maps should be updated and how to change them. By default, the daemon requ... |
|
ypwhich(1) -- list which host is Network Information System server or map master
|
|
ypwhich lists the host name of the Network Information System (NIS) server that supplies NIS services to a NIS client. It can also print the NIS server that is the master for mname. The mname can be either a mapname or a map nickname. A map nickname is a synonym by which a NIS map can be referenced. If invoked without arguments, ypwhich prints the host name of the NIS server serving the local mach... |
|
ypxfr(1m) -- transfer NIS database from server to local node
|
|
ypxfr copies a Network Information Service (NIS) map (database) to the local host from a NIS server by using the NIS services. A map can be copied regardless of its age, or it can be copied depending on whether its modification time (order number) is more recent than that of the local map. The ypxfr command creates a temporary map in directory /var/yp/domain where domain is the NIS domain. The ypx... |
|
ypxfrd(1m) -- Network Information Service (NIS) server, binder, and transfer processes
|
|
The Network Information Service (NIS) provides a simple network lookup service consisting of databases and processes. The databases are files in a directory tree rooted at /var/yp (see ypfiles(4)). The processes are /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypserv, the NIS database lookup server, and /usr/lib/netsvc/yp/ypbind, the NIS binder. Both ypserv and ypbind are daemon processes activated at system startup time w... |
|
zcat(1) -- compress and expand data
|
|
The following commands compress and uncompress files and directory subtrees as indicated: compress Reduce the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. If reduction is possible, each file is replaced by a new file of the same name with the suffix .Z added to indicate that it is a compressed file. Original ownership, modes, access, and modification times are preserved. If no file is... |
